Todo Sobre WORK Order Ellipse

Work Orders - 3620
Ellipse Version 6.3.3
Document ID: 228604
Copyright 2009 by Mincom. All rights reserved.

This document is copyright and may contain proprietary information. Except as expressly permitted
under relevant copyright law, neither this document, nor any portion of it may be reproduced in any
manner (digital or otherwise), used as a basis to create derivative works, or translated into another
language without Mincoms express written consent.
Other named products may be registered trademarks of their respective owners.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Published in Australia - 20/11/2009, 13:12.
Contents
Contents
Work Orders
Further Information - Module Overview..........................................................................................8

Work Orders - Diagram ................................................................................................................11
Configuring Work Orders .............................................................................................................11
Configuring Work Orders - Diagram ..................................................................................13
Configure System Control File ...........................................................................................13
Configure District Control File ............................................................................................14
Work Order Prefixes ..........................................................................................................14
Create Work Order Prefixes...............................................................................................15
Maintain Table Files ...........................................................................................................16
Maintaining Work Orders .............................................................................................................17
Maintaining Work Orders - Diagram ..................................................................................19
Work Orders - MSO Programs...........................................................................................20
Create a Work Order ..........................................................................................................20
Record Materials Requirements for a Work Order ............................................................22
Record Equipment Requirements for a Work Order ..........................................................24
Record Resource Requirements for a Work Order............................................................25
Assign a Work Order ..........................................................................................................27
View My Work Orders ........................................................................................................27
View Work Orders for Work Group ....................................................................................28
View Work Notices .............................................................................................................28
Schedule Work Order ........................................................................................................29
Reschedule Single or Multiple Work Orders ......................................................................30
Create Requisition Header.................................................................................................32
Create a Requisition for Header Requirements .................................................................33
Record User Status ............................................................................................................34
Record Work in Progress for a Work Order .......................................................................35
Update Work Order Durations ...........................................................................................35
Update Work Order Cost Estimates...................................................................................36
Create a Work Order from a Standard Job ........................................................................38
Copy a Work Order from an Existing Work Order .............................................................40
Work Orders - Defer a Work Order ....................................................................................41
Complete a Work Order .....................................................................................................42
Cancel a Work Order .........................................................................................................42
Reopen a Work Order ........................................................................................................43
Finalise a Work Order ........................................................................................................44
Delete a Work Order ..........................................................................................................45
Review Work Order Details................................................................................................45
Review Work Order Requirements ....................................................................................47
Bulk Closure of Work Orders .............................................................................................48
Work Order Bulk Update ....................................................................................................49
Work Order Bulk Labour Costing .......................................................................................49
Maintaining Tolerances ................................................................................................................50
Apply Tolerance Values .....................................................................................................51
Maintaining Work Order Tasks.....................................................................................................53
Maintaining Work Order Tasks - Diagram .........................................................................55
Create a Work Order Task .................................................................................................55
Record Job Instructions on a Task ....................................................................................56
Record Material Requirements for a Task .........................................................................56
Record Equipment Requirements for a Task.....................................................................58
Record Resource Requirements for a Task ......................................................................60
Record APLs and Clear Task APL Type ...........................................................................62
Assign a Work Order Task .................................................................................................63
Schedule a Work Order Task.............................................................................................63
Reschedule a Work Order Task.........................................................................................64
2009 Mincom
ii
Contents
Create a Requisition ..........................................................................................................65

Create a Requisition for Task Requirements .....................................................................66
Modify Work Order Task and Cancel Task Update ...........................................................67
Record Work in Progress for a Task ..................................................................................68
Complete a Work Order Task ............................................................................................68
Cancel a Work Order Task ................................................................................................70
Reopen a Work Order Task ...............................................................................................71
Delete a Work Order Task .................................................................................................71
Review Work Order Task Details .......................................................................................72
Review Work Order Task Requirements and APLs...........................................................72
Maintaining Task Assignments ....................................................................................................73
Create New Task Assignment ...........................................................................................73
Review, Maintain and Delete Task Assignments...............................................................74
Printing Job Cards ........................................................................................................................76
Print Job Card for Work Order Headers ............................................................................77
Print Job Card for Work Order Task ..................................................................................78
Maintaining Parent Work Orders ..................................................................................................78
Maintaining Parent Work Orders - Diagram.......................................................................80
Create Parent Work Order .................................................................................................80
Create a Parent Work Order from a Parent Standard Job ................................................81
Create a Parent Work Order and Subordinate Work Orders from a Standard Job Plan or
Parent Standard Job ..........................................................................................................82
Create a Parent Work Order from an Existing Parent Work Order....................................83
Modify Parent Work Order .................................................................................................83
Delete Parent Work Order .................................................................................................84
Review all Details of a Parent Work Order ........................................................................84
Maintaining Incident Logsheets....................................................................................................85
Maintaining Incident Logsheets - Diagram ........................................................................86
Create Incident Logsheet Entries.......................................................................................87
Modify Incident Logsheet Entries .......................................................................................87
Review Incident Logsheet Entries .....................................................................................88
Delete Incident Logsheet Entries .......................................................................................88
Auto Create Incident Work Order.......................................................................................89
Viewing Links to Work Orders ......................................................................................................90
Viewing Links to Work Orders - Diagram ...........................................................................91
Review Accounting Entries Linked to a Work Order ..........................................................91
Review Requisitions Linked to a Work Order ....................................................................92
Review Equipment Tracing Actions Linked to a Work Order .............................................92
Review Condition Monitoring Linked to a Work Order .......................................................93
Review Job Estimates Linked to a Work Order .................................................................93
Review Job Packages Linked to a Work Order .................................................................94
Review Documents Linked to a Work Order......................................................................94
Work Orders - Reports .................................................................................................................96
MSA620 - Work Order Analysis Report .............................................................................97
MSA621 - Work Order Job Card ......................................................................................103
MSA622 - Work Order Requirements Report ..................................................................105
MSA710 - Missed Schedule Maintenance Report ...........................................................107
MSAEFF - Maintenance Effectiveness and Efficiency Report.........................................110
MSAMTF - Mean Time Between Failure .........................................................................118
MSAMTR - Mean Time to Repair.....................................................................................123
MSAXWO - Work Order Analysis Summary ....................................................................128
MSB622 - Work Order Cost Reallocation ........................................................................130
MSB623 - Work Order Automatic Finalisation .................................................................131
MSB624 - Update W/O Status for Available Material ......................................................133
MSB627 - Work Order Generation for Type Defects .......................................................134
MSB628 - Reset Tasks Plan Start Dates .........................................................................136
MSR620 - Work Order Analysis Report ...........................................................................137
MSR621 - Work Order Task - Job Card ..........................................................................139
MSR623 - Archive Work Selection...................................................................................140
MSR626 - Work Order Backlog Report ...........................................................................141
MSRXWJ - XML Work Order Job Card Report................................................................142
2009 Mincom
Contents
Work Orders - Screens
iii
143
Dialog Box - Bulk Closure Work Orders .....................................................................................145

Dialog Box - Bulk Reschedule Work Orders ..............................................................................146
Dialog Box - Cancel Work Order ................................................................................................147
Dialog Box - Cancel WO Task ...................................................................................................148
Dialog Box - Change Status .......................................................................................................149
Dialog Box - Complete Work Order............................................................................................150
Dialog Box - Complete WO Task ...............................................................................................152
Dialog Box - Copy from Existing Work Order .............................................................................153
Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Standard Job ............................................................................154
Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Work Order ...............................................................................155
Dialog Box - Copy from Standard Job........................................................................................156
Dialog Box - Copy Text to Work Order.......................................................................................157
Dialog Box - Defer Work Order ..................................................................................................158
Dialog Box - Finalise Work Order or Subsystem .......................................................................159
Dialog Box - Finish Assignment .................................................................................................160
Dialog Box - Job Instructions .....................................................................................................161
Dialog Box - Modify User Status ................................................................................................162
Dialog Box - New Requisition.....................................................................................................163
Dialog Box - Options (MSQ620).................................................................................................164
Dialog Box - Print GIS Map ........................................................................................................168
Dialog Box - Print Work Order Job Cards ..................................................................................170
Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress ......................................................................................171
Dialog Box - Requirements (Work Orders) ................................................................................172
Dialog Box - Reschedule ............................................................................................................181
Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks .................................................................................................182
Dialog Box - Reschedule Work Orders ......................................................................................183
Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements ...............................................................................184
Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements for a Task ..............................................................185
Dialog Box - Schedule Work ......................................................................................................186
Dialog Box - Schedule WO Task................................................................................................189
Dialog Box - Start Assignment ...................................................................................................191
Dialog Box - Options (Tools Options)......................................................................................192
Dialog Box - Update Estimates ..................................................................................................198
Dialog Box - WO Task Assign To...............................................................................................200
Dialog Box - Work Order Assign To ...........................................................................................201
Dialog Box - Work Order Durations............................................................................................202
Dialog Box - Work Order Task ...................................................................................................204
MSE620 - My Work Orders ........................................................................................................211
MSE620 - Work Orders Search .................................................................................................212
MSM001A - Maintain System Control File .................................................................................218
MSM001C - Maintain Systems Control File (Cont.) ...................................................................221
MSM00AA - Modify Modules Installed .......................................................................................229
MSM00BA - District Control Information ....................................................................................230
MSM00EA - District Control Information - Maintain Work Order Prefix Information ..................238
MSM097A - Review Standard Text ............................................................................................240
MSM620A - Maintain Complete Work Order Information ..........................................................241
MSM621A - Review Work Order Information .............................................................................243
MSM621B - Additional Work Order Selection Parameters ........................................................247
MSM621D - Review Work Order - Summary .............................................................................249
MSM622A - Review Work Order - General Information.............................................................253
MSM622B - Review Work Order - Planning Information ...........................................................257
MSM622C - Review Work Order Code/Completion Information ...............................................262
MSM622D - Review Duration Information .................................................................................265
MSM624A - Review Work Order - Summary of Tasks ..............................................................266
MSM624B - Review Work Order Task Information ....................................................................267
MSM625A - Maintain Parent Work Order Information ...............................................................270
MSM625B - Parent Work Order .................................................................................................271
MSM626A - Review of Parent Work Orders ..............................................................................273
MSM626B - Review Parent Work Order Detail ..........................................................................274
MSM626C - Summary of Parent Work Orders ..........................................................................276
2009 Mincom
iv
Contents
MSM627A - Maintain Incident Logsheets ..................................................................................277

MSM627B - Create/Modify/Delete Incident Logsheet Entries ...................................................279
MSM628A - Review Work Order Materials Status .....................................................................282
MSM62AA - Modify Work Order - General Information .............................................................284
MSM62CB - Work Order Subsystem Finalization ......................................................................288
MSM62DA - Maintain Equipment Tracing for Work Order .........................................................290
MSM62EA - Modify Job Duration Information ............................................................................295
MSM62FA - Maintain Work Order Task Completion Information ..............................................297
MSM62FB - Complete Work Order Tasks .................................................................................298
MSM62GA - Print Selected Work Orders and/or Tasks.............................................................299
MSM62HA - Create Work Order from Standard Job .................................................................300
MSM62IA - Create Short-form Orders For Equipment...............................................................303
MSM62JA - Create Short-form Work Orders for Plant...............................................................305
MSM62KA - Delete Work Orders ...............................................................................................307
MSM62LA - Review Job Duration Information ...........................................................................309
MSM62MA - Review Work Order Tasks - for Work Group ........................................................311
MSM62NA - Bulk Work Order Update Selection .......................................................................313
MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection ......................................................316
MSM62NC - Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration ......................................................318
MSM62PA - Create/Maintain Short-form Work Order................................................................321
MSM62QA - Create/maintain Shortform Work Order ................................................................325
MSM62RA - Maintain Work Order Billing Information................................................................331
MSM62SA - Review Work Order Billing Information..................................................................336
MSM62TA - Create/Maintain Incident Work Order ....................................................................339
MSM62VA - Review Incident Logsheets ....................................................................................343
MSM62VB - Review Incident Logsheet Entries .........................................................................345
MSM62WA - Create/Maintain Shortform Work Order ................................................................347
MSM62XA - Create Work Orders from a Std Job Plan Parent Std Job .....................................354
MSM62YA - Create/Maintain Work Order For Equipment .........................................................358
MSM633A - Review Complete Maintenance History .................................................................363
MSM854A - Labour Costing Transaction Entry .........................................................................364
MSQ140 - Requisition ................................................................................................................368
MSQ345 - Condition Monitoring Set Measurements .................................................................384
MSQ580 - Document .................................................................................................................387
MSQ620 - Work Orders .............................................................................................................392
MSQ620 - Work Order Task ......................................................................................................411
MSQ625 - Parent Work Order....................................................................................................419
MSQ629 - Notice ........................................................................................................................424
MSQ62C - Search for Task Assignments ..................................................................................431
MSQ62C - Create Task Assignments ........................................................................................433
MSQ650 - Equipment Tracing....................................................................................................434
MSQ655 - Job Estimating ..........................................................................................................436
MSQ695 - Job Package .............................................................................................................453
MSQ901 - Accounting Entry .......................................................................................................460
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Work Orders
The cost of building and maintaining assets is one of the biggest expenses for a business. It is nearly
impossible for companies to monitor or control costs if they do not have an accurate way to record and
track the work that is needed to keep assets in optimal working condition. Often the work required to
build new assets or lengthen the life of existing assets requires complex jobs that rely on human and
equipment resources as well as consumable materials all of which need planning and cost controls.
The Ellipse Work Order module is one of several modules that are integrated to provide for recording,
tracking, and analysing work that is performed. While the Project Control module provides a tool for
the management of large, complex capital projects from a primarily financial perspective, the Work
Order module provides the means for defining individual jobs or small groups of jobs from a
operational and maintenance perspective.
Work orders can cover any activity that may occur within an organisation. The work order provides a
means of notifying a person, work group or crew about an activity. You can specify the:
Requirements of the activity
Schedule for the activity
Progress of the activity
Estimated and actual costs of the activity
Work areas that are most efficiently captured by the Work Order tool include:
Preventative Maintenance - The ideal situation for maintenance organisations is to be able to

maintain equipment on a regular, efficient cycle so as to minimise breakdowns, extend the life of
assets, and ultimately increase productivity and/or revenue while effectively controlling costs.
Scheduled Work Orders are used as the vehicle to alert maintenance personnel of the need for this
preventative maintenance. Using Standard Job templates and Maintenance Scheduled Tasks to
produce regularly scheduled Work Orders gives maintenance managers the ability to control the
timing of maintenance and the resources used to perform the work.
Breakdown Maintenance - Although Preventative Maintenance is a goal of many asset intensive

organisations, this maintenance methodology is not always 100% effective nor is it always applied
to equipment that is not considered critical. In these cases, Work Orders can also provide the
means of recording the need for maintenance due to the imminent or actual breakdown of
equipment. While some cases may allow for Work Order creation before the work is undertaken,
often breakdown work may occur before a current Work Order can be created. This type of job
including the work performed, part causing equipment failure, and costs associated with the repair
can be recorded on a Work Order retrospectively so as to maintain a complete history of the
equipment.
Standing Work Orders - Frequent yet small jobs may be created as standalone Work Orders.
These Work Orders can then be used to capture costs each time the job occurs. A cumulative cost
of the job is then recorded against a single Work Order over a period of time. Training Work
Orders are a common example of a standing Work Order. Each time an employee attends training,
the hours attended can be recorded on the standing work order thereby summing the total training
time invested over a period of time.
Project Work Orders - When Work Orders are needed to manage work that belongs to a larger
project, the Project identification code can be assigned to the Work Order for financial inclusion in
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
the full Project accounting structure. Credit and debit transactions will automatically be booked to
the linked Project when any costing entries are recorded on the Work Order.
Warranty Work Orders - The Work Order module offers the ability to produce a warning if a
Work Order is created for work on a piece of equipment that is currently under warranty. The
Work Order application will check the Equipment Register to determine if the date of the Work
Order is before the expiry date of the equipment's warranty. Providing this warranty warning helps
to eliminate in-house work that can potentially void a manufacturers warranty.
Within a work order, an activity can be recorded as one or more tasks. The costing of Work Order
activities can be recorded at the header level of the overall work order or against these individual work
order tasks.
Work orders and parent work orders can be created by referencing existing documents such as work
orders, parent orders, parent standard jobs, and standard job plans.
Glossary
These terms are in common use throughout this module:
APL
Equipment
Job Estimate
Job Package
Parent Standard Job
Parent Work Order
Requirements
Standard Job
Standard Job Plan
Task
Diagram
The Work Orders module diagram represents the processes associated with the Work Orders module
and its integration with other modules.
Reports
Comprehensive reports and batch processes are available within Ellipse, which allow users to access
additional information and perform batch update activities.
To see a description of these reports, refer to Work Order Reports.
Note: For information on how to generate a batch job or report, refer to Reporting.
See Also:
Job Estimates
Job Packaging
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Project Control
Work Requests
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Further Information - Module Overview

Ellipse provide three modules to identify and control jobs. These are:
Project Control module, defining a large hierarchically arranged series of jobs and tasks, and
utilising critical path analysis and other monitoring techniques to assist in the control of the job
during its life. Costs can be collected at each level of the hierarchy.
Work Order module, defining an individual job, which can be related directly (not hierarchically)
to other work orders or to projects. Ellipse assumes that operational or maintenance personnel will
control the execution of the job with little monitoring by Ellipse. Costs can be collected for a work
order and its parent work order.
Maintenance Scheduling task, defining recurring tasks which can:
be performed in its own right without a work order
be performed in its own right, with costs being collected in standing work orders.
initialise a unique work order on each occurrence of the task, using the standard job
mechanisms of Ellipse.
The following information pertaining to work orders is available:
Planning information, describing when and who should do the job and the estimated resources and
costs required.
A series of codes are available to comprehensively categorise a job. These codes can be set up to
meet individual company requirements. They include:
Job description code
Maintenance type
User-defined job classifications (10); for example, System failure code, Part defect code and
Quantity/Disposition code
History file code
Part number causing failure
Equipment serial number taken off
Equipment serial number installed on
Actual costs, labour hours and durations incurred in doing the job.
Ellipse provides powerful recording, reporting and analysis mechanisms, using both coded and textual
information. Extensive text can be entered by the person completing the work order, to permanently
record facts about the job.
During work order creation, Ellipse detects whether or not the equipment or any equipment fitted to
the equipment (the subject of the work order) is still under warranty. This is performed by either
comparing the current operating date to the warranty expiry date (held on the Equipment Register) or
comparing the latest operating statistic value to the warranty expiry statistic value.
If the equipment or any equipment fitted to the equipment is subject to warranty, the work order type
is overview (after confirmation) with the default warranty work order type from the system control
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
file. This will not be apparent during this transaction, but subsequent modification to, or enquiry
against, the work order will reveal that this action has occurred.
If overwriting of the work order type is not required, simply blank out the default warranty work order
type in the system control file.
An account code must be recorded against a work order when it is created.
If an account code can be entered against a work order, the code is defaulted where it has not been
entered. If an account code cannot be entered against a work order (For example, using some shortform work order screens), it is also defaulted. Where the account code is defaulted from is determined
from the following hierarchy:
Default from a Standard Job from which the work order is to be created, (if a Standard Job has
been entered or defaulted, and it has an Account Code recorded against it).
Default according to the Costing Option set, from either the equipment reference or the project
reference entered. (This only applies where an equipment reference or project reference can be
entered when creating work orders, and both have been entered. If both an equipment reference
and project reference can be entered, but only one is entered, the default is from what is entered.)
If either an equipment reference or a project reference can be entered, but not both, the Account
Code is defaulted from the entered reference.
When creating a work order via a short-form work order program, a standard job can be entered from
which to create the work order. The following short-form work order programs allow entry of a
standard job:
MSO62P
MSO62Q
MSO62W
MSO62H
MSO62Y
MSO62T.
The screen for these short-form work order programs is blank the first time it is displayed.
Press the transmit key after any field is completed, to display the default standard job and its details.
Work order creation can then proceed by editing and completing the screen fields. Defaulting of
standard jobs is as follows:
If a prefix is entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62*<PREFIX>
(the asterisk is the letter associated with the relevant short-form work Order program. For
example, M62 PREFIX would be used with the create/maintain short-form work order program,
MSO62P).
If no prefix is entered the program tries to use a default standard job M62*WM (the asterisk is the
letter associated with the relevant short-form Work Order program). The same processing applies
as where the prefix is entered.
At any point during work order creation, you can enter an equipment reference and press the
appropriate function key to transfer to the review standard jobs summary program (MSO692) and
display standard Jobs for selection. Upon return from the review standard jobs summary program
2009 Mincom
10
Work Orders - 3620
(MSO692) where a standard job has been selected, you can continue creating a work order by editing
and completing screen fields.
If screen details have been entered prior to the selection of a standard job, the standard job details
merge with the entered details. That is, the standard job details do not overwrite the previously entered
details.
Processing Description
Work order information can be entered into Ellipse from a work order form, inspection sheets,
operator logs or any source notifying the requirement for the job. Alternatively, work orders can be
created in Ellipse using pre-determined standard job information. Forms can be provided in formats
specific to each work area's requirement, and can serve a number of roles.
These include:
Operators log sheets
Inspectors reports
Inter-work group requests to perform work
Paperwork to get the job done
Inter-shift log sheet
Computer input documents.
All financial transactions ( For example, stores issues, purchase requisitions, labour charges) prepared
by the related Information management system can record work order numbers. The quoting of work
order numbers on time sheets and material requisitions and other documents automatically attributes
costs to the work order. If the Cost categorisation module is used, costs can be broken down by cost
category. Cost categories are defined by their use, and can be as simple or as complex as required. The
costing mechanism for work orders can be devoted entirely to supporting the needs of operations and
maintenance personnel, integrated with, but independent of, financial accounting requirements.
When a project number is added to, removed from or changed in a work order, debit and/or credit
transactions are created for the project with zero dollar value for auditing purposes. The total amount
transferred and the work order number is included in the transaction description.
Work orders can be opened at any time prior to, during, or after the actual occurrence of a job. Any
transactions actioned before a work order is opened are automatically collected when the work order is
created. Work orders opened in advance can optionally quote planning information, including labour
resources required and an application parts listing designating the material required. This action
automatically adds the work order into the resources planning mechanisms of Ellipse for both labour
and material.
A number of screens are available to provide comprehensive online review of work order information,
including both future and completed work. In addition, users can request batch reports online. All
work orders meeting the parameters are printed in subsequent batch reports. This facility provides a
very comprehensive history analysis capability.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
11
Work Orders - Diagram

The diagram below represents the processes associated with the Work Orders module and its
integration with other modules.
Configuring Work Orders

Within Ellipse there are three areas in which configuration activities must be performed before the
Work Orders module can be used. These areas are:
System controls
District controls
Table files
During implementation, configuration for the system control and district control is established. With
rare exceptions, these settings should not be changed.
Mincom-defined table files may be modified throughout the life of the system.
Table files may be added to throughout the life of the system.
2009 Mincom
12
Work Orders - 3620
Diagram
The Work Orders Configuration process diagram represents the Work Order configuration process.
Business Rules
The following business rule governs this process:
The setting of the System and District control files should go through a business requirement
study before final agreement and before the data fields/table files are set. To avoid data corruption,
it is imperative changes are not made after initial configuration, except for the settings expressly
stated in this document that may be modified without affecting the integrity of the system.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
13
Configuring Work Orders - Diagram

The diagram below represents the system activities associated with the Configuring Work Orders
process.
Configure System Control File

Use this activity to select the appropriate configuration settings for Work Orders.
System Control settings are usually determined during an Ellipse implementation or upgrade project.
Settings are recorded in a Configuration Workbook, and any changes are recorded along with
supporting comments for the reason for the change. Security access to change System Control settings
is normally limited to the System Administrator.
Activity Steps
1. Access MSO001 - Maintain Systems Control Information.
The MSM001A - Maintain Systems Control File screen displays.
2. Enter option Maintain Systems Control Information.
2009 Mincom
14
Work Orders - 3620
3. Click OK.
The MSM00AA - Maintain Modules Installed screen displays.
4. Enter through until you locate the 3620 Work Orders module:
Installed (enter Y)
5. Click Save.
6. Press ENTER until you reach MSM001C.
The MSM001C - Maintain System Control File (Cont.) screen displays.
7. Enter data in the following field on the Scheduling/WO's tab:
Default Warranty WO Type
8. Click Save.
Configure District Control File

Use this activity to select the appropriate configuration settings for Work Orders.
District Control settings are usually determined during an Ellipse implementation or upgrade
project. Settings are recorded in a Configuration Workbook and any changes are recorded along with
supporting comments for the reason for the change. Security access to change District Control settings
is normally limited to the System Administrator.
Activity Steps
2. Enter option Modify District Control Information.
3. Enter data in the following field:
District
4. Click OK.
The MSM00BA - Modify District Control Information screen displays.
5. Select the Work Orders tab.
6. Enter data in the following fields:
Auto Authorisation
Reallocation Debit Expense Element
Reallocation Credit Expense Element
7. Click Save.
Work Order Prefixes

The Work Order system provides two major entities:
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Parent Work Order
Work Order (subordinate)
15
The ID for each entity can be assigned by Ellipse. This transaction allows maintenance of the
information used by Ellipse to assign the ID numbers.
Overview diagram
Maintain Work Order
Prefixes Windows
MSM00EA
Maintain Work Order

Prefix Program
MSO00E
System Control File

MSF000
Additional information
The IDs for parent work orders and work orders are a maximum of eight characters each. In each case,
when you create a new work order, either enter the entire number or allow Ellipse to assign one. When
you allow Ellipse to assign the number, you can designate a 2-character prefix. This prefix is the first
two characters of the 8-character work order number.
If you do not enter a prefix, Ellipse assigns the whole work order number.
Any prefix you enter can be alphabetic or numeric. The number (or portion thereof) assigned by
Ellipse is always numeric. A separate series of numbers is maintained for each prefix and for those
assigned with no prefix.
Each work order prefix can be defined as having leading zeroes as part of the system-generated
number. For example, if the appropriate flag is set to 'Y' (suppress zeroes), and the current number for
prefix 'PR' is 123, the next system-generated number is PR124. If the flag is set to 'N' (leading zeroes
required), the next number is PR000124.
This transaction allows establishment of valid prefixes for work order use. It optionally enables users
to enter (or modify) the first sequential number Ellipse will assign to work orders.
Create Work Order Prefixes

Use this activity to enter Work Order prefix information to control automatic assignment to Work
Orders.
The IDs for Parent Work Orders and Work Orders are a maximum of eight characters each. In each
case, when you create a new Work Order, either enter the entire number or allow Ellipse to assign
one. When you allow Ellipse to assign the number, you can designate a 2-character prefix. This prefix
is the first two characters of the 8-character Work Order number.
2009 Mincom
16
Work Orders - 3620
If you do not enter a prefix, Ellipse assigns the whole Work Order number.
Any prefix you enter can be alphabetic or numeric. The number assigned by Ellipse is always numeric.
A separate series of numbers is maintained for each prefix and for those assigned with no prefix.
Each Work Order prefix can be defined as having leading zeroes as part of the system-generated
number. For example, if the appropriate flag is set to Y - suppress zeroes, and the current number for
prefix 'PR' is 123, the next system-generated number is PR124. If the flag is set to N - leading zeroes
required, the next number is PR000124.
Activity Steps
2. Enter option Modify District Control Information.
District
4. Click OK.
The MSM00BA - Modify District Control Information screen displays.
5. Press ENTER until you reach MSM00EA.
Prefix
Description
Zero Suppress
Parent Sequence Number
Workorder Sequence Number
7. Click Save
The MSM00EA - Maintain Work Order Prefix Information screen redisplays.
8. Click Save.
Maintain Table Files

There are table files that need to be maintained as a part of the configuration of this module.
For information on how to maintain a table file, refer to Maintaining Table Files. Users normally only
need to maintain client-defined table files, not Mincom-defined table files. Ellipse security determines
whether you are able to maintain table files.
Click on an item below to see the table file description and its associated values (if applicable):
CC - Completion Text Code
CI - Completion Instructions
JD - Job Description
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
17
MJC - Mandatory Job Codes
MT - Maintenance Type
MWDO - Manage Work District Options
PSDW - Plan Start Date Warning Messages
PY - Work Order Priority Code
SD - Plant Shutdown Type
SI - Safety Instructions
US - User Defined WO Task Status
UW - Unit of Works
W0 - W9 - Work Order Job Codes
WO - Work Order Types
WOJC - Work Order Job Card
WS - User Work Order Status
The Locations application requires the following Table Files to be configured:
LC0-LC9 - Document Classification
LCTY - Location Code Type
LNSN - Location Special Needs
SLOC - Street Location
STTY - Street Type
SY - State Table
Maintaining Work Orders

A Work Order can cover any activity that may occur within an organisation. It provides a means of
notifying a person, work group or crew about the details of an activity and when the activity needs to
take place.
A Work Order can be used for actioning and tracking small or large activities. For example, the Work
Order application can be used to action the Task of fitting a new head light on a vehicle and it can also
be used to action the construction of a new warehouse. As action on the Work Order progresses, one
or more people can add details.
Large activities can be specified as a number of small activities or Tasks. Requirements and schedules
can be recorded against individual Tasks and totalled for the Work Order.
Business Rules
2009 Mincom
18
Work Orders - 3620
The Work Order authorisation process is only available in conjunction with the Position Management
module or when the Automatic Authorisation flag is set. If the Position Management module is not
installed, Work Order authorisation depends only on the existence of an Authorised By responsibility
code in the following cases:
The Position Management module is not installed
The Position Management module is not installed and the Automatic Authorisation flag is not set
For further information on the Automatic Authorisation process please refer to the Ellipse Information
Package CD.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
19
Maintaining Work Orders - Diagram

Maintain Complete
Work Order Infor.
MSM620A
Standard Job File

MSF690
MSM62AA
MSM62BA
MSM62CA, B
MSM62EA
MSM623A
MSM62FB
MSM62GA
Work Order File MSF620
Standard Job
Task File
MSF693
Other Validation
Files
Maintain Complete Work

Order Information
MSO620
Work Order Task File

MSF623
Work Order Duration File

MSF622
Create / Modify Work
Order General Infor.
Program MSO62A
Enter Equipment Fitment

Infor. Program
MSO62D
Maintain Work Order

Planning Infor. Program
MSO62B
Maintain Duration
Infor. Program
MSO62E
Update Work Order Code/

Completion / Subsys
Finalize Infor. Program
MSO62C
Update Work Order Task

Infor. Progr. Program
MSO623
Equipment Tracing File

MSF650
Complete Work
Order Task
MSO62F
Work Order
Update Subroutine
MSS620
2009 Mincom
20
Work Orders - 3620
Work Orders - MSO Programs

The MSQ620 - Work Order program replaces the overall functionality of both the long form and short
form work order programs. However, short form work orders can still be used for specialised
situations. The short form work order programs available in Ellipse include the following:
MSO62P - Create/Maintain Short Form Work Order
MSO62H - Create Work Order From Standard Job
MSO62Q - Short Form Work Order and Task
MSO62W - Short Form Work Order which provides the ability to create and complete Work
Order on one screen
MSO62Y - Short Form Work Order which provides a list of current Work Orders for Equipment
entered
There are also programs that allow the quick creation of multiple Work Orders on one screen. These
include:
MSO62I - Create Work Orders for Equipment
MSO62J - Create Work Order for Minor Plant
Create a Work Order

Use this activity to create a stand-alone Work Order or a Work Notice. A stand-alone Work Order is
one that is created by directly accessing the Work Order application and creating a Work Order from
scratch without the use of an MST or other Mincom Ellipse trigger. A Work Notice is a notice
containing information about the work required for communication to an authority. It is required when
work that is to be performed at a location, requires an authority to be notified.
Work Orders cover any activity that occurs within an organisation. The Work Order provides a means
of notifying a person, work group or crew about an activity. You can specify the:
Requirements of the activity
Schedule for the activity
Estimated and actual costs of the activity
Duration.
The Work/Daily Whereabouts Notices is created using a Work Order. To initiate this process, a notice
location is entered on the Address tab and an appropriate Maintenance Type entered with the relevant
associated values. When the Work Order is saved, a Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice is created. The
Notifications menu option and icon is activated for users to review the associated notice.
A Work Order is used to record work already done. Work Orders do not need to be created prior to an
activity, especially for emergency work. However, they should be created and closed after the fact to
record the problem description, solution and cost of the work.
For information on other Work Order creation options such as short-form Work Orders, see Work
Orders - Further Information.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
21
1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order.

The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays.
2. Select Work OrderNew.
The MSQ620 - Work Order screen displays.
Work Order No
Work Order Desc
Enter a Work Order Prefix if applicable.
The Work Order number can be automatically generated by the system if the field is left blank, or
you can enter the number manually.
4. Enter data in the following fields on the Definition tab:
Work Group
5. Enter data in the following fields of the Planning tab:
Work Order Type
Maintenance Type
An associate value can be entered against a Maintenance Type code to create a link to the
Notifications module (3629).
6. Click EGI Profile Search to search for component and modifier codes.
7. Enter data in the following field of the Cost Allocation tab:
Cost Centre/Account
8. If required, complete the remaining details of the Work Order on the following available tabs:
Planning
Tasks
Cost Allocation
Address
Completion
Job Codes
Reference Codes
9. Click Save.
A Work Order number is generated. If a prefix is used, the prefix is the first two characters of the
Work Order number.
Note: If the maintenance type with the relevant associated value is entered on the Planning tab
and a notice location is entered on the Address tab, a work notice is generated when the work
2009 Mincom
22
Work Orders - 3620
order is created. You can view or modify the work notice details by clicking
. You can also
select Work Order Notifications to review or modify the work notice details.
10. Select Work OrderClose.
Record Materials Requirements for a Work Order

Use this activity to record the details and costs of Material requirements for a Work Order. Material
requirements will be used to requisition catalogued and non-catalogued parts from a Work Order for
use during a job. This activity will set material requirements on the Work Order header.
Activity Steps
2. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order.
3. Click
The Dialog Box - Work Order Requirements displays.

4. Select the Materials tab then click
Two extra tabs display, the Details and Costs tabs.

5. Select the Details tab.
6. Select a Material Type option.
7. Perform one of the following steps:
a. If you selected the Catalogued option:
Stock Code
2. Select Requirements Show.
The Part Number, Mnemonic and Description displays.
3. Go to Step 9.
b. If you selected the Non-Catalogued option:
Part Number
Mnemonic
2. Go to Step 9.
Only catalogued items from the login district are added as material requirements.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
23
If the Non-Catalogued option is selected and a Part Number/Mnemonic combination entered

exists on the supply catalogue, the system returns a warning message indicating that the item
is a catalogued item and the stock code defaults.
8. Select the Costs tab.
9. Select a Costing Method option.
a. If you selected the System Rate option:
1. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group:
Qty Reqd (Quantity Required)
UOM (Unit of Measure)
2. Go to Step 12.
b. If you selected the Manual Rate option:
1. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group:
Item Price
3. Go to Step 12.
c. If you selected the Fixed Amount option:
Fixed Amount
3. Go to Step 12.
The System Rate option is only available for items that have a Material Type of
Catalogued.
11. Click
Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display in the Materials tab summary grid.
12. Repeat Steps 5 12 until all material requirements are recorded.
13. Select Requirements Close.
14. Click Save.
2009 Mincom
24
Work Orders - 3620
The Material Requirements are saved.
Record Equipment Requirements for a Work Order

Use this activity to record the details and costs of Equipment requirements for a Work Order.
Assigning Equipment requirements ensures that the correct equipment needed to perform the job is
made available during the Work Order scheduling process. This activity sets equipment requirements
on the Work Order header. To give the planner more flexibility in finding equipment that is available
for a job, enter an equipment type designated as the equipment requirement rather than an individual
item of equipment.
Activity Steps
3. Click

4. Select the Equipment tab, then click

5. Enter data in the following field on the Details tab:
Equipment Type
Fleet Size
2. Go to Step 10.
1. Enter data in the following fields in the Price Costing Method field group:
Rate Amount
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
25
Fleet Size
3. Go to Step 10.
1. Enter data in the following fields in the Price Costing Method field group:
Fixed Amount
2. Go to Step 10.
d. If you selected the Fixed Amount option:
Fleet Size
2. Go to Step 10.
The System Rate is taken from the Equipment Rate File.
9. Click
Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display in the Equipment tab summary grid.
10. Repeat Steps 5 10 until all equipment requirements are recorded.
12. Click Save.
The Equipment Requirements are saved.
Record Resource Requirements for a Work Order

Use this activity to record the details and costs of Resource requirements for a Work Order. Assigning
resource requirements ensures that personnel with the required skills and certifications are scheduled
to perform the work. This activity sets resource requirements on the Work Order header.
Activity Steps
3. Click
.
2009 Mincom
26
Work Orders - 3620

4. Select the Resources tab then click

5. Enter data in the following fields on the Details tab:
Resource Class
Resource Code
Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required)
Crew Size
2. Go to Step 10.
Rate Amount
Crew Size
3. Go to Step 10.
Fixed Amount
2. Go to Step 10.
Crew Size
2. Go to Step 10.
9. Click
Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs appear in the Resources tab summary grid.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
27
10. Repeat Steps 5 10 until all resource requirements are recorded.

12. Click Save.
The Resource Requirements are saved.
Assign a Work Order

Use this activity to assign a Work Order to an individual or a crew. Details of the assignment display
in the appropriate fields on the Planning tab. The assignment of a Work Order can be done in the Job
Dispatch module by finding the best match based on the Work Order requirements.
Activity Steps
3. Click
The Dialog Box - Work Order Assign To displays.

4. Enter data in one of the following key fields:
Assign to Individual
Crew
5. Click OK.
6. Click Save.
Assignment details are saved.
View My Work Orders

Use this activity to review all work orders assigned to the current logged-on user.
Activity Steps
a. Click on the 'My Work Orders' link on the Home Page.
b. Access MSE620 - My Work Orders.
2. The MSE620 - My Work Orders screen displays a list of all work orders assigned to the current
logged-on user.
2009 Mincom
28
Work Orders - 3620
View Work Orders for Work Group

Use this activity to review all work orders assigned to a work group. These can be filtered by status if
required.
Activity Steps
a. Click on the 'My Work Orders' link on the Home Page.
b. Access MSE620 - My Work Orders.
The MSE620 - My Work Orders screen displays a list of all work orders assigned to the current
logged-on user.
2. Select Options Retrieve for Work Group.
The MSE620 - My Work Orders screen displays the current district and some additional input
fields.
Work Group
A Status may also be specified to narrow the search results.
4. Click Submit.
The MSE620 - My Work Orders screen displays a list of work orders matching the search criteria.
View Work Notices

Use this activity to review Notifications created due to specific Work Order conditions.
A notice is created in the Work Order application when a Work Order is saved if:
A notice location containing a street or section sensitivity is assigned.
The maintenance type for the work order is linked to a category of work code with details related
to the sensitivity of the notice location.
When a work notice or daily whereabouts notice is required, the following notice details are generated
from the information on the Work Order:
Category of work
Notice period
Work planned start date (from Work Order planned start date)
Due date (if Work Order planned start date exists)
Location
Location description
Notice for Work Order number and description

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
29
Activity Steps
or select Work Order Notifications.
3. Click
The MSQ629 - Work/ Daily Whereabouts Notice screen displays.

4. Review the Work Notice details on the following tabs:
Notice
Reinstatement
Protected Period
History
5. Select Notice Close.
Schedule Work Order

Use this activity to identify criteria used for scheduling the work. Scheduling is triggered by a date, an
operational statistic, or by linking the Work Order to a scheduled shutdown.
Activity Steps
3. Click
The Dialog Box - Schedule Work displays.

4. Select a Schedule Type option.
The options available are Shutdown Details, Plan Dates and Statistics.
a. If you selected the Shutdown Details option as the Schedule Type:
1. Enter data in the following fields
Number
Type
2009 Mincom
30
Work Orders - 3620
Equipment Reference
2. Go to step 6.
b. If you selected the Plan Dates option as the Schedule Type:
Plan Start Date
Plan Start Time
Plan Finish Date
Plan Finish Time
If the Notifications (3629) module is activated, entry in the fields of the Plan Dates group
will populate the fields in the following groups on the Protected Period tab of the
MSQ629 - Work Notice application:
Work Planned Start
Work Planned Start Time
Work Planned Finish
Work Planned Finish Time
These planned dates will also affect the notice due date. If the notice period indicates 2
weeks, the notice due date would then be 2 weeks prior to the Work Planned Start Date.
2. Go to step 6.
c. If you selected the Statistics option as the Schedule Type:
Type
Value
2. Go to step 6.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Save.
Scheduling details are saved.
Reschedule Single or Multiple Work Orders

Use this activity to reschedule single or multiple work orders. Multiple work orders are rescheduled in
bulk. You can assign rescheduling to an individual, crew or work group.
If required, you can select several work orders at once and schedule them with the same planned start
date.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
31
Note: To select non-consecutive work orders, hold down the CTRL key while selecting the required
work orders.
To select a range of work orders, select first the work order in the range, then hold down the SHIFT
key and select the last work order in the range.
Activity Steps
a. Select the work orders to reschedule in bulk:
1. Select WorkOrder Work Order Reschedule
The Dialog Box - Bulk Reschedule Work Orders displays.
Individual
Crew
Work Group
Start Date
Start Time
Finish Date
Finish Time
4. Go to Step 7.
b. To select a single work order to reschedule, go to Step 5.
4. Double-click the required Work Order.
5. Select WorkOrder Reschedule.
The Dialog Box - Reschedule Work Orders displays.
Individual
Crew
Work Group
Start Date
2009 Mincom
32
Work Orders - 3620
Start Time
Finish Date
Finish Time
8. Click OK.
The Confirm - Bulk operation completed successfully, would you like to refresh search from?
message displays.
9. Click Yes.
Rescheduling details are saved.
Create Requisition Header

Use this activity to manually create a Requisition from a Work Order. Requisitioning directly from the
Work Order gives Maintenance personnel the freedom to requisition materials immediately without
needing to go through a manual stores requisitioning process. Requisitioning of materials can be done
manually from the Work Order header or set up to occur automatically depending on the Work Group
and Work Order settings.
Activity Steps
3. Click
The Dialog Box - New Requisition displays.

4. Select a Requisition Type. It is not necessary to enter a Requisition Number as Ellipse
automatically generates one.
5. Click OK.
The MSQ140 - Requisition screen displays.
Data from the Work Order will default into the Requisition.
6. Enter data in key fields on the following tabs:
General
Delivery/Priority
Questions
Purchase Details
Other
Items
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
33
The key costing details are transferred to the Requisition. The individual items or APL required is
entered on the Items tab before the requisition is completed.
For more detailed information on requisitioning refer to the Purchasing module.
7. Click Save.
The Requisition is saved.
Create a Requisition for Header Requirements

Use this activity to create a Requisition for Work Order Header Requirements.
If you have already created materials requirements on either the Work Order header or task, the
manual creation of a Requisition as explained in the Create Requisition Header activity is
redundant. Instead, you can create a Requisition from the requirements on the Work Order header or
task. When a requisition is created from material requirements, a 'Choose Material Requirements'
screen displays on top of the MSQ140. You can then select the existing requirements you want to
requisition. Once you have selected the requirements, MSQ140 continues on as expected with these
requirements listed as requisition items.
Note: The material requirements must be already saved on the Work Order before this activity is
performed. If a requisition is created before the material requirements are saved, no stock item details
default on the requisition and all items are entered manually as in the previous activity.
Activity Steps
3. Click

4. Select the Materials tab.
5. Click

6. Select a Requisition Type in the Requisition Type field group.
It is not necessary to enter a Requisition Number as Ellipse automatically generates one.
7. Click OK.
The MSQ140 screen and Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements both display.
8. Enter data in the following fields on the MSQ140 screen:
Date Required By
2009 Mincom
34
Work Orders - 3620
Authorised By
9. Highlight the material requirement to be requisitioned on the Dialog Box - Select Material
Requirements.
10. Click Select.
11. Repeat steps 10 - 11 until all material requirements to be included on the requisition have a YES
in the Selected field.
12. Click OK.
Data from the Work Order defaults into the Requisition.
13. Enter data in fields on the following tabs on the MSQ140 screen as required:
General
Delivery/Priority
Questions
Purchase Details
Other
Items
14. Click Save.
Record User Status

Use this activity to record the user status of a Work Order. The Work Order status is Mincom defined
and changes as a result of opening, authorising or closing a Work order. The User Status is client
defined and is used to further explain what stage a work order is at.
Activity Steps
3. Click
The Dialog Box - Modify User Status displays.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
35
User Status
5. Click OK.
The user status displays in the User Status field on the Planning tab.
6. Click Save.
The user status is saved.
Record Work in Progress for a Work Order

Use this activity to record work in progress for a Work Order. Work in progress is measured as either
units complete or percentage complete against the Units Required value recorded on the Planning tab.
Note: The Units of Work and No. of Units Reqd fields must be populated before this activity is
performed.
For example, if 12 units are required and you enter 6 units in the Units Complete field, a Percent
Complete entry of 50% displays. If 50 units are required and you enter 20% in the Percent Complete
field, 10 displays in the Units Complete field.
Activity Steps
3. Select Work Order Record Work in Progress.
The Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress - Work Order displays.
a. Select the Units Complete option, and enter data in the following field:
Units Complete
b. Select the Percent Complete option, and enter data in the following field:
Percent Complete
5. Click OK.
The Work in Progress details display on the Cost Allocation tab.
6. Click Save.
The work in progress details are saved.
Update Work Order Durations

Use this activity to:
Specify the actual and estimated duration of a Work Order

2009 Mincom
36
Work Orders - 3620
Record delay reasons and durations during the course of the job
Activity Steps
3. Select Work Order Durations.
The Dialog Box - Work Order Durations displays.
Actual Job Duration
Estimated Job Duration
Date
Code
Start Time
Finish Time
Hours
5. Select the Calculate Duration Hours option.
6. Click OK.
The Work Order Duration details are recorded.
Update Work Order Cost Estimates

Use this activity to update Work Order cost estimates.
Costs for a Work Order display on the Costs tab. Estimated costs are recorded as either calculated or
estimated costs. Estimated costs are calculated from requirements recorded against a Work Order or
entered manually. Preferences for estimated or calculated costs for each requirement type (equipment,
materials and resources) are specified in the Update Estimates screen.
The following business rules govern this process:
If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected, costs are calculated from requirement costs
recorded in the Requirements window and displayed in the appropriate field.
If the Use Calculated Costs option is de-selected for a requirement type, the estimated cost is
manually recorded in the appropriate field.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
37
3. Click
The Dialog Box - Update Estimates displays.

4. Perform one of the following steps in the Resource field group:
a. Select the Use Calculated Costs option.
b. Enter data in the following fields:
Estimated Cost
Estimated Hours
If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected, you cannot enter data in the key fields of that
field group.
5. Perform one of the following in the Material field group:
b. Enter data in the following field:
Estimated Cost
If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected you cannot enter data in the key fields of that
field group.
6. Perform one of the following in the Other field group:
Estimated Cost
field group.
7. Perform one of the following in the Equipment field group:
Estimated Cost
field group.
8. Perform one of the following in the Total field group:
a. Select the Use Estimated Total Costs option and enter data in the following field:
Total
b. Leave the Use Estimated Total Costs field blank and let Ellipse calculate the total.
2009 Mincom
38
Work Orders - 3620
field group.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Save.
The Work Order Cost Estimates will update.
Create a Work Order from a Standard Job

Use this activity to create a Work Order from a Standard Job. Using a Standard Job template speeds up
the Work Order creation process by defaulting template values in key Work Order fields.
Note: This activity is based on creating a Standard Job template during long-form MSQ620 - Work
Order creation. If a Short-Form Work Order program is used to create a Work Order and no Standard
Job is given at the time of creation, then a default Standard Job is used based on the Short-Form Work
Order program used. For example, if MSO62J - Create WO for Minor Plant is used to create a Work
Order, then the Standard Job MS62JMW is used as the Work Order template.
Activity Steps
2. Select Work OrderNew.
3. Select Work Order Copy From Std Job.
The Dialog Box - Copy From Std Job displays.
Copy Standard Job No
Standard Job District
5. Click OK.
Data will be copied into the new Work Order.
6. Enter or modify data in fields on the following tabs as required:
Definition
Planning
Tasks
Scheduling
Costs
Cost Allocation
Address
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
39
Completion
Job Codes
Reference Codes
7. Click Save.
The new Work Order is saved and a Work Order number is automatically generated.
2009 Mincom
40
Work Orders - 3620
Create a Work Order from a Standard Job - Diagram

Standard Job File
MSF690
Standard Job Task File

MSF693
Maint Sched Master File

MSF700
Add Work Order Standard Job Window

MSM62HA
Standard Text File

MSF096
Work Order File
MSF620
Table File
MSF010
Equipment Register File

MSF600
Add Work Orders Standard Job Program

MSO62H

MSF623
Standard Text File

MSF096
Std Job Resources

MSF735
Work Order Resources

MSF735
Copy a Work Order from an Existing Work Order

Use this activity to copy a Work Order from an existing Work Order. This is done if a similar job is
known to have been done in the past. Copying an existing Work order short-cuts having to re-enter
key information.
Planning information still needs to be entered as normal.
Note: It is important to remember to change any information that needs to be updated for the new
Work Order such as the Request ID if one was carried through from a previous Work Order. If
information such as this is left on the Work Order in error, the information will flow through the
system as expected and is recorded on any other Mincom Ellipse entity affected.
2. Select Work Order New.
3. Select Work Order Create From Work Order.
The Dialog Box - Copy From Existing Work Order displays.
Copy Work Order
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
41
5. Click OK.
Data will be copied into the new Work Order.
6. Enter or modify data in fields on following tabs as required:
Definition
Planning
Tasks
Scheduling
Costs
Cost Allocation
Address
Completion
Job Codes
History
Reference Codes
7. Click Save.
The new Work Order is saved and a Work Order number is automatically generated.
Work Orders - Defer a Work Order

A Work Order is deferred if the work is not undertaken due to circumstances, for example, lack of
materials or inadequate resources. Several deferral codes can be created on the table file SC Maintenance Completion Status for different deferral circumstances. Associated Values on the table
file define if a code is acceptable for deferral and the code being used triggers the Work Order to be
included on the Missed Schedule Maintenance Report, MSA710 or MSR710.
Activity Steps
3. Select Work Order Close Work Order Defer.
The Dialog Box - Defer Work Order displays.
Date Deferred
Deferred By
Deferred Code
2009 Mincom
42
Work Orders - 3620
5. Click OK.
6. Click Save.
The deferral details are saved.
Complete a Work Order

Use this activity to complete a Work Order. A completed Work Order has a status of Closed and can
be re-opened if it meets the requirements for re-opening Work Orders. For information on re-opening
a completed Work Order see Reopen a Work Order.
Activity Steps
3. Click
The Dialog Box - Complete Work Order displays.

Date Completed
Completed By
Completed Code
5. Click OK.
The History tab is updated with the Completion information
6. Click Save.
The completion details are saved.
Cancel a Work Order

Use this activity to cancel a Work Order. A Work Order is cancelled if the work is not undertaken.
Several cancellation codes can be created on the Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status for
different cancellation circumstances. Associated Values on the table file define if a code is acceptable
for Work Order cancellation and the code used triggers the Work Order to be included on the Missed
Schedule Report, MSA710 or MSR710. A cancelled Work Order has a status of Closed.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
43
3. Select Work Order Close Work Order Cancel.

The Dialog Box - Cancel Work Order displays.
Date Cancelled
Time Cancelled
Cancelled By
Cancelled Code
5. Click OK.
The History tab is updated with the cancellation information.
6. Click Save.
The cancellation details are saved.
Reopen a Work Order

Use this activity to re-open a Work Order that is currently closed.
All unscheduled work orders and tasks can be re-opened at any time.
Scheduled work orders and tasks can be re-opened if they are completed in a current committed
period or a future period. This includes Maintenance Schedule Tasks (MST) related work orders.
If there is an attempt to reopen a work order or tasks that were completed in a PRIOR committed
period, an error is displayed.
Activity Steps
3. Select WorkOrder Reopen Work Order. The following fields on the Completion tab are
cleared:
Completion Code
Completed By
Completed Date
Completed Time
4. Click Save.
The Work Order is re-opened.
2009 Mincom
44
Work Orders - 3620
Finalise a Work Order

Use this activity to finalise the costs on a Work Order for either all financial areas or just specific
areas, called sub-systems. finalising a Work Order means that no further costs are recorded against the
Work Order from within the Work Order program or from any other Ellipse application. Any activities
attempting to create a journal entry on the MSF900 file will be disallowed and an error message
displayed.
Only Work Orders with a status of closed are finalised. Once a Work Order is finalised it cannot
be re-opened.
A capital Work Order is capitalised before it can be finalised. Capitalisation involves clearing
costs from the Capital Work in Progress accounts and posting the costs to the Fixed Asset
Register.
Note: Work Orders are setup to be automatically finalised in bulk by running MSB623.
Activity Steps
3. Select Work Order Finalise.
The Dialog Box - Finalise Work Order or SubSystem displays.
a. Select the Final Costs option.
b. Select any of the following individual finalise Subsystems options:
Supply
Accounts Payable
Production Statistics
Payroll
Labour Costing
Journal Holding
Accounts Receivable
General Ledger
Select the Final Costs option to finalise all subsystems for this Work Order.
Select individual finalise Subsystems options to close accounting in only certain areas. The
subsystems not finalised will still allow accounting entries to be created against this Work
Order.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
45
5. Click OK.
6. Click Save.
The finalisation details are saved.
Delete a Work Order

Use this activity to delete a Work Order. Work Orders are only deleted if they have been created in
error and have had no costs associated with them.
Work Orders committed cannot be deleted. If a Work Order was created in error but has been
committed, it must be closed using another method such as cancellation.
Activity Steps
3. Click Delete.
The Confirm Delete dialog box displays.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Save.
The Work Order is deleted.
Review Work Order Details

Use this activity to review Work Order Details.
Activity Steps
3. Review the fields on the following tabs:
Definition
Planning
Tasks
Scheduling
2009 Mincom
46
Work Orders - 3620
Costs
Cost Allocation
Address
Completion
Job Codes
History
Reference Codes
4. Select WorkOrder Close.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
47
Review Work Order Details - Diagram

Review Selection
Windows MSM21A-D
Equipment Register
MSF600
Work Order File

MSF620
W/Order Reqn Costing

Allocations File
MSFX6J
Work Order Summary
Review Window
MSM621C & D
Work Order Summary

Review Prog.
MSO621
A
Work Order Detail
Review Windows
MSM622A-C
Review Comps. Actioned

by Work Order Window
MSM654A
Review Work Order Cost

Window (Future Dev)
Work Order Detail Review

Program
Review Comps. Actioned

By Work Order
MSO654
Review Work Order Costs

Program
* MSO622
Review Standard
Text Windows
MSM097B
Review Work Order

Purchasing Status
MSM628A
Review Order
Tasks Window
MSM624A & B
Review Work Order Tasks
* MSO624
W/Order Reqn Costing

Allocations File
MSFX6J
Purchase Order File
MSF280
Purchase Order Item File
MSF221
Review Standard
Text Program
* MSO097
*
Review Work Order

Materials Status
MSO628
files not shown for simplicity
Review Work Order Requirements

Use this activity to review or modify Work Order Header Requirements.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Purchase Req. Item File

MSF231
Work Order File
MSF620
48
Work Orders - 3620

3. Click

a. To review work order requirements, go to step 5.
b. To modify work order requirements, go to step 7.
5. Select and review the data on the Materials, Equipment, and Resources tabs.
6. Select and review the Details and Costs tabs for each requirement tab.
7. Select Requirements Edit to modify work order requirements.
8. Modify fields on the Detail and Costs tabs for each requirement tab.
9. Click

Bulk Closure of Work Orders

Use this activity to select several work orders at once, and close them in bulk.
Note: To select non-consecutive work orders, hold down the CTRL key while selecting the required
work orders.
To select a range of work orders, select first the work order in the range, then hold down the SHIFT
key and select the last work order in the range.
Activity Steps
3. Select the work orders you want to close.
4. Select WorkOrder Close Work Order.
The Dialog Box - Bulk Closure Work Orders displays.
Completed Date
Completed Time
Completed By
Completed Code
6. Click OK.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
49
A Confirm Bulk Operation Completed Successfully, would you like to refresh search message
displays.
7. Click Yes.
Work Order Bulk Update

Use this activity to maintain a group of Work Orders in bulk. An initial search screen allows you to
select a group of Work orders to be maintained and then filtering capabilities for you to further refine
selected Work Orders to be updated. The key purpose of this activity is to filter Work Orders to a list
that can be maintained in Bulk. Changing details on the Work Orders is the same as the maintain
Work Order function.
Activity Steps
1. Access MSO62N - Work Order Bulk Update.
The MSM62NA - Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays.
2. Enter data in the following Equipment Selection Criteria group fields:
Equipment Search Type
Equipment Search Key
At least one of the search fields must be entered.
3. Enter Y in the Additional Filters fields to further restrict the search.
4. Click OK.
If additional filters are selected, the MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection
screen displays.
5. Enter data in these fields, if required.
6. Click Save.
The MSM62NC - Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration Update screen displays.
Work Orders matching the selection criteria display.
7. Perform one or both of the following:
a. Update Work Orders details as required.
b. Select an action code from the Action field to launch the Work Order applications for more
detailed modifications on specific Work Orders.
8. Click OK.
All Work Orders are saved with changes.
Work Order Bulk Labour Costing

Use this activity to record labour costing details on Work Orders in bulk.
2009 Mincom
50
Work Orders - 3620
Activity Steps
1. Access MSO62N - Work Order Bulk Update.
The MSM62NA - Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays.
Work Group
Additional Filters (enter Y to further restrict the search)
3. Click OK.
The MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays.
4. Click Save.
The MSM62NC - Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration Update screen displays.
Work Orders matching the selection criteria display.
5. Enter data in the following fields for each Work Order that requires Labour Costing entries:
Action (enter L)
6. Click Save.
The MSM854A - Labour Costing Transaction Entry screen displays.
7. Enter data the following key fields:
Labour Class
Earnings Class
Hours or
Value
If no value is entered in the Labour Class and Earnings Class fields, Ellipse will default the
employees primary skill information.
8. Click Save.
Labour Costing Transaction Entries are saved.
Maintaining Tolerances
Tolerances enable the optional automatic recording of Required Start Date and Required By Date
on Work Orders, based on Tolerance information.
Associated values on the Priority table codes are required to record if tolerances will be applied to
MST generated Work Orders and/or Standalone Work Orders.
The associated values record if the tolerance will be a positive and/or negative calculation for MST
generated Work Orders.
For standalone work orders the tolerances are positive only. The tolerance value recorded for MSTs is
a percentage of the frequency for the task and standalone work orders are the number of days.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
51
Business Rules
The first statistic frequency is used to determine tolerances for an MST with an Either/or
Scheduling Indicator.
For an MST with a statistic indicator, if the current daily average is zero, the tolerance value is
assumed as zero.
If a work order is being scheduled by statistics, no tolerance can be determined.
Both positive and/or negative tolerances can be calculated for MST generated work orders. For
standalone work orders the tolerance can only be positive.
The tolerance is applied on the work order header only. The Priority Code on the work order task
is not applicable.
When tolerances are applicable to work orders and the priority code with tolerance details are
recorded on the work order, the Required Start Date defaults from the work order Raised Date.
The Required By Date is calculated from the work order Raised Date plus the Tolerance value
plus the work order header Estimated Duration Hours.
Ad hoc Work Orders - If a work order has no priority recorded or the Priority Code had no
recorded tolerance, (that is, the first associated value on the PY - Work Order Priority Code table
is blank), the tolerance calculation is not performed and the Required Start and Required By Dates
are not automatically updated.
MST Generated Work Orders - If a work order related to an MST has not priority recorded or
the Priority Code has no recorded tolerance information, (that is, the first associated value on the
PY - Work Order Priority Code table is blank), the tolerance calculation is not performed. The
Required Start Date and Required By Date are updated with the work order Plan Start Date and
Plan Finish by default.
The required Start and/or Required By Dates are entered manually, the values are accepted and
recorded on the work order, without tolerance calculation from the Priority Code (if existing).
Tolerances may need to be re-calculated when the Originator priority is originally added or the
Planner priority is modified.
Tolerances are not re-calculated when the option to apply tolerance is not defined in the PY Work Order Priority Code table and when the Required Start Date and/or Required By Date is
manually entered.
Changing the existing Plan Dates does not update the Required Start and Required By Dates.
Apply Tolerance Values

Use this activity to apply a tolerance to work order.
Note: Tolerance values can be applied when creating a work order or to an existing work order.
Ensure tolerances are set in the table file PY - Work Order Priority Code before using this activity.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
52
Work Orders - 3620
The MSQ620 - Work Order screen displays and the Definition tab defaults.
3. To apply tolerances enter the Originator Priority Code in the Definition tab or enter the Planners
Priority in the Planning tab.
Note: If the Planners Priority is left blank, the Originator Priority Code value will default into the
Planners Priority field.
4. Click Save.
See also Further Information on Applying Tolerances.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
53
Further Information on Applying Tolerances

When a work order is created with a priority code or the Planner Priority is changed on a work order,
the Required Start Date and Required By Date is updated to indicate the tolerance applicable to the
work order.
When both Planner Priority and Originator Priority are recorded in the work order, the Planner Priority
will take preference over the Originator Priority on calculating tolerance. The associated values of the
priority code is used to determine the Required By Date.
Standalone Work Order

This uses number of days.
For example, if a standalone work order is created using Planner Priority W1 (Work Order Priority 1),
which has a tolerance value of 8 days. The Required By Date is calculated using the work order Raised
Date + 8 days. The Estimated Duration Hours are also added to the tolerance calculation if they exist
on the work order header (Raised Date + 8 Days + Duration Hours).
MST Work Order (Creation)

This uses percentage of the frequency for the task.
For example, an MST with a schedule indicator of 1 is used to create a work order. The MST work
order is created using Planner Priority M1 (MST Priority 1). The work order has a Planned Start date
of 09/01/05 and the Planned Finish Date is the 14/01/05.
Since the priority code has a tolerance value of +/-80% of the MSTs frequency which is 5.6 days
(rounded up to be 6 days), the Required Start Date is the Planned Start Date minus 6 days which
equals to 03/01/05. The Required By Date is the Planned Finish Date + 6 days which is equal to
20/01/05.
Maintaining Work Order Tasks

Work Order Tasks are the building blocks for a full job definition. A series of tasks can be built to
define the smaller jobs that need to be accomplished either in parallel or a series in order to complete a
full Work Order. Tasks can be assigned to different groups or individuals depending on the skills and
time frames required by these smaller jobs.
As with Work Orders, Tasks may be created by using a Standard Job template that has Standard Job
Tasks defined. Each Work Order Task will inherit the attributes of the Standard Job Task including the
specific material, resource and equipment requirements for the job.
Diagram
The Maintaining Work Order Tasks diagram represents the relationship between Work Orders and
their associated Tasks.
Business Rules
2009 Mincom
54
Work Orders - 3620
If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed, completing the Work Group field causes the
work order to be scheduled when a scheduling run is next processed for this work group, provided
the generated work order has at least one task and a Planned Start Date is entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
55
Maintaining Work Order Tasks - Diagram

The diagram below represents the relationship between Work Orders and their associated Tasks.
Create a Work Order Task

Use this activity to record one or more tasks for a work order.
Details of a task are recorded in the Work Order Task screen and a summary of its details display on
the Tasks tab on the Work Order detail screen.
Activity Steps
2. Select the Task option.
The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays.
3. Select WorkOrderTask New.
The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays.
Task No
5. Enter data in the following fields on the Job Information tab:
Task Description
2009 Mincom
56
Work Orders - 3620
Work Group
6. Enter data in the key fields on the following tabs:
Job Information
Planning
Scheduling
Costs
Completion
APL
7. Click Save.
The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays with the newly created task in the grid.
Record Job Instructions on a Task

Use this activity to record Job Instructions on a Task within a Work Order.
Activity Steps
3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task.
4. Click New Job Instructions.
The Dialog Box - Job Instructions displays.
5. Enter details in the following key field:
Text Box
6. Click OK.
The New Job Instructions button now displays as Edit Job Instructions. The Job Instructions are
saved on the MSF097 file under text type JI.
Record Material Requirements for a Task

Use this activity to record the details and costs of Material requirements for a Work Order Task.
Material requirements are used to requisition catalogued and non-catalogued parts from a Work Order.
This activity sets material requirements on the Work Order Task and allows items to be requisitioned
from the task instead of the Work Order Header.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
57
Activity Steps
4. Click

5. Select the Materials tab then click
The Details and Costs tabs now display.

6. Select the Details tab.
7. Select a Material Type option.
a. If you selected the Catalogued option:
Stock Code
2. Select Requirements Show.
The Part Number, Mnemonic and Description displays.
3. Go to Step 9.
b. If you selected the Non-Catalogued option:
Part Number
Mnemonic
2. Go to Step 9.
Only catalogued items from the login district are added as material requirements.
If the Non-Catalogued option is selected and a Part Number/Mnemonic combination
entered exists on the supply catalogue, the system returns a warning message indicating
that the item is a catalogued item and the stock code defaults.
2009 Mincom
58
Work Orders - 3620

2. Go to Step 12.
Item Price
3. Go to Step 12.
Fixed Amount
3. Go to Step 12.
The System Rate option is only available for items that have a Material Type of
Catalogued.
12. Click
Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display on the Materials tab summary grid.
13. Repeat Steps 5 12 until all material requirements are recorded.
15. Click Save.
The Material Requirements are saved to the Work Order Task.
Record Equipment Requirements for a Task

Use this activity to record the details and costs of Equipment requirements for a Work Order Task.
This activity sets equipment requirements on the Work Order Task.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
59

4. Click

5. Select the Equipment tab, then click
The Details and Costs tabs now display in New mode.

Equipment Type
Condition Type
Fleet Size
2. Go to Step 10.
Rate Amount
Fleet Size
3. Go to Step 10.
2009 Mincom
60
Work Orders - 3620

Fixed Amount
2. Go to Step 10.
Fleet Size
2. Go to Step 10.
The System Rate is taken from the Equipment Rate File.
10. Click
Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display on the Equipment tab summary grid.
11. Repeat Steps 5 10 until all equipment requirements are recorded.
13. Click Save.
The Equipment Requirements are saved to the Work Order Task.
Record Resource Requirements for a Task

Use this activity to record the details and costs of resource requirements for a Work Order Task. This
activity sets resource requirements on the Work Order Task header.
Activity Steps
4. Click

5. Select the Resources tab then click
The Details and Costs tabs now display.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
61

Resource Class
Resource Code
Crew Size
2. Go to Step 10.
Rate Amount
Crew Size
3. Go to Step 10.
Fixed Amount
2. Go to Step 10.
Crew Size
2. Go to Step 10.
10. Click
Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display in the Resources tab summary grid.
11. Repeat Steps 5 10 until all resource requirements are recorded.
2009 Mincom
62
Work Orders - 3620
13. Click Save.

The Resource Requirements are saved to the Work Order Task.
Record APLs and Clear Task APL Type

Use this activity to identify APLs required for this task. APLs are listed on a Task instead of
individual material requirements if a pre-defined bill of materials has already been created in
Ellipse. Using the APL is quicker then listing each material requirement.
This activity also defines how to Clear APL Task types.
Activity Steps
4. Select the APL tab.
a. Select APL Equipment Reference option.
b. Select Equipment Group ID option.
If the Material Requirements box is selected this means that material requirements have
already been set on this task. A task cannot have both APL requirements and material
requirements. If an APL is more appropriate to record against this task, then to continue you
must remove the material requirements from the Task Requirements dialog box. Once this is
done, the remainder of this activity can proceed.
a. Enter data in the following field, if you selected the APL Equipment Reference option:
APL Equipment Reference
b. Enter data in the following field, if you selected the Equipment Group ID option:
Equipment Group ID
Component Code
Modifier Code
Sequence Number
To clear the Task APL Type selected, open the Edit menu and select Clear Task APL Type. This
will delete all of the data entered on the APL tab.
8. Click Save.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
63
The APL details are saved.

Assign a Work Order Task

Use this activity to assign a Work Order Task to an individual or a crew. Details of the assignment
display in the appropriate fields on the Planning tab.
Activity Steps
4. Click
The Dialog Box - WO Task Assign To displays.

Crew
6. Click OK.
7. Click Save.
Assignment details are saved.
Schedule a Work Order Task

Use this activity to update planned and offset dates for Work Order Tasks.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
64
Work Orders - 3620

4. Click
The Dialog Box - Schedule WO Task displays.

Planned Start Date
Planned Start Time
Planned Finish Date
Planned Finish Time
Offset Days
Est. Duration Hours
Man Effort
6. Click OK.
7. Click Save.
Scheduling details are saved.
Reschedule a Work Order Task

Use this activity to reschedule tasks using the Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks.
Activity Steps
4. Select WorkOrderTask Reschedule.
The Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks displays.
Start Date
6. Click OK.
7. Click Save.
The rescheduling details are saved.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
65
Create a Requisition
Use this activity to create a Requisition from a Work Order Task. All requisition items are entered
manually.
Activity Steps
4. Click

Issue Requisition Number
Purchase Requisition Number
6. Select a Requisition Type in the Requisition Type field group.
7. Click OK.
Data from the Work Order will default into the Requisition.
8. Enter data in key fields on the following tabs:
General
Delivery/Priority
Questions
Purchase Details
Other
Items
9. Click Save.
2009 Mincom
66
Work Orders - 3620
Create a Requisition for Task Requirements

Use this activity to create a Requisition from a Work Order Task. If you have already created materials
requirements on a Work Order task, you can select these items to create a requisition. The difference
in these cases is that a 'Choose Material Requirements' screen displays on top of the MSQ140 allowing
you to select the created requirements you want to requisition. After selecting the requirements,
MSQ140 continues on as expected with these requirements listed as requisition items.
Activity Steps
4. Click

5. Select the Materials tab.
6. Click

7. Select a Requisition Type.
It is not necessary to enter a Requisition Number as Ellipse automatically generate one.
8. Click OK.
The MSQ140 screen and Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements display together.
9. Enter data in the following fields on the MSQ140 screen:
Date Required By
Authorised By
10. Select the material requirement to be requisitioned on the Dialog Box - Select Material
Requirements.
11. Click Select.
12. Repeat steps 10 - 11 until all material requirements to be included on the requisition have a YES
in the Selected field.
13. Click OK.
Data from the Work Order defaults into the Requisition.
14. Enter data in key fields on the following tabs on the MSQ140 screen as required:
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
67
General
Delivery/Priority
Questions
Purchase Details
Other
Items
15. Click Save.
17. Click Save.
The requisition is saved to the Work Order task.
Modify Work Order Task and Cancel Task Update

Use this activity to modify a Work Order Task and cancel a task update.
Activity Steps
4. Modify fields on the following tabs as required:
Job Information
Planning
Scheduling
Costs
Completion
APL
To cancel all changes made to a Work Order Task since the previous Save, select
WorkOrderTask Cancel Task Updates.
5. Click Save.
2009 Mincom
68
Work Orders - 3620
Changes to Work Order Task details are saved.
Record Work in Progress for a Task

Use this activity to record work in progress for a Work Order Task. Work in progress is measured as
either units complete or percentage complete against the Units Required value recorded on the
Planning tab.
For example, If 12 units are required and you enter 6 units in the Units Complete field, a Percent
Complete entry of 50% displays. If 50 units are required and you enter 20% in the Percent Complete
field, 10 displays in the Units Complete field.
Activity Steps
4. Select WorkOrderTask Record Work in Progress.
The Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress displays.
a. Select the Units Complete option, and enter data in the following field:
Units Complete
b. Select the Percent Complete option, and enter data in the following field:
Percent Complete
6. Click OK.
The Work in Progress details display on the Completion tab on MSQ620 - Work Order Task
screen.
7. Click Save.
The work in progress details are saved.
Complete a Work Order Task

Use this activity to complete a Work Order Task.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
69
3. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays.

5. Select WorkOrderTask Open.
6. Click
The Dialog Box - Complete WO Task displays.

Date Completed
Time Completed
Completed By
Completed Code
8. Click OK.
9. Click Save.
2009 Mincom
70
Work Orders - 3620
Complete a Work Order - Diagram

Work Order Task Update
Windows
MSM62FA-B
Table File
MSF010
Work Order File

MSF620

MSF623
Update Order Task

Program
MSO62F
Maintain Work Order /

Task Routine
MSS620

MSF623
Work Order File

MSF620
Cancel a Work Order Task

Use this activity to cancel a Work Order Task.
Activity Steps
4. Select WorkOrderTask Close Task Cancel.
The Dialog Box - Cancel WO Task displays.
Date Cancelled
Time Cancelled
Cancelled By
Cancelled Code
6. Click OK.
7. Click Save.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
71
Reopen a Work Order Task

Use this activity to reopen a Work Order Task that is currently closed.
Activity Steps
4. Select WorkOrderTask Reopen Task. The following fields on the Completion tab are cleared:
Completed By
Completed Date
Completed Time
Completed Code
5. Click Save.
The Task is reopened.
Delete a Work Order Task

Use this activity to delete a Work Order no longer required.
Activity Steps
4. Select WorkOrderTask Delete.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Save.
2009 Mincom
72
Work Orders - 3620
The Work Order Task is deleted.
Review Work Order Task Details

Use this activity to Review Work Order Task Details.
Activity Steps
4. Review the fields on the following tabs:
Job Information
Planning
Scheduling
Costs
Completion
APL
5. Click Save.
Review Work Order Task Requirements and APLs

Use this activity to Review Work Order Task Requirements and APLs.
Activity Steps
4. Click

5. Select and review the details on the Materials, Equipment and Resources tabs.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
73
The information in the summary grid on each of these tabs defaults from the information entered
on the Details and Costs tabs within these tabs.
6. Select and review the details on the Details and Costs tabs.
8. Click Save.
Maintaining Task Assignments

The task assignment application is used to assign work order tasks to crews or individuals
(employees). This application provides a quick and easy way to create and maintain assignment details
with minimum maintenance. Each time a work order task is assigned, a crew or individual a record is
created on the task assignment file (MSF62C).
You can search for task assignments, and display the results in a grid format. You can also maintain,
modify, reschedule and delete task assignments.
The MSQ62C Task Assignment application can be run as a stand-alone application or from the
MSQ620 - Work Order and MSQ620 - Work Order Task screens.
Business Rules
When the final task assignment is completed the associated work order task is closed.
When a work order task is closed all open task assignments for that task are also completed.
Create New Task Assignment

Use this activity to create new task assignments.
Activity Steps
a. To create a task assignment using MSQ620 - Work Orders:
The Task Criteria tab displays.
4. Select WorkOrderTask Create Task Assignment.
The MSQ62C - Create Tasks Assignments screen displays with the work order number
and task selected on the MSQ620 - Search for Work order screen.
2009 Mincom
74
Work Orders - 3620
5. Go to step 2.
b. To create a task assignment using MSQ62C - Create Task Assignments.
1. Access MSQ62C - Create Task Assignments.
The MSQ62C - Create Tasks Assignments screen displays.
Work Order
WO Task No
3. Go to step 2.
2. Enter data in the following fields for each task assignment:
Allocated Crew
3. To add a new task assignment, press ENTER.
4. Click Save.
The task assignments entered display. These fields cannot be modified.
Review, Maintain and Delete Task Assignments

Use this activity to review, update, delete job assignments for a work order task. You can also assign a
current date, time and assigned task status, reschedule and delete job assignments.
Activity Steps
a. To review open task assignments for a task:
1. Click the Task Assignment tab.
2. Review details.
3. Click Revert to exit.
b. To review uncompleted task assignments for a task:
1. Select WorkOrderTask Review Task Assignments.
The MSQ62C - Search for Task Assignments screen displays with the work order number
and task defaulting in the relevant fields.
2. Go to step 5.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
75
c. To search for closed assignments:

1. Select the Include Closed Assignments option, if required.
2. Go to step 5.
5. Click Search.
Uncompleted task assignments (records that do not have an actual finish date) display in a grid.
a. To assign a current start date and time to the task:
1. Select the required task assignment in the grid.
2. Right-click, select Quick Start.
The current date and time is automatically assigned in the Actual Start Date and Actual
Start Time fields.
b. To assign a current finish date and time to the task assignment:
1. Right-click, select Quick Finish.
The current date and time is automatically assigned in the Actual Finish Date and Actual
Finish Time fields.
The task assignment is automatically deleted from the grid.
c. To change a new task status:
1. Select a closed task assignment in the grid.
2. Right-click, select Change Status.
The status of all selected tasks change.
d. To enter an actual start date, start time and assign a task assignment status to a task
assignment:
1. Select a task assignment in the grid.
2. Right-click, select Start Assignment.
The Dialog Box - Start Assignment displays.
Actual Start Date
Actual Start Time
Assigned Task Status
4. Click OK.
e. To enter an actual finish date, finish time and assign a task assignment status to a task
assignment:
2. Right-click, select Finish Assignment.
2009 Mincom
76
Work Orders - 3620
The Dialog Box - Finish Assignment displays.

Actual Finish Date
Actual Finish Time
4. Click OK.
f.
To reschedule a task assignment:

2. Right-click and select Reschedule.
The Dialog Box - Reschedule displays.
Assigned Start Date
Assigned Start Time
Assigned Finish Date
Assigned Finish Time
4. Click OK.
g. To delete all selected task assignments:

1. Select all task assignments.
2. Right-click, select Delete.
The Dialog Box - Confirm Delete displays.
3. Click OK.
7. Select Task Assignments Close to exit.
Printing Job Cards

A Job Card is a printed listing of a Work Order and one or all of its tasks. The standard Mincom Job
Card generated by MSA621 or MSR621 contains basic information about the work to be done that has
been included during the Work Order creation process. Typically, Job Cards are printed and
distributed to staff so they can identify work to be done. They also contain a section where staff can
record completion comments once the work is finished. Job Cards are vital for capturing the history of
equipment, costs and locations as they are completed by front-line staff and recorded back into Ellipse.
Work Order and Work Order Task Job Cards can be printed from a specified printer as required. Job
Cards may be printed under several circumstances. A Work Group schedule committal using MSB740
may automatically trigger the printing of Job Cards relevant to the specified period. Individual Job
Cards may also be manually printed from the Work Order application at any time.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
77
Multiple job card reports can be automatically printed dependant of the district, work order type,
maintenance type and/or work group. Table files MWDO - Manage Work District Options and WOJC
- Work Order Job Card are used to define which work order fields are used for selection and which job
card report is printed for a particular combination of the work order fields.
Business Rules
A Job Card will be available only for work that is recorded on a Work Order. Stand-alone MSTs
do not generate a Work Order and so therefore will not generate a Job Card.
A client-specific Job Card may be substituted for the standard Mincom-delivered Job Card
generated by MSA621 or MSR621.
A valid printer must be available on the PR table file to which the Job Card can be directed.
Multiple job cards report can be requested automatically as set up in table file MWDO and WOJC.
Print Job Card for Work Order Headers

Use this activity to print a Job Card for the Work Order Header including all Tasks.
Activity Steps
3. Click
The Dialog Box - Print Work Order Job Cards displays.

Printer
Email
Fax
5. Click OK.
The Job Card prints to the device selected.
The Work Order is closed.
2009 Mincom
78
Work Orders - 3620
Print Job Card for Work Order Task

Use this activity to print a Job Card for an individual Work Order Task.
Activity Steps
4. Click
The Dialog Box - Print Work Order Job Cards displays.

5. Complete the following key field:
Printer
Email
Fax
6. Click OK.
The Job Card Task prints to the device selected.
The Work Order is closed.
Maintaining Parent Work Orders

For control and costing purposes Work Orders can be grouped together by assigning a common parent
to each Work Order. The Parent Work Order application allows for this grouping (packaging) of Work
Orders in cases where it is convenient to manage the Work Orders as a single entity without the
overhead of a formal management project. Typically Parent Work Orders can be used to manage work
being carried out in one location by one work group authorised on multiple Work Orders.
As seen in the Work Order application, a Work Order is created when there is a work requirement that
needs to be tracked and costed. The Work Order is used to specify the work required, equipment
involved, requirements to be requisitioned, costs and schedule. When one or more Work Orders are
assigned to a Parent Work Order, the individual Work Order costs and resources are rolled up to the
Parent Work Order level.
Parent Work Orders can be created in Ellipse much like standalone Work Orders. Parent Standard Jobs
can be used as a template for a Parent Work Order and existing Parent Work Orders can be copied to
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
79
create new Parent Work Orders. For jobs such as large shutdowns or refurbishments, a Standard Job
Plan can also be used to create Parent Work Orders and subordinate Work Orders all in one action.
The Parent Work Order details are grouped under:
General information about the Parent Work Order
Costs roll up of underlying Work Order costs for labour, equipment and materials
Resources labour resources required to satisfy the underlying Work Orders
Extended Description a free form text pane for the inclusion of any textual details or instructions
The application has an actuals versus estimates chart for quick monitoring of the rolled up work.
Business Rules
A Parent Work Order must be created before it can be used as a parent on a Work Order.
The complexity of the job and the amount of financial control that is required will dictate whether
a Parent Work Order or Project should be used to track the full scope of work. If capital
expenditures and commitments need to be tracked along with the operational work, a Project may
be the more relevant Ellipse tool.
2009 Mincom
80
Work Orders - 3620
Maintaining Parent Work Orders - Diagram

Create/Modify Delete
Parent Work Order
Windows MSM625A, B
Table File MSF010

Maintain Parent Work
Order Program
MSO625
Parent Job Standard

MSF695
Parent Work Order File

MSF625
Equipment Register
MSF600
Extend Description
Maintenance
MSO096
Work Order Maintenance

Program (for subordinates)
MSO620
Review Parent Work

Order Windows
MSM626A, B, C
Review Parent Work

Order Program
MSO626
Create Parent Work Order

Use this activity to create a Parent Work Order. Once created, a Parent Work order can be assigned to
any existing or new Work Orders in the Work Order application. All rolled-up costs and resource
hours will then be readily available for review in the Parent Work Order application.
Activity Steps
1. Access MSQ625 - Search for Parent Work Order.
The MSQ625 - Search for Parent Work Order screen displays.
2. Select ParentWorkOrder New.
The MSQ625 - Parent Work Orders screen displays.
Parent WO Description
You may also enter a Prefix if the Parent Work Order number should be prefixed. This field is not
mandatory but must be completed prior to saving the Parent Work Order if it is required.
4. Enter data in the following field on the General tab:
Originator Id
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
81
5. Enter data in fields on following tabs as required:

General
Costs
Resources
Extended Description
Note: The Costs and Resources tabs contain read-only fields.
6. Click Save.
A Parent Work Order number (including the prefix if entered) is automatically generated.
Create a Parent Work Order from a Parent Standard Job

Use this activity to create a Parent Work Order from a Parent Standard Job. The Parent Work Order
will inherit the template attributes of the Parent Standard Job. Additions or modifications to the Parent
Work Order can then be made.
The Parent Standard Job must already be created in MSO690.
Note: This activity is slightly limited in that no subordinate Work Orders will be created based on the
Parent Standard Job template. Only Parent Work Order attributes will be created. Work Orders will
then need to be manually created and assigned to this parent in MSQ620.
Activity Steps
3. Select ParentWorkOrder Copy From Parent Standard Job.
The Dialog Box - Copy From Parent Standard Job displays.
Copy Parent Standard Job
5. Click OK.
Data will be copied into the new Parent Work Order.
General
Costs
Resources
2009 Mincom
82
Work Orders - 3620

7. Click Save.
The new Parent Work Order is saved and a Parent Work Order number is automatically generated.
Create a Parent Work Order and Subordinate Work

Orders from a Standard Job Plan or Parent Standard
Job
Unlike the previous activity, this activity will allow a Parent Work Order to be created along with
subordinate Work Orders based on the template that will be copied. This screen allows a Parent Work
Order and Work Orders to be created as one action from either a Parent Standard Job or a Standard Job
Plan.
The Parent Standard Job or Standard Job Plan and their subordinates must already be created in
MSO690.
Activity Steps
1. Access MSO62X - Create W/O from a SJ Plan.
The MSM62XA - Create Work Orders from a Std Job Plan/ Parent Std Job screen displays.
Standard Job/Parent Standard Job Indicator (Primary field)
Standard Job/Parent Standard Job Indicator (Secondary field)
Description
Originator
Work Group
3. Click Save.
A Parent Work Order number is automatically generated.
Subordinate Standard Job information is displayed.
4. Enter or modify data in fields on the MSM62XA screen as required.
Work Order numbers can be entered at this time or can be left blank to allow system generated
numbers to be assigned.
5. Click Save.
The new Parent Work Order is saved.
Subordinate Work Orders are automatically created based on the Standard Job templates assigned.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
83
Create a Parent Work Order from an Existing Parent

Work Order
Use this activity to create a Parent Work Order from an existing Parent Work Order.
Activity Steps
3. Select ParentWorkOrder Copy From Parent Work Order.
The Dialog Box - Copy From Parent Work Order displays.
Copy Parent Work Order
5. Click OK.
General
7. Click Save.
The new Parent Work Order is saved and a Parent Work Order number is automatically generated.
Modify Parent Work Order

Use this activity to modify a Parent Work Order.
Activity Steps
2. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required Parent Work Order.
3. Make the required changes to fields on the following tabs:
General
Costs
Resources
2009 Mincom
84
Work Orders - 3620
4. Click Save.
Changes to the Parent Work Order are saved.
Delete Parent Work Order

Use this activity to delete a Parent Work Order which is no longer required.
A Parent Work Order may be deleted only if it has no subordinate Work Orders. If subordinates exist
they must either be detached from the Parent or deleted following standard Work Order deletion rules.
Activity Steps
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.
The Parent Work Order is deleted.
Review all Details of a Parent Work Order

Use this activity to review a Parent Work Order including the subordinate Work Orders assigned to
this Parent and their current costing information.
Activity Steps
3. Review fields on the following tabs:
General
Costs
Resources
4. Select ParentWorkOrder Close.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
85
Maintaining Incident Logsheets

An incident can be defined as any group of events that may need to be recorded and tracked for
auditing reasons. The incident and the activities performed during the incident time can be recorded on
an Incident Log Sheet and then automatically turned in to Work Orders for tracking costs, resources
and equipment failures. This procedure allows the user to maintain information related to an incident
occurring during a particular shift of a Work Group.
An Incident Logsheet Entry can be created, modified and deleted in one application. Action Codes
provide the facility to close or reopen an Incident Logsheet Entry allowing single screen entry of all
relevant Incident activities.
Multiple entries per day and time can be recorded against a Work Group and Shift. Existing Logsheet
entries selected for maintenance are displayed in reverse chronological order to display the full
Incident History.
Action Codes provide the facility to automatically create Work Orders or to transfer to the short form
Incident Work Order window to create/maintain Work Orders related to an incident.
Multiple Work Orders are allowed to be created per incident but only the latest one is recorded against
the incident. The link between the Work Order and the incident is only effected when the Work Order
is originated from an action code from the Logsheet Maintenance screen.
2009 Mincom
86
Work Orders - 3620
Maintaining Incident Logsheets - Diagram

Table File
MSF010
Maintain Incident
Logsheets Windows
MSM627A-B
Work Group File

MSF720
MSF600
Maintain Incident
Logsheets Program
MSO627
Incident Logsheets File

MSF626
Standard Job File
MSF690
Maintain Work Order

Information Routine
MSS620
Table File
MSF010
Work Groups File
MSF720
Standard Job File
MSF690
Standard Job Task File
MSF693
Work Order File

MSF620

MSF623
Reference Files
MSFX6X
MSF062
MSFX6G
MSFX6J
MSFX69
MSFX6S
MSFX6O
MSFX71
MSFX6N
Duration File
MSF622

MSF626
Work Group File
MSF720
Review Incident
Logsheets Windows
MSM62VA-B
Table File
MSF010
MSF600
Standard Text File
MSF096
Create / Maintain Incident

Work Order Window
MSM62TA
Create / Maintain Incident

Work Order Program
MSO62T
Work Order File

MSF620
MSF600

MSF626
Review Incident
Logsheets Program
MSO62V
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
87
Create Incident Logsheet Entries

Use this activity to create Incident Logsheet Entries.
Activity Steps
1. Access MSO627 - Maintain Incident Logsheets.
The MSM627A - Maintain Incident Logsheets screen displays.
2. Enter option Create Logsheet Entries.
Work Group
4. Click OK.
The MSM627B - Create Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays.
Incident Description
Originator Id
Equipment Number or Reference
6. Complete additional fields on the MSM627B - Create Incident Logsheet Entries screen as
required.
7. Click Save.
8. Click Confirm.
The Incident Logsheet Entry is saved.
Modify Incident Logsheet Entries

Use this activity to modify Incident Logsheet Entries.
Activity Steps
2. Enter option Modify Logsheet Entries.
Work Group
Date
4. Click OK.
The MSM627B - Modify Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays.
5. Make the required changes.
2009 Mincom
88
Work Orders - 3620
6. Click Save.
Changes to the Incident Logsheet Entry are saved.
Review Incident Logsheet Entries

Use this activity to review Incident Logsheet Entries.
Activity Steps
1. Access MSO62V - Review Incident Logsheets.
The MSM62VA - Review Incident Logsheets screen displays.
Work Group
3. Click OK.
The MSM62VB - Review Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays.
4. Review the Incident Logsheet Entries.
5. If required, complete the following key field:
Action
Use this function to access the following review options from the Review Incident Logsheet
Entries screen:
Review Extended Description MSM097A
Review Equipment History MSM633A
Review Work Order Details MSM621D
6. Click OK until the last Logsheet entry is displayed.

7. Select File Exit.
Delete Incident Logsheet Entries

Use this activity to delete Incident Logsheet Entries that are no longer required.
Activity Steps
2. Enter option Delete Logsheet Entries.
Work Group
4. Click OK.
The MSM627B - Delete Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
89
5. Complete the following key field against the Incident Logsheet Entry you want to delete:
Action (Select D)
6. Click Save.
The Incident Logsheet Entry is deleted.
Auto Create Incident Work Order

Use this activity to create a Work Order for an incident from an existing Incident Logsheet Entry.
Minimal data entry is required as many key fields default from the Incident Logsheet into the Work
Order.
Activity Steps
2. Enter option Create Logsheet Entries.
Work Group
4. Click OK.
The MSM627B - Create Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays.
Start Time
Originator Id
Standard Job
Action (Select an Auto WO Creation option)
6. Click Save.
7. Click Confirm.
Ellipse will create a Work Order, based on the Logsheet entry, to be used for this incident. The
new Work Order number will display protected under each incident.
If Action Code A was selected, the Work Order name will default from the Standard Job
description.
If Action Code B was selected, the Work Order name will default from the Incident Description.
8. Click Save.
The Incident Work Order is saved. To review the Work Order, select action code R - Review
Work Order Details.
2009 Mincom
90
Work Orders - 3620
Viewing Links to Work Orders

Work Order and Task details are accessible from the View menu and can be displayed as required.
You can also access other Ellipse applications from the Work Order Detail screen. Each application's
search screen can be launched directly with key Work Order information defaulting into the search
criteria, making it easier to review Work Order information that is held outside of the Work Order
application.
Diagram
This process is represented in the Viewing Links to Work Orders diagram.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
91
Viewing Links to Work Orders - Diagram

The diagram below represents the system activities associated with the Viewing Links to Work Orders
process.
Review Accounting Entries Linked to a Work Order

Use this activity to review accounting entries linked to a Work Order. Accounting entries created
quoting the Work Order number display on this screen. This information is used by Managers to
manage costs for a job, review who is charging to the Work Order and what type of costs are being
recorded.
For information on how to create Accounting Entries, see the Journal Holding/Journals module.
Activity Steps
3. Select View Accounting Entries.
The MSQ901 - Search for Accounting Entry screen displays.
The Work Order number defaults as the search criteria.
2009 Mincom
92
Work Orders - 3620
4. Click Search.
Accounting Entries matching the search criteria display in the results grid.
5. Double-click on an Accounting Entry line item to review Accounting Entry details.
The MSQ901 - Accounting Entry screen displays.
6. Select Entry Close.
Review Requisitions Linked to a Work Order

Use this activity to review Requisitions linked to a Work Order.
For more information on using the Requisitions application, see the Purchasing module.
Activity Steps
3. Select View Requisitions.
The Dialog Box - Work Order Requisitions displays with all requisitions raised for this Work
Order.
4. Double-click on a Requisition line to review Requisition details.
5. Select Requisition Close.
Review Equipment Tracing Actions Linked to a Work

Order
Purpose Use this activity to review Equipment Tracing Actions linked to a Work Order.
For more information on using the Equipment Tracing application, see the Equipment Tracing
module.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
93
3. Select View Equipment Tracing.

The MSQ650 - Equipment Tracing screen displays.
4. Expand the tracing tree and select a tracing action to display the details.
5. Select Equipment Tracing Close.
Review Condition Monitoring Linked to a Work Order

Use this activity to review Condition Monitoring linked to a Work Order. This menu option is used to
record Condition Monitoring measurements when the measurement is taken as a result of a Work
Order.
For more information on using the Condition Monitoring application, see the Condition Monitoring
module.
Activity Steps
3. Select View Condition Monitoring.
The MSQ345 - Search for Condition Monitoring Measurements screen displays.
The Work Order number defaults in the search criteria.
4. Click Search.
Condition Monitoring Measurements matching the search criteria display in the results grid.
5. Double-click on a Condition Monitoring Measurements line item to review details.
The MSQ345 - Condition Monitoring Measurements screen displays.
6. Select Measurement Close.
Review Job Estimates Linked to a Work Order

Use this activity to review Job Estimates linked to a Work Order. Job Estimates contain quote details
and costs estimated for a job prior to work commencing. They can be used as a starting point for Work
Orders and are available for review from within the related Work Order. Standard Estimates are
updated as a result of comparing actual Work Order costs to Job Estimated costs.
For more information on using the Job Estimates application, see the Job Estimates module.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
94
Work Orders - 3620

3. Select View Job Estimating.
The MSQ655 - Search for Job Estimate screen displays.
The Work Order number defaults in the search criteria.
4. Click Search.
Job Estimates matching the search criteria display in the results grid.
5. Double-click on a Job Estimate line to review details.
The MSQ655 - Job Estimate screen displays.
6. Select JobEstimating Close.
Review Job Packages Linked to a Work Order

Use this activity to review a Work Order in the Job Packaging format and to utilise the Job Packaging
functionality to add tasks, requirements or job codes to the Work Order.
For more information on using the Job Packaging application, see the Job Packaging module.
Activity Steps
3. Select View Job Packaging.
The MSQ695 - Job Package screen displays. The Job Package details related to the selected Work
Order are displayed.
4. Select JobPackage Close.
Review Documents Linked to a Work Order

Use this activity to review documents linked to a Work Order. Documents linked to a Work Order are
crucial for high-risk jobs or jobs requiring a considerable amount of background information. After
locating documents they can be printed as an accompaniment to a Job Card.
For more information on using the Document Register, refer to the Document Management module.
Activity Steps
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
95

3. Select View Document Register
or
Click the
icon.
Note: When documents have been linked to a work order, the View Documents icon displays in
grey. If no documents have been linked, the icon displays in blue.
The MSQ580 - Search for Document screen displays.
4. Enter the relevant search criteria and click Search.
Documents matching the search criteria display in the results grid.
5. Double-click on a document line item to review details.
The MSQ580 - Document screen displays.
6. Select Document Close.
2009 Mincom
96
Work Orders - 3620
Work Orders - Reports

Reports
MSA620 - Work Order Analysis Report ............................................................................... 97
MSA621 - Work Order Job Card .......................................................................................... 103
MSA622 - Work Order Requirements Report....................................................................... 105
MSA710 - Missed Schedule Maintenance Report ................................................................ 107
MSAEFF - Maintenance Effectiveness and Efficiency Report ............................................. 110
MSAMTF - Mean Time Between Failure ............................................................................. 118
MSAMTR - Mean Time to Repair ........................................................................................ 123
MSAXWO - Work Order Analysis Summary....................................................................... 128
MSB622 - Work Order Cost Reallocation ............................................................................ 130
MSB623 - Work Order Automatic Finalisation .................................................................... 131
MSB624 - Update W/O Status for Available Material ......................................................... 133
MSB627 - Work Order Generation for Type Defects ........................................................... 134
MSB628 - Reset Tasks Plan Start Dates ............................................................................... 136
MSR620 - Work Order Analysis Report ............................................................................... 137
MSR621 - Work Order Task - Job Card ............................................................................... 139
MSR623 - Archive Work Selection ...................................................................................... 140
MSR626 - Work Order Backlog Report................................................................................ 141
MSRXWJ - XML Work Order Job Card Report................................................................... 142
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
97
MSA620 - Work Order Analysis Report

This report is used to provide key analysis type information on completed maintenance activities.
Only work orders with a completed status display.
Work orders that have no equipment reference are filtered out from this report.
You can drill down on the maintenance type, work group or equipment class, EGI and equipment
reference to display more detailed information.
Universe
The following universe is used in generating this report:
Work Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite
database.
Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts), the selection defaults to * (All).
District Code
Select the district code.

Use Productive Unit
Select Y or N.
If Y is selected the data entered in the Productive Unit prompt is included in the report output.
Use Plan Start Date Range
Select Y or N.
If Y is selected the dates entered in the Plan Start Date From and Plan Start Date To prompts are
included in the report output.
Use Raised Date Range
Select Y or N.
If Y is selected the dates entered in the Raised Date From and Raised Date To prompts are included
in the report output.
Use Completed Date Range
Select Y or N.
If Y is selected the dates entered in the Completed Date From and Completed Date To prompts are
included in the report output. Enter N if all dates display in the report output.
2009 Mincom
98
Work Orders - 3620
MSSS Active
(Maintenance Strategy and Support System)

Select Y or N.
If the Maintenance Strategy and Support System (MSSS) status prompt is Y, only work orders that
have the MSSS status indicator of A - Active are used to calculate the number of failures.
If the MSSS status prompt is N, all work orders are used to calculate the number of failures.
Note: The MSSS Active prompt is be used for data selection but used for data filtering on the Failure
Analysis tab.
Additional Prompts
The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed.

Productive Unit
Enter the productive unit assigned to the maintenance activity.

Account Code To
Enter the last account code in the range to report for completed maintenance activities.
Work Group
Enter the work group assigned to the maintenance activity.

Plan Start Date From
Enter the plan start date in the range for the maintenance activity.
Plan Start Date To
Enter the plan end date in the range for the maintenance activity.
Raised Date From
Enter the start date in the range for raised maintenance activities.
Account Code From
Enter the first account code in the range to report for completed maintenance activities.
Raised Date To
Enter the end date in the range for raised maintenance activities.
Completed Date From
Enter the start date range for completed maintenance activities.

Completed Date To
Enter the end date range for completed maintenance activities.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
99
Report Details
This report displays in a grid format.
Note: Depending on the type of report, different tabs display:
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Prompts tab and Detail tab
Summary Report
Separate tabs for different report views
Tabs
Prompts Tab
This tab displays the prompt information selected.
District Code
Completed Date From
Completed Date To
MSSS Active (Maintenance Strategy and Support System)
Account Code From
Account Code To
Plan Start Date To
Raised Date From
Raised Date To
Work Group
Actual Cost Analysis Tab
This tab displays the actual cost spent on maintenance activities for each work order type.
The option to drill down on more detailed information within the grid and pie chart is also available.
Format of Report
Grid Format:
Work Order Type and Description
Actual Total Cost
Pie Chart Format:
Actual Total Cost by Work Order Type and Description
Percentages
2009 Mincom
100
Work Orders - 3620
Sections
District Code
Sort Order
Work Order Cost
Drill Down
When you drill down on aggregate results in tables and charts, a hyperlink allows you to view the
detail data.
Hint: Mouse over a hyperlink to display a popup menu and click on the Drill Down option. Further
popup menus can display.
In the report, click the following heading links (as required) to drill down to lower level information:
Maintenance Type and Description
Select one of the following options to drill down to other lower level information:
Work Order Analysis - Equipment Reference and Description
Work Order Analysis - Work Group and Description
Calculated Fields
Actual Total Cost
Actual Equipment Cost plus Actual Material Cost plus Actual Labour Cost
plus Actual Other Cost
Actual Labour Hours Analysis Tab
This tab displays the actual labour hours on maintenance activities for each work order type.
Format of Report
Grid Format:
Work Order Type and Description
Actual Labour Hours
Pie Chart Format:
Actual Labour Hours by Work Order Type and Description
Percentages
Sections
District Code
Sort Order
Labour Hours
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
101
Drill Down
detail data.
In the report, click the following heading links (as required) to drill down to lower level information:
Maintenance Type and Description
Work Order Analysis - Equipment Reference and Description
Work Order Analysis - Work Group and Description
Actual Duration Analysis Tab
This tab displays the split of actual duration type spent on maintenance activities for each job duration
code.
Format of Report
Grid Format:
Job Duration Code and Description
Job Duration (Hours)
Pie Chart Format:
Actual Duration Hours by Job Duration Code and Description
Percentages
Sections
District Code
Sort Order
Duration Hours
Drill Down
detail data.
Duration Analysis - Equipment Reference and Description
Duration Analysis - Work Group and Description

2009 Mincom
102
Work Orders - 3620
Failure Analysis Tab
This tab displays failure types recorded on maintenance activities for each equipment class. Work
order job codes (W0, W1, W2) are used for failure analysis that supports RCM (Reliability Centred
Maintenance). The number of failures is the number of work orders that have non-blank W0 job code.
Format of Report
Grid Format:
Equipment Class and Description
Number of Failures
Pie Chart Format:
Equipment Class and Descriptions
Percentages
Sections
District Code
Sort Order
Number of Failures
Drill Down
detail data.
Failure Analysis - Equipment Group Identifier and Description
Failure Analysis - Work Order Job Code 1 and Description
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
103
MSA621 - Work Order Job Card

This report is used to print work order job cards on an individual basis or for a specific period of time
for a work group. In conjunction with Mincom Work Planner, job cards can be printed for all work
being performed under an activity (for example, shutdown/ outage).
Universe
Work Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
database.
Uncompleted Work Orders
Enter Y (Yes) or N (No) to print uncompleted work orders. Y defaults.

Use Plan Start Date
Enter Y or N to enter a range of plan start dates. If Y is entered the plan start date from and plan start
date to prompts must be completed.
District Code
Select the district code.

Additional Prompts

Work Order Task
The work order task number.

Assign To
Enter the employee ID assigned to the work order task.

Task Work Group Crew
Enter the work order group crew for which job cards are to be printed.
Enter the planned start date for the work order task in the range to be reported.
2009 Mincom
104
Work Orders - 3620
Plan Start Date To
Enter the planned end date for the work order task in the range to be reported.
Shutdown No
Enter the shutdown code for which the report is required.

Task Work Group
Enter the work group assigned to the task.

Work Order From
Enter the first work order number in the range to be reported.

Work Order To
Enter a last work order number in the range to be reported.
Report Details
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Summary Report
Tabs
Detail Tab
This tab lists work order task information in detailed view of each task in job card format.
Sections
Work Order Task Requirement
Safety Instruction
Job Instruction
Completion Instruction
Work Order Completion
Associated Documents Tab
This tab displays document publishing information that can be published concurrently with the work
order job card. The associated documents can be published to printer, fax, email, file or business
objects inbox.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
105
MSA622 - Work Order Requirements Report

This report displays material, equipment and resource requirements for work orders and/ or work order
tasks that match the nominated selection criteria.
Universe
Work Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
database.
District Code
Select the district code for the work order and work order tasks raised.
Work Order From

Work Order To

Include Task Requirement
Enter Y to include work order task with requirements recorded against them, or N to exclude
requirements. Y defaults.
Additional Prompts

Work Order Task
Enter the work order task number in the range you want reported.
Report Details
2009 Mincom
106
Work Orders - 3620
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Summary Report
Tabs
Prompts Tab
District Code
Work Order From
Work Order To
Include Task Requirement
Work Order Task From
Work Order Task To
Detail Tab
This tab lists all work orders and/or work order task requirements for work orders and/or work order
tasks.
Sections
District
Work Order
Work Order Task
Sort Order
Work Order Number
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
107
MSA710 - Missed Schedule Maintenance Report

This report displays all tasks associated with a piece of equipment in each work group missed in a
specified period. For tasks missing the schedule is:
Tasks committed but not completed
Tasks deferred or completed, with a completion code indicating that they should appear on the
missed schedule report
Also, days overdue is printed for committed tasks, the comment column displays completion code
descriptions.
Universe
Asset Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
database.
Exclude Inactive Task
Select the N or Y to exclude inactive tasks.

This prompt defaults to Y.
Report End Date
Select the last date for the report to display.

Additional Prompts

Account Code
Enter the account code valid for the district where the equipment belongs.
Work Group From
Enter the first work group in the range for the maintenance schedule task.
Work Group To
Enter the last work group in the range for the maintenance schedule task.
2009 Mincom
108
Work Orders - 3620
Equip Ref From
(Equipment Reference From)

Enter the first equipment reference number in the range relating to the maintenance schedule task.
Equip Ref To
(Equipment Reference To)

Enter the last equipment reference number in the range relating to the maintenance schedule task.
Report Details
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Summary Report
Tabs
Prompts Tab
Account Code
Work Group From
Work Group To
Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From)
Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To)
Report End Date
Exclude Inactive Tasks
Detail Tab
This tab lists the tasks associated with a piece of equipment in each work group missing in a specified
period.
Sections
Work Group
Sort Order
Equipment Reference
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
109
Calculated Fields
Days Over
Report End Date less Scheduled or Actioned Date
2009 Mincom
110
Work Orders - 3620
MSAEFF - Maintenance Effectiveness and Efficiency

Report
This report displays in a graphical manner, key performance indicator information on the effectiveness
and efficiency of maintenance activities. To extend the analysis ability, you can drill down into work
group set, work group or equipment group identifier (EGI) and equipment reference.
Only closed work orders are reported.
Universe
Asset Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
database.
District Code
Enter the district code.

Completed Date From
Enter the first completion date in the range you want reported.
Completed Date To
Enter the last completion date in the range you want reported.
Completion Allowance
Enter the number of days before or after the Work Order Planned Start Date to be used to calculate the
work order 'Completion within Completion Allowance' KPI.
Maint Work Order Type
Enter the work order type relating to the maintenance work.

Proactive Maint Type
(Proactive Maintenance Type)

Enter the maintenance types that are proactive maintenance.
Reactive Maint Type
(Reactive Maintenance Type)

Enter the maintenance types that are reactive maintenance.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
111
MSSS Active
(Maintenance Strategy and Support System)

Select Y or N. Y defaults.
If the Maintenance Strategy and Support System (MSSS) status prompt is Y, only work orders that
have the MSSS status indicator of A - Active are used to calculate the number of failures.
If the MSSS status prompt is N, all work orders are used to calculate the number of failures.
Additional Prompts

Work Group Set
Enter a work group set.

Equip Ref From

Enter the first equipment reference number in the range you want reported.
Equip Ref To

Enter the last equipment reference number in the range you want reported.
Work Group
Select the work group
Report Details
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Summary Report
Tabs
Prompts Tab
District Code
Completed Date From

2009 Mincom
112
Work Orders - 3620
Completed Date to
Completion Allowance
Maintenance Work Order Type
Proactive Maintenance Type
Reactive Maintenance Type
Work Group Set
Equipment Reference From/To
Work Group
Maintenance Effectiveness Tab
This tab lists maintenance effectiveness as the ratio of proactive to reactive works in a bar graph
format.
The Proactive work is executed in a structured manner. Primary tasks are carried out in order to find
secondary tasks before they become failure tasks.
Reactive work is all other works not found as a result of carrying out primary tasks. The report
displays maintenance costs in categories represented by various maintenance types that are grouped
into proactive and reactive as nominated at selection prompts. Maintenance effectiveness is calculated
for each work group set.
You can drill down from a work group set to work group to month, and from proactive or reactive
categories to maintenance types to give more analysis details.
Format of Report
Grid Format
Proactive Amount
Reactive Amount
Ratio Percentage
Bar Graph Format
Work Group Set
Actual Labour Costs (Percentages)
Drill Down
detail data.
You can use the drill down facility by clicking
on the top left of the screen. Select from the
available options to drill down to more detailed information:
Work Group Set

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Work Group
Month
113
Sections
District Code
Calculated Fields
Maintenance Effectiveness (Costs)
Sum(Total Work Order Cost - for Proactive Maintenance

Types)/
Sum(Total Work Order Cost - for Reactive Maintenance
Types)
Maintenance Effectiveness (No. of

Work Orders)
Total number of Work Orders - Proactive Maintenance

Types)/
Total number of Work Orders - for Reactive Maintenance
Types)
Only closed work orders will be used in the calculation. Only the work order type that is the
nominated maintenance work order type will be used. Only nominated Proactive and Reactive types
will be used in the calculation. If the effectiveness ratio is more than 75% to 25% than the data will be
highlighted in red.
Work Creation and Planning Efficiency Tab
This tab calculates and displays Maintenance Efficiency Key Performance Indicators of work
allocation, work creation and work planning within the nominated time period and maintenance work
order types.
The information can be drilled down from work group set, work group and month to give more
analysis details.
Sections
District Code
Calculated Fields
Maintenance Work Allocation
(Number of closed non MST work orders that have

nominated maintenance work order types)/(Total number of
closed non MST work orders - All maintenance type)
Work Creation - Required by Date
(Number of closed non MST work orders that have required

by date)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders)
Work Creation - Originator Priority
(Number of closed non MST work orders that have originator

priority)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders)
Work Planning - Planner Priority
(Number of closed non MST work orders that have planner

priority)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders)
Work Planning - Estimated Duration (Number of all closed work orders that have estimated
duration)/(Total number of all closed work orders)

2009 Mincom
114
Work Orders - 3620
Work Planning - Duration Variance

+/- 15%
(Number of all closed work orders that have duration

variance within +/- 15%)/(Total number of all closed work
orders)
Work Planning - Estimated Cost
(Number of all closed work orders that have estimated

cost)/(Total number of all closed work orders)
Work Planning - Estimated Cost

Variance +/- 15%
(Number of all closed work orders that have estimated cost

variance within +/- 15%)/(Total number of all closed work
orders)
Duration Variance
(Actual duration hours - Estimated duration

hours)*100%/Estimated duration hours
Estimated Cost Variance
(Actual estimated cost - Estimated cost)*100%/Estimated

cost
Non MST work orders are work orders that are not created from a MST.
All KPIs will look at only work orders that have the nominated maintenance work order type except
the maintenance work allocation KPI.
If work allocation is less than 90% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Creation - Required by Date is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Creation - Originator Priority is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Planning - Planner Priority is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Planning - Estimated Duration is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Planning - Duration Variance +/- 15% is less than 70% then the data will be highlighted in
red.
If Work Planning - Estimated Cost is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Planning - Estimated Cost Variance +/- 15% is less than 70% then the data will be highlighted
in red.
Work Scheduling and Completion Efficiency Tab
This tab calculates and displays Maintenance Efficiency Key Performance Indicators of work
scheduling and work completion within nominated time period and maintenance work order types.
The information can be drilled down from work group set, work group and month to give more
analysis details.
Sections
District Code.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
115
Calculated Fields
Work Scheduling - Planned Start
Date
(Number of all closed non MST work orders that have

planned start date)/(Total number of all closed non MST
work orders)
Work Scheduling - Completion

within Completion Allowance
(Number of all closed work orders that are completed within

the completion allowance)/(Total number of all closed work
orders)
Work Completion - Actual Cost
(Number of all closed work orders that have actual

cost)/(Total number of all closed work orders)
Work Completion - Actual Duration
(Number of all closed work orders that have actual

duration)/(Total number of all closed work orders)
Work Completion - Failure Code 1
(Number of closed non MST work orders that have failure

code 1)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders)



Work Completion - Completion

Comment
(Number of closed non MST work orders that have

completion comment at work order header)/(Total number of
closed non MST work orders)
Non MST work orders are work orders that not created from MST
All KPIs will look at only work orders that have the nominated maintenance work order type.
If work Scheduling - Planned Start Date is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Scheduling - Completion within Allowance is less than 70% then the data will be highlighted
in red.
If Work Completion - Actual Cost is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Completion - Actual Duration is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Completion - Failure Code 1 is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.
If Work Completion - Completion Comment is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.
2009 Mincom
116
Work Orders - 3620
MSSS Analysis Tab
The Maintenance Strategy Support System (MSSS) has the capability of recording a full RCM
analysis strategy within the system. MSSS also facilitates a structured selection of failure codes
depending on Equipment Group Id.
This tab displays the MSSS analysis strategy and number of closed work orders that match the MSSS
structured loaded for Equipment Group Ids. The information can be drilled down from EGI to
Equipment References to give more analysis details.
Equip Maint Effectiveness Tab
Equipment Maintenance Effectiveness is the ratio of Proactive to Reactive works recorded against an
item of equipment. The report provides the effectiveness of individual equipment maintenance
strategies.
This tab displays maintenance costs and number of work orders in categories represented by various
maintenance types that will be grouped into Proactive and Reactive as nominated at selection prompts.
Maintenance effectiveness will then be calculated for each equipment group.
The information can be drilled down from equipment group to equipment to month and from proactive
or reactive categories to maintenance types to give more analysis details.
Format of Report
Grid Format
Equipment Group Identifier (EGI)
Proactive Amount
Reactive Amount
Ratio Percentage
Bar Graph Format
EGI
Percentage
Calculated Fields
Equipment Maintenance
Effectiveness (Costs)
Sum(Total Work Order Cost - for Proactive Maintenance Types)/

Sum(Total Work Order Cost - for Reactive Maintenance Types)
Equipment Maintenance
Effectiveness
(No. of Work Orders)
Total number of Work Orders - for Proactive Maintenance Types)/

Total number of Work Orders - for Reactive Maintenance Types)
Only closed work orders will be used in the calculation.

Only the work order type that is the nominated maintenance work order type will be used.
Only work orders raised against an item of equipment will be used in the calculation.
Only nominated Proactive and Reactive Maintenance types will be used in the calculation.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
117
If the effectiveness ratio is less than 75% to 25% then the data will be highlighted in red.
2009 Mincom
118
Work Orders - 3620
MSAMTF - Mean Time Between Failure

This report displays work orders raised for a productive unit. The meantime between failure is
calculated as the number of days in the reporting period divided by the number of work orders raised
in that period.
Universe
Work Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
database.
Completed Date From
Enter the first work order completed date in the range to be reported.
Completed Date To
Enter the last work order raised date in the range to be reported.
Additional Prompts

EGI To
(Equipment Group Identifier To)

Enter the first EGI number in the range to be reported.
EGI From
(Equipment Group Identifier From)

Enter the last EGI number in the range to be reported.
Equip Ref From

Enter the first equipment reference number in the range to be reported.
Equip Ref To

Enter the last equipment reference number in the range to be reported.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
119
Equipment Class
(Work Order)
Enter the equipment class for the work order to be reported.
Maint Type
(Maintenance Type)
Enter the maintenance type for the work order to be reported.
Enter End Closed Date
Enter the last work order closed date in the range to be reported.
Raised Date From
Enter the first work order raised date in the range to be reported.
Raised Date To
Work Order Type
Enter the work order type to be reported.
Report Details
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Summary Report
Tabs
Prompts Tab
Completed Date From
Completed Date To
EGI From (Equipment Group Identifier From)
EGI To (Equipment Group Identifier From)
Equipment Class
2009 Mincom
120
Work Orders - 3620
Maint Type (Maintenance Type)
Raised Date From
Raised Date To
Work Order Type
MTBF by Calendar Year
This tab lists the mean time between failures by each calendar year.
Format of Report
The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.

Grid Format
Year Raised
Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF - Days)
Bar Graph Format
X Axis - Year Raised
Y Axis - MTFB (Days)
MTBF by Equipment
This tab lists the mean time between failures for each equipment item for a calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders)
Mean Time Between Failure (Days) (MTBF - Days)
Year Raised
Bar Graph Format
MTBF by EGI
This tab lists the mean time between failure for each equipment group identification by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
121
Year Raised
Bar Graph Format
MTBF by Equipment Class
This tab lists the mean time between failure for each equipment class by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
Year Raised
Bar Graph Format
MTBF by Work Order Type
This tab lists the mean time between failure for each work order type by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
Year Raised
Bar Graph Format
MTBF by Maintenance Type
This tab lists the mean time between failure each maintenance type by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
2009 Mincom
122
Work Orders - 3620
Year Raised
Bar Graph Format
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
123
MSAMTR - Mean Time to Repair

This report displays work order information for selected equipment and a selected work period. It
calculates the mean time to repair (MTTR) the equipment. The information provides the average
number of hours the equipment is inoperative or 'down' while it undergoes maintenance, during a
given work period.
Universe
Work Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
database.
Completed Date From
Enter the first work order completed date in the range to be reported.
Completed Date To
Additional Prompts

EGI From

Enter the first EGI number in the range to be reported.
EGI To

Enter the last EGI number in the range to be reported.
Equip Ref From

Enter the first equipment reference number in the range to be reported.
Equip Ref To

2009 Mincom
124
Work Orders - 3620
Enter the last equipment reference number in the range to be reported.

Equipment Class
(Work Order)
Enter the equipment class for the work order to be reported.
Maint Type
(Maintenance Type)
Enter the maintenance type for the work order to be reported.
Enter the last work order closed date in the range to be reported.
Raised Date From
Enter the first work order raised date in the range to be reported.
Raised Date To
Work Order Type
Enter the work order type to be reported.
Report Details
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Summary Report
Tabs
Prompts Tab
Completed Date From
Completed Date To
EGI From (Equipment Group Identifier From)
EGI To (Equipment Group Identifier From)

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Equipment Class
Maint Type (Maintenance Type)
Raised Date From
Raised Date To
Work Order Type
125
MTTR by Calendar Year
This tab lists the mean time to repair all equipment in request by each calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
Year Closed
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR - Hours)
Bar Graph Format
X Axis - Year Closed
Y Axis - MTTR (Hrs)
MTTR by Equipment
This tab lists the mean time to repair each equipment in request by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
Mean Time to Repair (Hours) (MTTR - Hours)
Year Closed
Bar Graph Format
Y Axis - MTTR (Hrs) (MTTR - Hours)
MTTR by EGI
This tab lists the mean time to repair each equipment group identification by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
2009 Mincom
126
Work Orders - 3620
Year Closed
Bar Graph Format
MTTR by Equipment Class
This tab lists the mean time to repair each equipment class by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
Year Closed
Bar Graph Format
MTTR by Work Order Type
This tab lists the mean time to repair each work order type by calendar year.
Format of Report

Grid Format
Year Closed
Bar Graph Format
MTTR by Maintenance Type
This tab lists the mean time to repair each maintenance type by calendar year.
Format of Report

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
127
Grid Format
Year Closed
Bar Graph Format
2009 Mincom
128
Work Orders - 3620
MSAXWO - Work Order Analysis Summary

This report is a summary listing of all work orders. The work order analysis report assists asset owners
and maintenance personnel in identifying equipment failure patterns in completed jobs and resource
allocation requirements for open jobs.
Universe
Work Management
Prompts
Mandatory Prompts
database.
District Code

Enter Y or N if you want uncompleted work orders to be reported. Defaults to Y.

Additional Prompts

Work Order From

Work Order To

Shutdown No
Enter the shutdown number of the work order to be reported.

Work Order Task
Enter the task number of the work order to be reported.

Plan Start Date Range
Enter Y or N to enter a range of plan start dates. If Y is entered the plan start date from and plan start
date to fields need to be completed.
Enter the first work order date in the range to be reported.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
129
Plan Start Date To
Enter the last work order date in the range to be reported.
Report Details
Form Report
Detail tab
Detail Report
Summary Report
Tabs
Prompts Tab
District Code
Shutdown No
Work Order From
Work Order To
Work Order Task
Plan Start Date Range
Plan Start Date To
Detail Tab
This tab lists work order summary details spent on maintenance activities.
Sections
District Code
Sort Order
Work Order Number
2009 Mincom
130
Work Orders - 3620
MSB622 - Work Order Cost Reallocation

Report MSB622 is an audit control of the Work Order cost reallocation procedure.
The report is automatically produced with each successful execution of the MSB622 - Work Order
Cost Reallocation procedure. Requests for the Reallocation procedure are generated via the online
Report Request facility MSO080, the MSM62CA - Completion of Work Order screen when the Work
Order is closed to Final Costs, or via the MSM62RA - Work Order Reallocation screen when the
Reallocation Limit is adjusted for a Work Order which is closed to Final Costs.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
131
MSB623 - Work Order Automatic Finalisation

Report MSB623 is an audit control of the Automatic Work Order finalisation procedure. It allows
Work Orders which match the strict selection criteria to be automatically finalised.
Additional Information
Parameters
All Sub-systems
Number of Days
This specifies the minimum number of days that must have elapsed between
the work order completion date, and the process run date, in order to
automatically finalise the work order.
Individual Subsystems Number of

Days
Entries may only be made to any of these fields if there is no entry in the All
Sub-systems Number of Days field. A blank entry means that finalisation
will not be performed for that subsystem. An entry against a sub-system
which is not installed will be ignored by the batch process.
For each of the available sub-systems, this parameter is applied in the same
manner as for the All Subsystems Number of Days field. However, instead
of the work order as a whole being finalised, only the nominated sub-system
will be finalised.
If the finalisation of an individual sub-system results in all installed
subsystems being finalised, then the work order as a whole will be finalised
according to sub-system finalisation rules.
Work Group
When specified, only work orders that have this work group can possibly be
automatically finalised. In order to be automatically finalised, it must also
match all other selection criteria entered.
Originator
When specified, only work orders that have this originator can possibly be
automatically finalised. In order to be automatically finalised, it must also
match all other selection criteria entered.
Assign To
When specified, only work orders that have this assign to person can
possibly be automatically finalised. In order to be automatically finalised, it
must also match all other selection criteria entered.
Parent Work Order
When specified, only work orders that have this parent work order can
possibly be automatically finalised. In order to be automatically finalised, it
must also match all other selection criteria entered.
Project Number
When specified, only work orders that have this Project Number, or that
have any project which is a sub-project of that project at any level in the
project hierarchy can possibly be automatically finalised. This depends on
the Include Sub-Projects flag setting.
In order to be automatically finalised, it must also match all other selection
criteria entered.
2009 Mincom
132
Include Sub-projects
Work Orders - 3620
Defaults to Y.
When this field is set to Y, all matching work orders for the nominated
project and for all sub- projects of that project are finalised. When this field
is set to N or space, only work orders belonging to the nominated project are
finalised.
**Additionally**
Additionally, only work orders which are completed, not finalised and not
capital, will be selected for automatic finalisation.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
133
MSB624 - Update W/O Status for Available Material

This program provides a mechanism to update the User Status of Work Orders for which sufficient
stocks are available to meet APL requirements. The program reviews the stock availability (Stock On
Hand - Dues Out) of each APL item associated with the Work Order and if all items have sufficient
stock, the Work Order User Status is set to a nominated value specified in the Table File WS - User
Work Order Status.
The program has a number of limitations which should be taken into account.
1. This report does not take into account Category Match values therefore all Categories are
considered available for issue.
2. To provide an accurate assessment, this program should be initiated immediately prior to
submitting the APL requisition.
3. The program assumes all items on the APL are required and that only 1 X Qty Required is to be
requisitioned.
4. Stock availability calculations do not take into account imminent dues-in.
This report can be requested on an ad hoc basis.
Parameters
Work Order Status
Enter O for Open Work Orders or A for Authorised Work Orders. Leave blank
to indicate both status O and A are to be used in the selection process.
(Mincom)
Equipment Number
Enter a valid Equipment Number to check Work Orders for specific

equipment. Entry is optional.
Work Group
Enter a valid Work Group within the current district to check Work Orders for
a specific Work Group. Entry is optional.
Assigned To
Individual
Enter the Responsibility Code of the person to whom the Work Order is
assigned. Entry is optional.
2009 Mincom
134
Work Orders - 3620
MSB627 - Work Order Generation for Type Defects

Program MSB627 will generate Work Orders based on equipment which was derived either from an
Equipment Group Identifier or an Equipment List. A summary report is produced detailing the Work
Orders created, the equipment, and the assign to person.
This program would typically be run when defects are identified against multiple pieces of equipment
of the same type or specification.
This report can be generated at any time.
Parameters
EGI (Equipment
Group Identifier)
Enter a valid Equipment Group Identifier. Entry is validated against Table File
GI.
Equipment List
Type
Enter a valid Equipment List Type. Entry is validated against Table File LI.
Input is not required if an EGI has been entered.
Equipment List
Identifier
Enter a valid Equipment List Identifier. Entry is mandatory if the Equipment

List Type has been entered and, together with the List Type, must exist as a
valid Equipment List. Entry is not required if an EGI has been entered.
List Indicator
Enter a valid List Indicator. Enter L to generate work orders for equipment
items for the entered list. Enter A to generate work orders for all equipment
items for the entered list and its sub-lists. Input is not required if an EGI has
been entered, but is mandatory if a List Type and ID have been entered.
Equipment
Classification
Enter up to 10 Equipment Classifications to be used as additional filters for

selecting equipment. Entry is validated against Table Files E0 to E9.
Standard Job
Enter the Standard Job which generated work orders will be based on.
Parent Work Order
Enter an existing Parent Work Order Number to which any generated work
orders will belong.
Work Order Prefix
Enter a valid work order prefix as defined on the System Control file. All
generated work orders will begin with this prefix.
Originator
Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the generation of the
work orders. Entry is validated against Table File RC, or the Employee master
file for integrated Payroll users.
Originator Priority
Enter the originator's priority, which is a number between 1 and 99 inclusive,

with the highest priority being 1. The values and their meanings are held in
Table File PY. Entry is validated against this table file.
Work Group
Enter the work group to which this job is assigned. Entry is validated against the
Work Group master file.
Work Centre
Enter the work centre to which this job is assigned. Entry is validated against
the Work Centre master file.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Assigned To
135
Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work order is assigned.
Entry is validated against Table File RC, or the Employee master file for
integrated Payroll users.
2009 Mincom
136
Work Orders - 3620
MSB628 - Reset Tasks Plan Start Dates

Report MSB628 shows the number of records read and updated in the process of re- synchronising the
planned start dates of Work Order Tasks.
Those tasks belonging to a nominated range of work orders for which offsets are in use, and for which
the work order has a planned start date are updated when the Task start date does not equal the work
order start date plus the offset value. If a planned finish date is also present, then the relative difference
between the start and finish dates is maintained. If the Task has been scheduled, the relevant
scheduling information is also maintained, provided the resulting date change does not try to move the
Task start date into or out of a committed scheduling period.
Parameters
Target District
Enter the district to which the work orders are to be processed.

Entry must be a valid District Code.
From Work
Order/To Work
Order
Enter either a range of work order numbers or a single work order number.
If you enter From Work Order and leave To Work Order blank, the update
will be performed until the end of the Work Order file.
If you enter To Work Order and leave From Work Order blank, the update
will start from the beginning of the Work Order file.
If both numbers are given, the To Work Order number is validated to be greater
than or equal to the From Work Order number. If they are equal, the single
work order will be processed, otherwise the specified range of Work Order
Numbers will be processed.
Either of the From or To Work Order Numbers can end with the wildcard
character *.
Parent Work
Order Number
If the Parent Work Order number is given, it will only be processed when both
the From Work Order Number and the To Work Order number are blank.
This field can also end with the wildcard character *.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
137
MSR620 - Work Order Analysis Report

This report provides a detailed or a summary listing of all Work Orders meeting the selection
criteria. The Work Order Analysis Report assists asset owners and maintenance personnel in
identifying equipment failure patterns in completed jobs and resource allocation requirements for open
jobs among other things. The selection criteria offered in this report makes for a very powerful
analysis tool.
This report can be generated at any time from MSO080. It can also be requested directly from the
Short Form and Long Form Work Order applications by using Action Code W.
Parameters
Summary or
Detailed Output
Enter S to request the summary report. D for a detailed report.
Tasks Required
(Y/N)
Enter Y if task breakdowns are required on the report. If they are not required,
enter N and the report will show Work Order header information only.
Work Order
Number Range:
From/To
Enter the range of work orders for which the report is required.
Leave the From range blank to report from the first Work Order Number. Leave
the To range blank to report to the last Work Order Number.
Date: O-Open/ CEnter O, C, P or space, depending on the type of work order date to be selected
Close/ P-Plan Start/ on.
Space
Work Order Date
Range: From/To
Enter the range of work order dates to be selected. The dates entered refer to the
type requested in the previous field.
Leave the From range blank to report from the earliest date. Leave the To range
blank to report to the latest date.
WO StatusMincom (O/A/C)
Enter the Work Order status of the work orders required. Options are O Open, A - Authorised, C- Closed.
WO Status-User
Enter the user status of the work orders required.
Work Order Type
Enter the work order type to be selected for the report.
Equipment Group
ID
Enter the equipment group ID for which the report is required.
Equipment
Reference Range:
From/To
Enter the range of Equipment References for which the report is required.
Equipment List
Type
Enter the type of equipment list for which the report is required.
Leave the From range blank to report from the first Equipment Reference.
Leave the To range blank to report to the last Equipment Reference.
2009 Mincom
138
Equipment List ID
Work Orders - 3620
Enter the ID for the equipment list for which the report is required.
Work orders are selected for equipment on this list only, not for equipment on
any of the sub-lists.
Component Code
Range: From/To
Enter the range of Component Codes for which the report is required.
Leave the From range blank to report from the first Component Code. Leave the
To range blank to report to the last Component Codes.
Work Group
Range: From/To
Enter the range of work groups for which the report is required.
Leave the From range blank to report from the first work group. Leave the To
range blank to report to the last work group.
Shutdown Code
Enter the Shutdown Code for which the report is required.
Cost
Centre/Account
Code Range:
From/To
Enter the range of Cost Centre or Account Codes for which the report is
required.
Classification
Types
Enter up to three work order classification types, for example WO to W9,

separated by a space, from which the report is required to select. This field must
be entered in conjunction with the Classification Codes field. Each entry made
must directly correlate to the corresponding entry in the Classification Code
field.
Classification
Codes
Enter up to three work order Classification Codes in accordance with the entry
made in the Classification Codes field. Each code can be separated by a space.
Modifier Code
Enter the Modifier Code to be reported on.
Part Causing
Failure
Enter the part causing failure for which the report is required.
Project Number
Enter the Project Number for which the report is required.
Estimated Job
Hours Range:
From/To
Enter the range of estimated job hours for which the report is required. Leave
the From range blank if no lower limit of hours is required. Leave the To range
blank if no upper limit of estimated job hours is required.
Standard Job No.
Enter the Standard Job Number for which the report is required.
Maintenance Type
Enter the maintenance type for which the report is required.
Originator
Enter the originator of the work order for which the report is required.
Leave the From range blank to report from the first code. Leave the To range
blank to report to the last code.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
139
MSR621 - Work Order Task - Job Card

Report MSR621 is the job card for either a single Work Order Task or for all Tasks for a Work Order.
This report can be generated at any time from MSO080. It can also be requested directly from the
Work Order application.
Parameters
Work Order
Number
Enter the number of the work order for which the job card is required, if only one is
required.
Work Order
Task
Enter the number of the work order task required if the job card is not required for
all tasks. Leave this field blank to request job cards for every task.
Work Order
Range:
From/To
Enter a range of Work Order Numbers if job cards for more than one work order are
required.
2009 Mincom
140
Work Orders - 3620
MSR623 - Archive Work Selection

Report MSR623 allows the selection of Work Orders to be archived using an equipment reference as
the main selection criterion.
This report can be selected for the processing district or all districts.
Parameters
Run
Number
Leave blank for a system-generated Run Number or enter a valid Run Number that
already exists on the Header Details of Archive Run file MSF075.
Override/
Add
Enter O to override an existing run or A to add to it. Entry is mandatory when amending
an existing run. This field is left blank when a new run is being created.
Equipment This is an optional field. Enter the Equipment Reference for archiving.
Reference
Date
This field is mandatory. Enter the completion date (inclusive) at which to process the
Completed run.
All work orders with a completed date less than or equal to this date will be selected for
archiving, unless they do not meet one of the other selection criteria.
Work Order This is an optional field.
Prefix
Enter a valid Work Order Prefix to restrict selection of work orders to those preceded by
the specified prefix.
Work Order This is an optional field.
Type
Enter a valid Work Order Type to restrict selection of work orders to those with the
specified type.
Actual
Cost
This is an optional field.

Enter the maximum cost of a work order in dollars to be included in selection. All work
orders with a total actual cost less than or equal to this cost will be selected for
archiving, unless they do not meet one of the other selection criteria.
Cost
Centre/
Account
Code
(Optional)
Finalise
Costing
(Y/C/N)
Enter a valid cost centre or account code to restrict selection of work orders to those
associated with the specified cost centre or account code.
Enter Y, C, or N to select work orders that have had their costs finalised, closed to costs,
or not finalised respectively.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
141
MSR626 - Work Order Backlog Report

MSR626 lists open Work Orders with a planned start date earlier than the date on which the report
was run. This report can be used to alert maintenance personnel of Work Orders not yet actioned,
deferred, cancelled or closed and are overdue.
Parameters
Work Group
Enter a valid work group to check for a listing of the work group's backlog.
Equipment
Number
Enter a valid equipment number to check if specific items of equipment have Work
Orders that are in backlog.
Productive Unit Enter a valid Productive Unit. If this value is entered, the Equipment Number on the
work order must be related to the productive unit. The report will return all Work
Orders for the Productive Units sub-ordinates that are in backlog.
2009 Mincom
142
Work Orders - 3620
MSRXWJ - XML Work Order Job Card Report

MSRXWJ is an XML encoded listing of a job card for either a work order task or for all work order
tasks. The data relating to the job card is prefixed and suffixed by XML tags. The output from this
report is used in conjunction with a Microsoft Word template to produce a formatted document.
MSRXWJ report is a substitute for MSR621- Work Order Task - Job Card. A substitute request must
be set up on the SR - Substitute Request table file before the report can be printed.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
143
Work Orders - Screens

Screens
Dialog Box - Bulk Closure Work Orders .............................................................................. 145
Dialog Box - Bulk Reschedule Work Orders ........................................................................ 146
Dialog Box - Cancel Work Order.......................................................................................... 147
Dialog Box - Cancel WO Task.............................................................................................. 148
Dialog Box - Change Status .................................................................................................. 149
Dialog Box - Complete Work Order ..................................................................................... 150
Dialog Box - Complete WO Task ......................................................................................... 152
Dialog Box - Copy from Existing Work Order ..................................................................... 153
Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Standard Job ....................................................................... 154
Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Work Order ........................................................................ 155
Dialog Box - Copy from Standard Job .................................................................................. 156
Dialog Box - Copy Text to Work Order................................................................................ 157
Dialog Box - Defer Work Order............................................................................................ 158
Dialog Box - Finalise Work Order or Subsystem ................................................................. 159
Dialog Box - Finish Assignment ........................................................................................... 160
Dialog Box - Job Instructions ................................................................................................ 161
Dialog Box - Modify User Status .......................................................................................... 162
Dialog Box - New Requisition .............................................................................................. 163
Dialog Box - Options (MSQ620) .......................................................................................... 164
Dialog Box - Print GIS Map.................................................................................................. 168
Dialog Box - Print Work Order Job Cards ............................................................................ 170
Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress................................................................................. 171
Dialog Box - Requirements (Work Orders) .......................................................................... 172
Dialog Box - Reschedule ....................................................................................................... 181
Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks ............................................................................................ 182
Dialog Box - Reschedule Work Orders ................................................................................. 183
Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements .......................................................................... 184
Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements for a Task......................................................... 185
Dialog Box - Schedule Work ................................................................................................ 186
Dialog Box - Schedule WO Task .......................................................................................... 189
Dialog Box - Start Assignment ............................................................................................. 191
Dialog Box - Options (Tools Options) ............................................................................... 192
Dialog Box - Update Estimates ............................................................................................. 198
Dialog Box - WO Task Assign To ........................................................................................ 200
Dialog Box - Work Order Assign To .................................................................................... 201
Dialog Box - Work Order Durations ..................................................................................... 202
Dialog Box - Work Order Task ............................................................................................. 204
MSE620 - My Work Orders .................................................................................................. 211
MSE620 - Work Orders Search............................................................................................. 212
MSM001A - Maintain System Control File .......................................................................... 218
MSM001C - Maintain Systems Control File (Cont.) ............................................................ 221
MSM00AA - Modify Modules Installed ............................................................................... 229
MSM00BA - District Control Information............................................................................ 230
MSM00EA - District Control Information - Maintain Work Order Prefix Information ....... 238
MSM097A - Review Standard Text ...................................................................................... 240
MSM620A - Maintain Complete Work Order Information .................................................. 241
MSM621A - Review Work Order Information ..................................................................... 243
MSM621B - Additional Work Order Selection Parameters .................................................. 247
2009 Mincom
144
Work Orders - 3620
MSM621D - Review Work Order - Summary ...................................................................... 249

MSM622A - Review Work Order - General Information ..................................................... 253
MSM622B - Review Work Order - Planning Information.................................................... 257
MSM622C - Review Work Order Code/Completion Information ........................................ 262
MSM622D - Review Duration Information .......................................................................... 265
MSM624A - Review Work Order - Summary of Tasks ....................................................... 266
MSM624B - Review Work Order Task Information ............................................................ 267
MSM625A - Maintain Parent Work Order Information ....................................................... 270
MSM625B - Parent Work Order ........................................................................................... 271
MSM626A - Review of Parent Work Orders ........................................................................ 273
MSM626B - Review Parent Work Order Detail ................................................................... 274
MSM626C - Summary of Parent Work Orders ..................................................................... 276
MSM627A - Maintain Incident Logsheets ............................................................................ 277
MSM627B - Create/Modify/Delete Incident Logsheet Entries............................................. 279
MSM628A - Review Work Order Materials Status .............................................................. 282
MSM62AA - Modify Work Order - General Information .................................................... 284
MSM62CB - Work Order Subsystem Finalization ............................................................... 288
MSM62DA - Maintain Equipment Tracing for Work Order ................................................ 290
MSM62EA - Modify Job Duration Information ................................................................... 295
MSM62FA - Maintain Work Order Task Completion Information ...................................... 297
MSM62FB - Complete Work Order Tasks ........................................................................... 298
MSM62GA - Print Selected Work Orders and/or Tasks ....................................................... 299
MSM62HA - Create Work Order from Standard Job ........................................................... 300
MSM62IA - Create Short-form Orders For Equipment ........................................................ 303
MSM62JA - Create Short-form Work Orders for Plant ........................................................ 305
MSM62KA - Delete Work Orders ........................................................................................ 307
MSM62LA - Review Job Duration Information ................................................................... 309
MSM62MA - Review Work Order Tasks - for Work Group ................................................ 311
MSM62NA - Bulk Work Order Update Selection ................................................................ 313
MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection .............................................. 316
MSM62NC - Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration .............................................. 318
MSM62PA - Create/Maintain Short-form Work Order ........................................................ 321
MSM62QA - Create/maintain Shortform Work Order ......................................................... 325
MSM62RA - Maintain Work Order Billing Information ...................................................... 331
MSM62SA - Review Work Order Billing Information ........................................................ 336
MSM62TA - Create/Maintain Incident Work Order............................................................. 339
MSM62VA - Review Incident Logsheets ............................................................................. 343
MSM62VB - Review Incident Logsheet Entries................................................................... 345
MSM62WA - Create/Maintain Shortform Work Order ........................................................ 347
MSM62XA - Create Work Orders from a Std Job Plan Parent Std Job ................................ 354
MSM62YA - Create/Maintain Work Order For Equipment ................................................. 358
MSM633A - Review Complete Maintenance History .......................................................... 363
MSM854A - Labour Costing Transaction Entry ................................................................... 364
MSQ140 - Requisition........................................................................................................... 368
MSQ345 - Condition Monitoring Set Measurements ........................................................... 384
MSQ580 - Document ............................................................................................................ 387
MSQ620 - Work Orders ........................................................................................................ 392
MSQ620 - Work Order Task ................................................................................................. 411
MSQ625 - Parent Work Order .............................................................................................. 419
MSQ629 - Notice .................................................................................................................. 424
MSQ62C - Search for Task Assignments ............................................................................. 431
MSQ62C - Create Task Assignments ................................................................................... 433
MSQ650 - Equipment Tracing .............................................................................................. 434
MSQ655 - Job Estimating ..................................................................................................... 436
MSQ695 - Job Package ......................................................................................................... 453
MSQ901 - Accounting Entry ................................................................................................ 460
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
145
Dialog Box - Bulk Closure Work Orders

In the Bulk Closure Work Orders dialog box you can close multiple work orders in bulk.
The fields on this screen are described below:
Completed Date
The completed date defaults to today's date. You can change the date when you want the work orders
to be closed.
Completed Time
Enter the time you want the bulk work orders to be closed.
If no entry is made, the Closure Time will default to midnight.
Completed Code
Enter the completion code.

Completed By
The completed by defaults to the employee ID who will run the bulk closure.
2009 Mincom
146
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Bulk Reschedule Work Orders

The Bulk Reschedule Work Orders dialog box enables you to reschedule work orders in bulk.
ASSIGNMENT
Individual
Enter the Employee ID you want to assign to the selected Work Order task for rescheduling.
Crew
The Work Group Crew.

This field is validated against a combination of the assigned Work Group and the Table File CREW Work Group Crew. The CREW table file entry selected must have an associated value equal to the
Assigned Work Group.
Work Group
Enter the work group to assign to the task you want rescheduled.
PLANNED DATES
Start Date
Enter the date when the job is rescheduled to start.

Start Time
Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to start.

Finish Date
Enter the date the job is rescheduled to finish.

This date must be later than the start date.
Finish Time
Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to finish.

Ignore Warnings
Select this option if you do not want a warning message to display.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
147
Dialog Box - Cancel Work Order

The Cancel Work Order dialog box enables you to record cancellation information for a Work Order.
Date Cancelled
Enter the date on which work related to this Work Order was cancelled. Click the down-arrow to
select the date from a calendar.
If this Work Order has a number of tasks or operations that are not recorded as closed, they are
updated with this date.
Time Cancelled
Enter the time at which work related to this Work Order was cancelled.
Cancelled By
Enter or right-click, search and select for the ID of the employee who cancelled the Work Order. Entry
is mandatory if Date Cancelled is entered.
Cancelled Code
Enter the completion code that signifies the status of cancellation of the work order from the dropdown list.
Entry is validated against Table File SC. Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC
table file.
Only codes that are specified as valid cancellation codes will be accepted.
2009 Mincom
148
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Cancel WO Task

The Cancel WO Task dialog box enables you to record cancellation information for a Work Order
task.
Date Cancelled
Enter the date when work related to this Work Order Task was cancelled or select from the drop-down
list.
Time Cancelled
Enter the time when work related to this Work Order Task was cancelled.
Cancelled By
Enter or right-click, search and select the ID of the employee who cancelled the Work Order Task.
Entry is mandatory if Date Cancelled is entered.
Cancelled Code
Enter the completion code that signifies the status of completion of the Work Order Task or select
from the drop-down list.
Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC Table File.
Only codes that are specified as valid cancellation codes are accepted.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
149
Dialog Box - Change Status

The change status dialog box is used to enter a new task status for all selected task assignments
requiring change.
The user-defined task status. Entry is validated against the Table File US - User Defined WO Task
Status.
2009 Mincom
150
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Complete Work Order

The Complete Work Order dialog box enables you to record completion information for a Work
Order.
Tabs
Completion
Job Codes
Completion tab
The fields on this tab are described below:

Date Completed
Enter the date when work related to this Work Order was completed or select from the drop-down list.
If this Work Order has a number of tasks or operations not recorded as closed, they are updated with
this date.
Time Completed
The time when work related to this Work Order was completed.
Completed By
Enter or right-click, search and select the ID of the employee who completed the Work Order. Entry is
mandatory if Date Completed is entered.
Completed Code
Enter the completion code that signifies the status of completion of the Work Order or select from the
drop-down list.
Entry is validated against Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status using the arrow button.
Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC table file.
Only codes that are specified as valid completion codes will be accepted.
Out of Service Date
Enter the date when the equipment relating to this Work Order was taken out of service. For purposes
of equipment history, this date takes precedence over the date completed to register the cumulative
operating statistics of the plant at the time the work was done.
When this date is later than the Date Completed, a warning message displays: Warning Date out of
Service is after Date Completed.
Paper History Kept
Select this option to indicate that the paper history of a job is kept for later review.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
151
Component Code
If an item of equipment is entered, select the code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the work
performed.
Entry is validated against the Table File CO - Component Code.
The adjacent field displays the description of the code.
The system checks if this is a valid component for the item of equipment by examining its component
profile. If no specific profile is located, but a group identifier is defined for the equipment, the
component profile of the group identifier is selected. If no profile is located, you can enter any valid
component code.
Entry is only allowed if an equipment number or reference has been entered.
Component Modifier Code
Enter the component modifier code used to further define the location specified by the component
code. Entry is only valid when a component code has been used. Entry is only valid in conjunction
with a component code. Entry is validated against the Table File MO Modifier Code. The adjacent
field displays the description of the code.
Note: Click the

icon to display the Dialog Box - EGI Profile Search to search for component
and modifier codes.
Job Codes tab

Job Codes
Enter the codes required to classify the job. Each entry is validated against the W0 - W9 Table File.
Ellipse enables entry of up to 10 codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes.
The use of these codes is user-defined, and can include such things as:
Failure Codes
Part Defect Codes
Work Classification Codes.
The name of each code (i.e., its use) is user-specified in Table File XX and appears on the window.
Certain codes are mandatory if that particular code on Table File XX is defined as This field is
mandatory.
Refer to the General Module for details about maintaining entries on Table File XX.
2009 Mincom
152
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Complete WO Task

The Complete WO Task dialog box enables you to record completion information for a Work Order
task.
Date Completed
The date when work related to this Work Order Task was completed.
Time Completed
The time when work related to this Work Order Task was completed.
Completed By
Enter or right-click, search and select the ID of the employee who completed the Work Order Task.
Entry is mandatory if Date Completed is entered.
Completed Code
Enter the completion code or select from the drop-down list.

Entry is validated against Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status. Entry is also validated
against the associated value on the SC table file
Only codes that are specified as valid completion codes are accepted
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
153
Dialog Box - Copy from Existing Work

Order
The Copy from Existing Work Order dialog box enables you to enter the number of the existing Work
Order and use this as a template to create a new Work Order.
Copy Work Order
Enter or right-click and search for the Work Order you want to copy.
2009 Mincom
154
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Standard

Job
The Copy from Parent Standard Job dialog box enables you to enter the number of the existing Parent
Standard Job and use this a reference to create a new Parent Work Order.
Copy Parent Standard Job
Enter or right-click, search and select the Parent Standard job you want to copy.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
155
Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Work Order

The Copy from Parent Work Order dialog box enables you to enter the number of the existing Parent
Work Order and use this a reference to create a new Parent Work Order.
Copy Parent Work Order
Enter the Parent Work Order you want to copy.
2009 Mincom
156
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Copy from Standard Job

In the Copy from Standard Job dialog box you can create a new Job Estimate from a Standard Job.
Standard Job
Enter or right-click and search for the identifying number of the Standard Job that you want to copy.
District Code
Select the District Code that the Standard Job belongs to from the drop-down list. The login district
will default.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
157
Dialog Box - Copy Text to Work Order

This dialog box displays if the Do Not Ask On Create (Default to values above) option is not
selected on the Options dialog box.
This option is used to define the preference when extended description is to be copied from the
standard job or work request to a work order.
SELECT TEXT LOCATIONS TO BE INCLUDED INTO EXTENDED TEXT
Copy Standard Job Text (If Present)
Select this option to copy the extended description, if present, from the standard job.
Copy Work Request Text (If Present)
Select this option to copy the extended description, if present, from the work request.
2009 Mincom
158
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Defer Work Order

The Defer Work Order dialog box enables you to record deferral information for a Work Order.
Date Deferred
Enter the date when work related to this Work Order was deferred or select from the drop-down list.
Time Deferred
Enter the time when work related to this Work Order was deferred.
Deferred By
Enter or right-click, search and select the ID of the employee who deferred the Work Order. Entry is
mandatory if Date Deferred is entered.
Deferred Code
Enter the code that signifies the status of deferral of the Work Order or select from the drop-down list.
Entry is validated against Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status using the arrow button.
Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC table file.
Only codes that are specified as valid deferral codes will be accepted. Entry is mandatory if Date
Deferred is entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
159
Dialog Box - Finalise Work Order or

Subsystem
The Finalise Work Order or Subsystem dialog box enables you to finalise costs.
Final Costs
Select this option to finalise all subsystem costs for this Work Order.
Note: If you select Final Costs option all Finalise SubSystems options are also selected.
FINALISE SUBSYSTEMS
Supply
Select this option to finalise the Supply subsystem.

Accounts Payable
Select this option to finalise the Accounts Payable subsystem.

Select this option to finalise the Production Statistics subsystem.

Payroll
Select this option to finalise the Payroll subsystem.

Labour Costing
Select this option to finalise the Labour Costing subsystem.

Journal Holding
Select this option to finalise the Journal Holding subsystem.

Accounts Receivable
Select this option to finalise the Accounts Receivable subsystem.

General Ledger
Select this option to finalise the General Ledger subsystem.
2009 Mincom
160
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Finish Assignment

The finish assignment dialog box is used to enter the actual finish date and actual finish time the work
order task is completed.
Actual Finish Date
Enter the actual finish date the work order task is to be completed.
Actual Finish Time
Enter the actual finish time the work order task is to be completed.
Status.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
161
Dialog Box - Job Instructions

In the Job Instructions window you can view or enter standard text in the entry field that displays.
Text Box
Enter descriptive information relating to the Job Instructions.
2009 Mincom
162
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Modify User Status

In the Modify User Status dialog box you can select User Status from the list of codes displayed.
User Status
Select the User Status from the drop-down list.

The codes which display are user defined and are contained in the WS table file.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
163
Dialog Box - New Requisition

In the New Requisition dialog box you can begin the Requisition process by selecting a requisition
type and allocating a requisition number. Alternatively, you can allow Mincom Ellipse to
automatically allocate a requisition number.
Issue Requisition Number
Enter the requisition number or leave this field blank to allow Ellipse to automatically assign a
requisition number based on the type of requisition being created.
The issue requisition number entered must not already exist.
Purchase Requisition Number
Enter the requisition number or leave this field blank to allow Ellipse to automatically assign a
requisition number based on the type of requisition being created.
The purchase requisition number selected must not already exist.
REQUISITION TYPE
A selection in this field group is mandatory. Select the type of requisition you want created for this
work order requirement.
Normal
Select this option if a normal requisition is required. A normal requisition is used when the item is in
stock and is issued from the warehouse.
Loan
Select this option if a loan requisition is required. A loan requisition is used when the material being
requisitioned is returned after the job is finished.
Purchase
Select this option if a purchase requisition is required. A purchase requisition is used when the
materials need to be purchased directly from a supplier as not to deplete stock, or if the item is not
normally held in the warehouse.
Credit
Select this option if a credit requisition is required. A credit requisition is used when unused material
is returned to the Warehouse and the Work Order is credited for the cost.
2009 Mincom
164
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Options (MSQ620)

Use this screen to maintain options for:
selecting different views
displaying messages
the timeout period
the title bar display
the polling period
auto-save settings and auto-close settings
the appearance of font, colour, and toolbar icons
for specific applications
Standard options are available in all Mincom Ellipse applications, however, an application can offer
additional options for one or more application-specific operations. For example, in the Notice
Manager application, the Options dialog box provides an additional tab that contains preferences for
sending notice reports. Application-specific preferences are described in the help for the application.
There are two sets of standard options displayed for Mincom Ellipse applications. The search or detail
screens display different options from the list, information and select screens.
Tabs
Views
Messages
Timeout
Settings
Appearance
Work Order Defaults
Create
Views tab
Use this tab to select which screen view displays for the search facility.
STARTUP VIEWS
Search View
Select this option to start the application in Search view. The search screen displays when you open
the application.
The search screen available in Mincom Ellipse ObjectGUI applications provides a comprehensive
search system for locating records stored in the Mincom Ellipse database. For example, when you
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
165
want to modify a record you can use the search window to find the record. After the record displays in
the search window you can open it to view the details.
The search screen is also frequently available from a field. You can use the search screen to search and
select an entry for a field.
Detail View
Select this option to start the application in Detail view. The Detail screen displays when you open the
application. The Detail screen is the primary window in an ObjectGUI application for:
displaying and maintaining an existing object
creating a new object
You can create, review and modify objects from the detail screen.
DETAIL VIEWS
Reuse Window for each Detail View
Select this option if you want to reuse the current detail view for each subsequent detail view. For
example, if you have an employee record displayed in a detail window and you open a second record,
the details of the first record are replaced by the second record. You only have one detail window open
and it displays details of the second record.
New Window for each Detail View
Select this option if you want to use a new screen for each detail view. Selecting this option means that
you can have details of more than one object displayed. For example, if you are viewing details of one
employee record and open another record, the second record opens in a different Detail
screen. Therefore, you have two detail screens open and they display details of different employees.
SEARCH VIEWS
Apply Defaults on New Search
Select this option to apply the defaults selected when conducting a new search.
Open details view when only one match found
Select this option to open the detail search screen when one search result is returned.
Messages tab
Use this tab to select the type of messages to display and whether these messages display
automatically at start up.
Show Messages at Startup
Select this option to display messages automatically when you start certain Mincom Ellipse
applications. These messages provide brief overviews of the accessed application.
You can choose to hide these messages directly from the Dialog Box - Startup Message for
<Program Name> by selecting the Hide Startup Messages in the Future option.
2009 Mincom
166
Work Orders - 3620
Show TP Messages
Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display transaction processing messages from the host
machine as they occur. These are messages produced by the back-end, indicating processes occurring
and errors encountered, and generally display in dialog boxes.
Show Broadcast Message
Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display broadcast messages from the Host Machine as
they occur.
These are messages sent by the Administrator to all users. They advise of system problems, closures,
updates or the need for users to log off for a period of time.
Timeout tab

Timeout Period
This field displays the Mincom Ellipse timeout period. Mincom Ellipse will wait for a reply from a
program for this length of time before returning a timeout error.
Settings tab

AUTOSAVE
Save Settings on Form Close
Select this option to automatically save the Mincom Desktop size and position when the application is
closed.
Appearance tab

USE APPEARANCE
Use Appearance
Enter the default appearance for Mincom Ellipse from the drop-down list. Available options are:
Default XP
Default Classic
Work Order Defaults tab

STANDARD JOB
Standard Job
Select the standard job option and enter the number of the standard job.
TYPES
Select this option to enter a maintenance type or work order type for the work order.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
167
Maintenance Type
Enter the maintenance type code for the work order.

Work Order Type
Enter the work order type code for the work order.
Work Group
Enter the work group relating to the work order.

Automatically Create Single Task
Select this option if you want a single task to be created for a work order. The standard job option will
override this selection.
Create tab

CREATE FROM WORK REQUEST
In this field group, the Copy from Standard Job and Work Request Text options the work order will
contain both the extended descriptions.
Copy Standard Job Text (If Present)
Select this option to copy the extended description, if present, from the standard job.
Copy Work Request Text (If Present)
Select this option to copy the extended description, if present, from the work request.
Do Not Ask On Create (Default to values above)
Select this option to automatically copy standard job or work request text when you create a work
order from a work request.
If not selected, a message Copy Text to Work Order displays where you are required to select the
text options to be copied for each work order created.
2009 Mincom
168
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Print GIS Map

This dialog box is used to print or save a Geographical Works Management (GIS) map.
OUTPUT MODE
Bitmap
Select this option to save the GIS map.

If this option is selected, all the fields in the Bitmap File field group must be completed.
Print Options
Select this option to print the GIS map.

BITMAP FILE
The fields in this group are active only if the Bitmap option is selected.
Filename
Enter a name for the map file.

File Type
Enter the type of file the map is to be saved as.

Entries in this field are validated against the Table File DOET - Document Electronic Type.
Directory
Enter or select the drive and directory to save the map in.
Link to Document System
Select this option to create a new document in the Document Management module. If this option is
selected, all the fields in the Document Management field group must be completed.
DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT
The fields in this group are active only if the Link to Document System option is selected.
Doc Prefix
(Document Prefix)
Enter a prefix for the document number.
Doc Name
(Document Name)
Enter a name for the map document.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
169
Doc Type
(Document Type)
Enter the document type.
Entries in this field are validated against the Table File DO - Document Types.
2009 Mincom
170
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Print Work Order Job Cards

Use this dialog box to print work order job cards.
Printer
The default printer of the user where the job cards are to print. Select another printer ID from the dropdown list, if required.
The description of the printer also displays.
Email
The email address of the employee.

This field defaults from the Assigned to employee on the work order. If the assignee has no default
address the logged in users default email address defaults and if this user has no default this field is
left blank.
Fax
The fax number of the employee. This default defaults from the assigned to employee on the work
order. If the assignee has no default fax number the logged in users default fax number defaults and if
this user has no default this field is left blank.
Select the fax option to change the fax number, if required.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
171
Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress

The Record Work in Progress dialog box enables you to enter the number or percent of work
completed to date for a Work Order.
Units Complete
A number from 1 to 9999999.99 indicating the number of units of work completed to date.
Percent Complete
The percentage of units completed to date, for example 50 for 50%.
2009 Mincom
172
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Requirements (Work Orders)

The Work Order Requirements dialog box enables you to record Material, Equipment and Resource
requirements for a Work Order.
Work Order
This field displays the work order number.

District Code
This field displays the district for the work order raised.
Work Order Desc.
This field displays the description of the work order.

Tabs
Materials
Details
Costs
Equipment
Details
Costs
Resources
Details
Costs
Materials tab
In the Materials tab you can review material requirements for a work order.
Material requirements are recorded in the Details and Costs tabs. The information recorded in these
two tabs display in the summary grid.
Refer to the Details and Costs tab for a description of this information.
Details tab
When recording a materials requirement for a work order item the Details tab is used to store details
of a required item(s). The item information you record displays in the summary grid on the Materials
tab.
MATERIAL TYPE
Select the material type option that you want to record details of an item, either catalogued or noncatalogued.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
173
Catalogued
Select this option if the material type of the item is held on the Ellipse catalogue.
If catalogued is the selected option, the following fields are available:
Stock Code
Part Number
Mnemonic
Non Catalogued
Select this option if the material type of the item is not held on the Ellipse catalogue.
If non-catalogued is the selected option, the following three fields are available:
Part Number
Mnemonic
Description
The Stock Code field is not available with the non catalogued option.
Stock Code
Enter the stock code of the material required for the selected work order item and operation type. If the
stock code is unknown, right-click and search. The item of material required is identified by a unique
stock code assigned by Ellipse.
This field is available when Catalogued is the selected material type option.
Qty Requisitioned
(Quantity Requisitioned)
The quantity to be requisitioned.
Part Number
Enter the part number of the material required for the selected work order item and operation type. If
the item required is not catalogued, it does not have a stock code. The part number is used in
conjunction with the mnemonic to identify the material required.
Mnemonic
Select the mnemonic required for the material from the drop-down list.
Description
Enter a description of the part required for the selected work order item.
Contestable
Indicates if the item is contestable. Government regulations could require competitive prices to be
sought. Multiple prices can be sought and compared. Normally, the lowest priced option is selected at
the time of requisitioning.
2009 Mincom
174
Work Orders - 3620
Costs tab
When recording a materials requirement, this tab provides for recording the costs of the item(s)
specified on the Details tab. The costing information recorded displays in the summary grid on the
Materials tab.
PRICE
COSTING METHOD
When you select a costing method option, specific fields are available for you to enter details.
System Rate
Select this option to select the system rate costing method. This option relies on the costing
information being available in the system. When this option is selected, the Rate Amount and Fixed
Amount fields are not available. The total price is calculated from the quantity recorded and the
system rates.
Manual Rate
Select this option to select the manual costing method. When this option is selected the Qty Rqd,
UOM and Item Price fields are available for entry. The total is automatically calculated from the
entries in these fields.
Fixed Amount
Select this option to select the fixed amount costing method. The fixed amount indicates that the
estimated costs are fixed at a certain rate regardless of the other criteria set on the Costs tab.
When this option is selected the Qty Reqd, UOM and Fixed Amount fields are available for
entry. The total of a fixed amount is calculated directly from the Fixed Amount field.
The Qty Reqd and UOM is not factored into the total.
Item Price
Enter the item price if the manual rate is selected as the costing method.
If the system rate is selected as the costing method, the entry for this field is generated by the system.
The item price displays on the Materials tab in the summary grid.
Fixed Amount
Enter a fixed amount, if the system rate is selected as the costing method.
If the system rate is selected as the costing method, the entry for the Item Price field is generated by
the system.
The fixed amount displays on the Materials tab in the summary grid.
Contractor Supplied
The contractor supplied option is selected if a contractor has been created on a compatible unit that is
being included in a job estimate.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
175
QTY
Qty Reqd
Enter the required quantity of the item specified on the Materials tab. Specification of this quantity
requires an entry in the UOM field.
This field defaults in the summary grid on the Materials tab.
UOM
(Unit of Measure)
Enter the unit of measure (UOM) for the Qty Reqd field entry. If the material item listed is
catalogued, then the UOM must match the catalogue item entry.
This field is automatically populated with the catalogued items UOM by entering the Stock Code on
the Details tab and then clicking the Show button.
This field defaults in the summary grid on the Materials tab.
Qty
(Quantity)
This field displays the quantity entered in the Qty Reqd field.
Price
This field displays the item price entered in the Item Price field if either the system rate or manual
rate costing methods are selected.
This field will not display if the fixed amount costing method is selected.
Total
This field displays the total calculated by the system from the Qty and Price fields, only if the System
Rate or Manual Rate costing methods are selected.
If the Fixed Amount costing method is selected, this field defaults from the Fixed Amount field.
Equipment tab
In the Equipment tab you can create and review equipment requirements for a work order. A
summary grid contains the information recorded on the Details and Costs tabs.
Refer to the Details and Costs tabs for a description of this information.
Details tab
When recording an equipment requirement for a work order item, the Details tab is used to store
details of a required item(s). The item information recorded displays in the summary grid on the
Equipment tab.
Equipment Type
Select an equipment type from the drop-down list. The equipment type is used during the planning
process to match available items from the equipment register belonging to the same type.
2009 Mincom
176
Work Orders - 3620
The equipment type defaults in the Equipment tab grid.

Contestable
Indicates if the item is contestable. Government regulations could require competitive prices to be
sought. Multiple prices can be sought and compared. Normally, the lowest priced option is selected at
the time of requisitioning.
Condition Type
Select a condition type from the drop-down list. The condition type is primarily for requirements
information. Conditions are used in the job estimating application to weight equipment and resource
requirement costs.
The equipment type defaults in the Equipment tab grid.
Note: The WRKC - Work Condition (Equip Type or Resc Code/Cond Type) associated values are
used to apply the multiplying factors to the requirements. This table must be configured prior to
applying the condition type factors.
Costs tab
When recording an equipment requirement, this tab provides for recording the costs of the item(s)
Equipment tab.
PRICE
COSTING METHOD
System Rate
Select this option to choose the System Rate costing method.

The system rate option relies on the costing information being available in the system. When this
option is selected the Qty Reqd, Fleet Size and UOM fields are available for entry. The entry for the
Rate Amount field is generated from the Table File EF Equipment Factor (District Code/Equipment
Type/UOM). The total is automatically generated by the information in the three fields.
Manual Rate
Select this option to select the manual costing method. When this option is selected the Qty Rqd,
UOM and Item Price fields are available for entry. The total is automatically calculated from the
entries in these fields.
Fixed Amount
Select this option to select the fixed amount costing method. The fixed amount indicates that the
estimated costs are fixed at a certain rate regardless of the other criteria set on the Costs tab.
When this option is selected the Qty Reqd, UOM and Fixed Amount fields are available for
entry. The total of a fixed amount is calculated directly from the Fixed Amount field.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
177
Rate Amount
Enter the rate amount if the manual rate is selected as the costing method. The rate amount is the cost
of hiring or using items of equipment for the job.
If the system rate is selected as the costing method, the entry for the Rate Amount field is generated by
the system if an equipment hire rate is available for the equipment type selected.
Fixed Amount
Enter the total cost for this equipment line item requirement regardless of the Quantity Reqd and
Fleet Size entered.
This field is only available if the fixed amount option is selected as the costing method.
Contractor Supplied
QTY
Qty Reqd
(Quantity Required)
Enter the required quantity of the item specified on the Equipment tab. If you enter a quantity, you
also need to enter a unit of measure in the UOM field.
This field defaults in the summary grid on the Equipment tab.
Fleet Size
Enter the fleet size, if required. If left blank, this field defaults to one. The fleet size is the number of
items of the selected equipment making up a fleet. This field is for information only and is not
included in the total cost calculation.
This field defaults in the summary grid on the Equipment tab.
UOM
(Unit Of Measure)
Enter the unit of measure (UOM) for the Qty Reqd field entry. This field defaults in the summary grid
on the Equipment tab.
Qty
(Quantity)
This field displays the quantity entered in the Qty Reqd field.
Price
This field displays the price from the Rate Amount field if either the system rate or manual rate
costing methods are selected.
This field does not display if the fixed amount costing method is selected.
2009 Mincom
178
Work Orders - 3620
Total
Resources tab
In the Resources tab you can review resource requirements for a work order. Resource requirements
assist the planner in assessing which employee is qualified to do the job based on their skills,
qualifications and other accomplishments.
A summary grid contains the information recorded on the Details and Costs tabs.
Refer to the Details and Costs tabs for a description of this information.
Details tab
When recording a resource requirement for a work order item the Details tab is used to store details of
a required item(s). The item information you record displays in the summary grid on the Resources
tab.
Resource Class
Select the resource class from the drop-down list. The resource class selected dictates which list of
resource codes are available.
This field defaults in the summary grid on the Resources tab.
Resource Code
Select the resource code from the drop-down list. The resource code is validated against the resource
class. If the resource code is not known, right-click and search using MSQ732 for a resource code.
Condition Type
Select the Condition Type from the drop-down list.

Entry is validated against the Table File COND - Condition Type.
Costs tab
When recording a resource requirement, this tab provides for recording the costs of the item(s)
Resources tab.
PRICE
COSTING METHOD
System Rate
Select this option to select the system rate costing method.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
179
The system rate option relies on the costing information available in the system. When this option is
selected the Gross Hrs Reqd and Crew Size fields are available for entry. The entry for the Rate
Amount field is generated from the system. The total is automatically generated from the entries in the
three fields.
Manual Rate
Select this option to select the manual rate costing method.

When this option is selected the Rate Amount, Gross Hrs Reqd and Crew Size fields are available for
entry. The total is automatically calculated from the entries in the three fields.
Fixed Amount
Select this option to select the fixed amount costing method.

When this option is selected the Fixed Amount, Gross Hrs Reqd and Crew Size fields are available for
entry. An entry must be recorded in each field.
PRICE
Rate Amount
Enter the Rate Amount if the Manual Rate is selected as the Costing Method. If the System Rate is
selected as the Costing Method, the entry for the Rate Amount field is generated by Ellipse.
Fixed Amount
Enter the fixed amount. This field is only available if Fixed Amount is selected as the Costing Method.
Contractor Supplied
Use Default District Labour Rates
Select this option to use the default labour rates for the resource requirement cost.
QTY
Gross Hrs Reqd
(Gross Hours Required)

Enter the gross hours required for this resource type. This includes all hours required from this
resource type whether it be from one or many employees.
Crew Size
Enter the crew size. The crew size is primarily for information only. It will not factor in to the Total
cost calculation.
For example, if two resources of one type are required for 20 hours each, then the gross hours required
are recorded as 40.
2009 Mincom
180
Work Orders - 3620

Qty
(Quantity)
This field defaults from the Qty Reqd field.
Price
This field displays the item price entered in the Item Price field if either the system rate or manual
rate costing methods are selected.
This field will not display if the fixed amount costing method is selected.
Total
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
181
Dialog Box - Reschedule

The Reschedule dialog box is used to modify the assigned start and finish dates and times of task
assignments.
Assigned Start Date
Enter the start date assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task.
Enter the start time assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task.
Enter the finish date assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task.
Enter the finish time assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task.
Status.
2009 Mincom
182
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks

The Reschedule Tasks dialog box enables you to reschedule planned dates for work order tasks.
ASSIGNMENT GROUP
Individual
Enter the Employee ID you want to assign to the selected Work Order task for rescheduling.
Crew
Enter the crew you want to assign to the selected work order task for rescheduling.
Work Group
Enter the work group you want to assign to the task for rescheduling.
PLANNED DATES
Start Date
Enter the date when the job is rescheduled to start.

Start Time
Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to start.

Finish Date
Enter the date the job is rescheduled to finish.

This date must be later than the start date.
Finish Time
Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to finish.

Ignore Warning
Select this option if you do not want a warning message to display.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
183
Dialog Box - Reschedule Work Orders

The Reschedule Work Orders dialog box enables you to reschedule planned dates for work orders.
Individual
Enter the Employee ID of the person who will be assigned to the work order to reschedule.
Work Group
Enter the work group to assign to the job you want to reschedule.
Crew

Start Date
Enter the new start date for the job.

Start Time
Enter the new start time for the job.

Finish Date
Enter the new end date for the job. This date must be later than the start date.
Finish Time
Enter the new finish time for the job.

Ignore Warnings
Select this option if you do not want warning messages to display.
2009 Mincom
184
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements

In the Select Material Requirements dialog box you can select material requirements from a Work
Order to create a Requisition. This dialog box has general information at the top that needs to be
completed and then has a grid that shows all of the material requirements from the Work Order that
can be included on this requisition.
The Materials Requirements need to have been created and saved on the Work Order before they will
appear on the Select Material Requirements dialog box.
Material requirements that have already been requisitioned will not display in the dialog box.
Work Order
The Work Order number that will be charged for the cost of materials on this requisition.
Qty to Requisition
(Quantity to Requisition)
This field displays quantity of the material item that will be included on this requisition and defaults
from the material requirements.
Original Warehouse
Enter the Warehouse that the material will be issued from. The Warehouse will initially default to the
districts home Warehouse. This can be changed by selecting the drop-down menu and selecting a new
warehouse.
This field is validated against the Table File WH - Warehouse Identification.
Inventory Category
If the materials should be selected from a specific category, select the category of the inventory to be
requisitioned.
This field is validated against the Table File IG - Inventory Category.
Date Required By
The date the materials are required.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
185
Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements

for a Task
In the Select Material Requirements for a Task dialog box you can select material requirements from a
Work Order Task to create a Requisition. This dialog box has general information at the top that needs
to be completed and then has a grid that shows all of the material requirements from the Work Order
Task that can be included on this requisition.
The Materials Requirements need to have been created and saved on the Work Order Task before they
will appear on the Select Material Requirements dialog box.
Material requirements that have already been requisitioned will not appear in the dialog box.
Work Order
The Work Order number that will be charged for the cost of materials on this requisition.
WO Task
The Work Order Task number that will be charged for the cost of materials on this requisition.
Qty to Requisition
This number will default from the material requirements. It is the quantity of the material item that
will be included on this requisition
Original Warehouse
The Warehouse that the material will be issued from. The Warehouse will initially default to the
district's home Warehouse. This can be changed by selecting the drop-down menu and selecting a new
warehouse.
Validated on the WH table file.
Inventory Category
If the materials should be selected from a specific category, select the category of the inventory to be
requisitioned.
Date Required By
The date the materials are required.
2009 Mincom
186
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Schedule Work

The Schedule Work dialog box is a very important area as it enables you to schedule work and
therefore define how the work will be handled in the planning process. Work can be scheduled based
on a date or statistic, or by linking to a known shutdown.
This dialog box is used to schedule work in the Job Dispatch module, activity Schedule Single or
Multiple Work Orders.
SCHEDULE TYPE
Select one of the following options:

Shutdown Details
Select this option to schedule work using shutdown data. A shutdown schedule must already exist for
this Work Order to be included. If a shutdown is used for scheduling, the Work Order displays as part
of the Shutdown work to be done.
Plan Dates
Select this option to schedule work using planned dates. If planned dates are used, the Work Order is
added to the schedule based on calendar days and time. This allows the Work Order to be brought
automatically into a forecasted schedule when the plan date falls within the forecast range and
the MSB700 - forecast batch process is run.
Statistics
Select this option to schedule work using statistics.

Statistics are used if the work is to be undertaken as a result of a piece of equipment reaching an
operational milestone.
SHUTDOWN DETAIL
Number
Enter the shutdown number. The shutdown record must already exist in order to plan a Work Order.
The Shutdown number indicates the Planned Start date for the Work Order.
Type
Select the shutdown type from the drop-down list.

The type defaults from the shutdown record if the shutdown number is entered.
Equipment Reference
Enter the reference number of the equipment to be shut down

PLAN DATES
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
187
Plan Start Date
Enter the date when the job is to start.

When the Work Order is associated with a Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice, the Work Order Planned
Start Date defaults as the Work Planned Start Date on the notice.
Plan Start Time
Enter the time when the job is to start.

Start Time defaults as the Work Planned Start Time on the notice.
Plan Finish Date
Enter the date the job is planned to finish. This date must be later than the planned start date.
Finish Date defaults as the Work Planned Finish Date on the notice.
Plan Finish Time
Enter the time when the job is to finish.

Finish Time defaults as the Work Planned Finish Time on the notice.
Crew
If the Work Order has already been assigned to a Crew, the Crew Code displays in this field.
Crew Description
The Crew name defaults from the Crew Code.

Must Start Indicator
Select this option if it is a requirement for the job to start on the plan start date, otherwise an error or
warning message displays when the date is changed.
Error
Select this option if you want an error message to display whenever there is a change to the plan start
date.
This field is only available if the Must Start Indicator is selected
Warning
Select this option if you want a warning message to display whenever there is a change to the plan
start date.
This field is only available if the Must Start Indicator is selected
STATISTIC
2009 Mincom
188
Work Orders - 3620
Type
Select the operating statistic type of the equipment when the job should start from the drop-down list
(for example; hrs, km).
Entry is validated against the Table File SS - Operating Statistic Type.
Value
Enter the operating statistic value of the equipment when the job should start for example 10 000 (hrs)
and 50 000 (km).
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
189
Dialog Box - Schedule WO Task

The Schedule Work Order Task dialog box enables you to schedule the selected work order task by
entering planned start, finish and duration details.
Planned Start Date
The date when the job is to start.

Planned Start Time
The time when the job is to start.

Planned Finish Date
The date when the job is planned to finish.

This date must be later than the planned start date.
If the Manual Effort field value is modified this date is recalculated.
Planned Finish Time
The time when the job is planned to finish.

If the Manual Effort field value is modified the finish time is recalculated.
Offset Days
The number of days by which the planned date of this task should lag behind the work order header
planned start date.
Est. Duration Hours
The estimated duration time in hours.

When the Manual Effort field value is modified a new estimated duration is recalculated based on the
new manual effort. The new estimated duration is calculated from the original estimated duration
divided by the original manual effort, then multiplied by the results of the new manual effort value.
Man Effort
(Manual Effort)
The total effort allocated to a work order task to increase/decrease the estimated duration hours.
When the manual effort value is modified the Estimated Duration Hours field is recalculated based
on the new manual effort value. The new estimated duration hours is calculated from the original
estimated duration divided by the original manual effort, then multiplied by the results of the new
manual effort value.
The Planned Finish Date and Planned Finish Time fields are also recalculated.
2009 Mincom
190
Work Orders - 3620
Select this option when you want the job to start on the planned start date, otherwise an error or
warning message displays when the date is changed.
Warning
Select this option if you want a warning message to display for you to confirm changes made to the
planned start date on the Work Order task before saving.
Error
Select this option if you want an error message that prevents changes to the planned start date on the
Work Order task before saving.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
191
Dialog Box - Start Assignment

This dialog box allows you to enter an actual start date, start time and assign a status to the task
assignment.
Actual Start Date
Enter the actual start date the crew or individual is assigned to a work order task.
Actual Start Time
Enter the actual start time the crew or individual was assigned to a work order task. You can use the
calendar to select the date.
Status.
2009 Mincom
192
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Options (Tools Options)

Use this screen to maintain options for:
selecting different views
displaying messages
the timeout period
the title bar display
the polling period
auto-save settings and auto-close settings
the appearance of font, colour, and toolbar icons
for specific applications
Standard options are available in all Mincom Ellipse applications, however, an application can offer
additional options for one or more application-specific operations. For example, in the Notice
Manager application, the Options dialog box provides an additional tab that contains preferences for
sending notice reports. Application-specific preferences are described in the help for the application.
There are two sets of standard options displayed for Mincom Ellipse applications. The search or detail
screens display different options from the list, information and select screens.
Tabs
Views
Messages
Timeout
Settings
Appearance
Display
Filter
Views tab
Use this tab to select which screen view displays for the search facility.
STARTUP VIEWS
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
193
DETAIL VIEWS
MULTIPE SHIFT DETAIL VIEW
SINGLE SHIFT DETAIL VIEWS
SEARCH VIEWS
2009 Mincom
194
Work Orders - 3620
Apply Defaults on New Search
Select this option to apply the defaults selected when conducting a new search.
Open details view when only one match found
Select this option to open the detail search screen when one search result is returned.
Messages tab
Use this tab to select the type of messages to display and whether these messages display
automatically at start up.
Show Messages at Startup
Select this option to display messages automatically when you start certain Mincom Ellipse
applications. These messages provide brief overviews of the accessed application.
You can choose to hide these messages directly from the Dialog Box - Startup Message for
<Program Name> by selecting the Hide Startup Messages in the Future option.
Show TP Messages
Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display transaction processing messages from the host
machine as they occur. These are messages produced by the back-end, indicating processes occurring
and errors encountered, and generally display in dialog boxes.
Show Broadcast Messages
Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display broadcast messages from the Host Machine as
they occur.
These are messages sent by the Administrator to all users. They advise of system problems, closures,
updates or the need for users to log off for a period of time.
Timeout tab
Use this tab to set the timeout period for an individual application or a group of applications. The
timeout period is the time an application will wait for a response when a request for data is sent to the
server. Once the timeout period is up, the program displays the Dialog Box - Timeout.
Timeout Period (Secs.)
This field displays the Mincom Ellipse timeout period. Mincom Ellipse will wait for a reply from a
program for this length of time before returning a timeout error.
Settings tab
Use this tab to set auto-save and auto-close behaviour for Mincom Ellipse. You can also select which
default search displays.
AUTOSAVE
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
195
Save Settings On Form Close
Select this option to automatically save the Mincom Desktop size and position when the application is
closed.
AUTOCLOSE
Close Launched Applications on Mincom Desktop Exit
Select this option to automatically close any launched applications when you exit the Mincom
Desktop.
DEFAULT SEARCH
These options only displays if you have the Maintenance module installed.
Work Order Task
Select this option if you want the work order task search screen to display. If not selected, the work
order search screen defaults.
Retrieve All
Select this option if you want Mincom Ellipse to return all search results, not the current block of 20.
GIS OPTIONS
Bring GIS To Front
Select this option to display the Geographical Information System (GIS) map in front of other
programs when locating GIS features. This option only displays for the following programs if the
Geospatial Works Management module is installed:
MSQ600 - Equipment
MSQ620 - Work Orders
MSQ541 - Work Requests
Appearance tab
The fields displayed on this tab depend on various applications.

Display tab
Use this tab to set the appearance of screen elements for Mincom Ellipse. Select either Colour, Font
Colour, Revert or Default buttons.
A colour chart displays where you can select the colour.
SHIFT TYPE COLOR
A list of all possible shift types and their corresponding shift type codes display in the drop-down list.
Each entry displays using the same colours used in the Employee Availability Search screen. To
modify the colours for a specific shift type, select the shift type from the drop-down list and use the
Colour, Font Colour, Revert or Reset Default buttons.
2009 Mincom
196
Work Orders - 3620
Colour button
This button displays a dialog box allowing selection of the background colour to be used when
displaying shifts of the specified shift type.
Font Colour
This button displays a dialog box allowing the selection of the text colour to be used when displaying
shifts of the specified shift type.
Revert
Reverts the colour back to the default colour.

Default
This button sets the background and text colours of all shift types to their original values immediately
prior to displaying the Options dialog box. All colour changes made since the time the Options dialog
display are discarded.
DISPLAY DETAIL
Select the type of shift detail option you want displayed on the summary screen. The options selected
display on the MSQEAV - Search for Employee Availability screen or MSQRAV - Search for
Resource Availability.
Shift Description
Selection of this options results in the description of the shift for the employee for each day to display
on the Employee Availability Search screen. This is the default.
Work Code
Selection of this option results in work code for the employee for each day to display on the Employee
Availability Search screen.
Shift Class
Select this option to Indicate which watch or shift the activity is refering to, for example A watch
indicates a day shift, B watch indicates a night shift.
Resource Type
Selection of this option results in the primary resource type for the employee to display for each day
on the Employee Availability Search screen.
Shift Time
Selection of this option results in the duration of the shift in hours and minutes for the employee to
display for each day on the Employee Availability Search screen.
SORT ORDER
This field group of options determines the order used for the display of availability.
Employee Name
Selection of this option results in the details on the Employee Availability Search screen to display in
employee last name order. This is the default.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
197
Resource Type
Employee Primary Resource Type order.
Employee
employee ID order.
Work Location/Job Class
job class level order.
Filter tab
This tab enables you to specify the shifts and resource types to display on the Employee Availability
Search screen.
SHOW SHIFT
The fields in this field group vary and when selected displays those options for filtering the shift view.
Available Days
This option controls the shift types displayed corresponding to available days.
If the Available Days option is selected all available shift types display.
If the Available Days option is not selected each of the individual shift types control whether that shift
type displays. The default is all Available shift types display.
Unavailable Days
This option controls the shift types displayed corresponding to unavailable days.
If the Unavailable Days option is selected all Unavailable shift types display.
If the Unavailable Days option is not selected each of the individual shift types control whether that
shift type displays. The default is all Unavailable shift types display.
SHOW RESOURCE
The show all resources option controls the resource types displayed.
If the Show All Resources option is selected all resource types display.
If the Show All Resources option is not selected, you can select which resource types are to display
from the list box. The default is all resource types to display.
2009 Mincom
198
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Update Estimates

The Update Estimates dialog box is used to specify preferences for estimated or calculated costs for
each requirement type.
RESOURCE
Use Calculated Costs
If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected, the total resource cost appears in the Calculated
Cost field and the total resource hours appear in the Calculated Hours field. The amounts displayed
are calculated from the requirements for resources recorded against the Work Order.
If the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared, costs are not calculated from recorded requirements.
You can enter estimated cost for resources in the Estimated Cost field and the estimated hours for
resources in the Estimated Hours field.
Estimated Costs
Enter an estimated cost for resources if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared.
Estimated Hours
Enter estimated hours for resources if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared.
Calculated Costs
The total resource cost will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected.
Calculated Hours
The total resource hours will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected.
MATERIAL
If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected, the total cost for materials appears in the
Calculated Cost field. The amount displayed is calculated from the requirements for materials
recorded against the Work Order.
You can enter estimated cost for materials in the Estimated Cost field. Estimated Cost Enter an
estimated cost for materials if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared.
Estimated Cost
Enter an estimated cost for materials if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared.
New Topic
The total material cost will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected.
OTHER
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
199
If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected, the total cost for other items appears in the
Calculated Cost field.
If the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared, you can enter estimated other costs in the
Estimated Cost field.
Estimated Cost
Enter an estimated cost for other items if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared.
Calculated Cost
The total cost for other items will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected.
EQUIPMENT
If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected, the total cost for equipment appears in the
Calculated Cost field. The amount displayed is calculated from the requirements for equipment
recorded against the Work Order.
You can enter estimated cost for equipment in the Estimated Cost field.
Estimated Cost
Enter an estimated cost for equipment if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared.
Calculated Cost
The total cost for equipment will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected.
TOTAL
Use Estimated Total Cost
If the Use Estimated Total Cost check box is cleared, a total cost for all requirements is calculated
and displayed in the Total field.
If the Use Estimated Total Cost check box is selected, the Total field is available and you can type
the total estimated cost. (The entry is not calculated from recorded requirements).
Total
The Use Estimated Total Cost check box will determine if a total cost for all requirements is
calculated and displayed in this field or if a total estimated cost can be manually entered.
2009 Mincom
200
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - WO Task Assign To

The WO Task Assign To dialog box enables you to assign a Work Order Task to an individual and/or
a crew.
Assign to Individual Work Group
Right-click, search and select the Employee ID of the person be assigned to the work order task.
Crew

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
201
Dialog Box - Work Order Assign To

The Work Order Assign To dialog box enables you to assign a Work Order to an individual and/or a
crew.
Right-click, search and select the Employee ID of the person assigned to the work order.
Crew

2009 Mincom
202
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Work Order Durations

The Work Order Durations dialog box enables you to either specify the actual and estimated duration
of a Work Order or record delay reasons and durations during the course of the job.
Actual Job Duration
Enter the total time taken to complete the job. This time does not have to balance with the sum of
detailed durations. If left blank, it is set to the total. Changing or adding details updates this total if the
total of duration details already on file agrees with the total initially displayed. To reset this total to the
total of details, delete the total.
Enter the time estimated to complete the job.

Calculate Duration Hours
This is a read only option. It is activated by selecting the Calculate Duration Hours option under the
Work Order Durations menu option.
By selecting this check box the system calculates the duration hours of the job. It also calculates the
estimated duration for the work order header based on the estimated duration hours entered on the
work order task. When selected, it controls the wrapping of the scheduling dates on the work order
header, that is, the work order planned start date/time defaults to the earliest task planned start
date/time and the work order planned finish date/time defaults to the latest planned start date/time.
Date
Enter the date the delay reason was entered.

Code
Enter the delay or duration code or select from the drop-down list.
This entry is validated on the Table File JI - Job Duration Code.
Description
This field displays the table file description of the code.

Start Time
The start time for the job duration. If a start time is entered than a finish time must be entered in the
Finish Time field.
If this field is left blank, an entry must be made in the Hours field. If you complete the Hours field,
the start and finish times are calculated from the duration time entered.
Finish Time
The finish time for the job duration. If a finish time is entered than a start time must be entered in the
Start Time field.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
203
If this field is left blank, an entry must be made in the Hours field. If you complete the Hours field,
the start and finish times are calculated from the duration time entered.
Hours
Enter the duration of the job in hours.

If this field is left blank, entries must be made in both the Start Time and Finish Time fields.
If you complete the Start Time and Finish Time fields, the hours are calculated.
2009 Mincom
204
Work Orders - 3620
Dialog Box - Work Order Task

The Work Order Task dialog box enables you to record detailed information for each Work Order
Task that defines the overall Work Order.
Work Order No

or Prefix
This field displays the prefix of the work order.

The prefix is created as part of the configuration on the district control file.
Task No (primary field)
Enter a Task Number to identify the Task. The Task Number is used to sequence the Tasks in the
order they are to be scheduled.
This field is mandatory.
District Code
The district code associated with the work order.

Work Order Desc
(Work Order Description)

Enter a description of the work order.
Note: Click New Description to add extended text to the work order description.
WO
(Detail view Work Order option)

This option is used to display work order details. Ellipse displays work order details for the work order
the displayed task belongs.
Task
(Detail view Task option)

Select this option to display task details.
Ellipse displays task details for the task selected on the Tasks tab.
Tabs
Job Information
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Planning
Scheduling
Costs
Completion
APL
205
Job Information
The Job Information tab enables you to review or modify important information for each Work Order
Task. This tab provides basic safety information as well as an opportunity to record more detailed Job
Instructions in standard text format.
Task Description
The description of the work order task.

Work Group
Enter a work group or right-click to search for the Work Group responsible for the Task. If a Work
Group is selected that is different then the Work Group on the Work Order Header, then this is called a
foreign task.
During the scheduling process for the Work Order Header, the task is committed and scheduled for the
foreign task Work Group.
Safety Instruction
Enter a Safety Instruction code that describes the safety procedure to be performed in completing the
job. The Safety Instruction is validated on the Table File SI - Safety Instructions and can be selected
from the drop-down list. Each task is assigned its own Safety Instruction/Completion Instruction Code
combination.
Job Description
Enter a description for the Task. The description displays on the standard Work Order Task Job Card
and should be clear enough to briefly describe the work to be done.
Location From
Enter a location or right-click to search for the Location where the Task will originate. This
information is very important if work is being scheduled based on an assignees geographical start and
finish locations.
Location To
Enter a location or right-click to search for the Location where the Task finishes. This information is
very important if work is being scheduled based on an assignees geographical start and finish
locations.
Highest Task
The number of tasks allocated to the work order.

2009 Mincom
206
Work Orders - 3620
APTW Exists for Task
Select this option if an application for a permit to work is created for this task.
Note: Click Job Instructions to enter free text information about the job.
Planning tab
The Planning tab enables you to review or modify planning details for a Work Order Task. This tab
controls the relationship between tasks and defines the expected workload that is required to complete
the job. This tab also records who the job task has been assigned to if an individual or a crew has been
designated as the responsible party.
This field displays a work group or individual to whom the task is assigned for further workload
planning.
You can update this field by clicking Assign To.
Crew
This field displays a work group or a specific crew to whom the task is assigned within the work group
for further workload planning.
You can update this field by clicking Assign To.
Unit of Work
Enter the unit of work for each task.

Entry is validated against the Table File UW - Unit of Work.
Units Required
Enter either the units of work required to complete tasks requiring fabrication or processing, or the
number of work items required to complete the Task.
The Units of Work Completed and the % Complete display for information.
If the number of units required is modified, the % Complete is recalculated.
Scheduled Units/Days
Enter the rate of processing in units of work per day.

Linked to Previous Task
Select this option if the planned start date of this task is linked to the previous task.
Scheduling tab
The Scheduling tab holds important information that is used during the scheduling process. This tab
displays the Tasks start and finish date details.
PLAN DATES
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
207
Plan Start Date
This field displays the date when this task is scheduled to start. This date is used as the operation date
in scheduling the work for the work group.
This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button in the task screen.
Plan Start Time
The time when the task is scheduled to start.

This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button.
Plan Finish Date
The date when the task is expected to be completed.

Plan Finish Time
The time when the task is expected to be completed.

Offset Days
This field displays the number of days when the planned date of this task should lag behind the work
order header planned start date.
DURATIONS
Estimated Duration Hours
This field displays the estimated duration of the task in hours.

This field is review only and can be updated using the Schedule button in the task screen.
EARLIEST DATES
The Work Order can be subject to critical path scheduling to determine the earliest start date and
earliest finish date of the job, and the number of days for which the job can remain unactioned,
without impacting related Tasks.
Earliest Start Date
The earliest date when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling.
Earliest Start Time
The earliest time when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling.
Earliest Finish Date
The earliest date when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling.
2009 Mincom
208
Work Orders - 3620
Earliest Finish Time
The earliest time when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling.
Float Days
The number of days for which the job can remain un-actioned, without impacting related tasks.
This field relates to the Earliest Start Date and Earliest Finish Date fields.
Costs tab
The Cost tab displays the estimated material, equipment, resource and other costs for the
task. Requirements and their associated costs are recorded in the Requirements screen.
ESTIMATED
Resource Hours
This field displays the estimated number of resources in hours required to complete the job.
Resource Cost
This field displays the estimated resource costs required to complete the job.
Material Cost
This field displays the estimated material costs required to complete the job.
Equipment Cost
This field displays the estimated equipment costs required to complete the job.
Other Cost
This field displays other cost estimates required to complete the job.
Total Cost
This field displays the total estimated costs based on adding the estimated costs or entering a fixed
estimate required to complete the job.
Contractor Costs
Select this option if the Work Order Task has contractor costs recorded. Contractor costs are available
if a Compatible Unit and Job Estimate was used to create the Work Order and its tasks.
MACHINE HOURS
Estimated
Enter the estimated number of hours taken to complete the job if this task was assigned to a machine
centre.
Actual
This field displays the actual number of hours accrued during this job if this task is assigned to a
machine centre.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
209
Completion tab
The Completion tab enables you to record completion requirements and review completion details for
a Work Order task.
Complete By
This field displays the person who completed the task.

You can update this field after clicking Complete Task.
Completed Date
This field displays the date the task was completed.

Completed Time
This field displays the time the task was completed.

Completed Code
This field displays the code describing the circumstances when this task was completed or cancelled.
Completion codes are held on the Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status.
Units Complete
This field displays the units of work already completed for this task.
Percent Complete
This field displays the percentage of this task already completed.

COMPLETION
Instruction
Select the completion instruction from the drop-down list. The completion instruction indicates the
procedure to be performed at the end of a job. These instructions are the reverse of the safety
instructions. Completion instruction codes are held on the Table File CI - Completion Instructions.
Text Code
Select the completion text code from the drop-down list. The completion text code is used to define
the text that prints on the right-hand side of the maintenance schedule. This provides a prompt for
maintenance personnel to complete the information about the job, that is relevant.
APL tab
The APL tab enables you to review or modify Application Parts Listing (APL) information for the
task. APLs can be recorded if a standard bill of materials is available that suits the needs of this task.
2009 Mincom
210
Work Orders - 3620

Select this option and enter the APL Equipment Reference if the APL is to be held against an
individual piece of equipment.
Equipment Group ID
Select this option and enter the equipment group ID if the APL is to be held against an EGI.
Material Requirement Exist
If this option is selected, then material requirements have been set on this task. This prevents the
creation of an APL requirement. If an APL is required instead of individual material requirements, the
material requirements are deleted from the task before the APL is set up.
Component Code
Enter a component code or right-click to search for a component code if the APL is held against a
specific equipment sub-assembly.
The value --- can be used instead of spaces.
Modifier Code
Enter a modifier code or right-click to search for a modifier code to designate a particular component
code.
Entry is validated against the Table File MO - Modifier Code.
Sequence Number
Enter the sequence number to designate individual APLs.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
211
MSE620 - My Work Orders

The My Work Orders screen provides facilities for searching for and reviewing details of work orders
assigned to the current user or optionally to a nominated work group. This screen is available from the
menu or the Ellipse home page.
Options
The method used to search for work orders. 'My WorkOrders' is selected by default.
Options are:
My WorkOrders
Displays all work orders assigned to the currently logged-on user.
Retrieve For WorkGroup
Displays all work orders assigned to the specified work group. A

status can also be specified.
SEARCH CRITERIA
Work Orders Assigned to Employee
This search field displays the employee id of the currently logged-on user. It cannot be edited.
This field is not displayed for the Retrieve for WorkGroup option.
Current District
This search field displays the district name and code of the current district. It cannot be edited.
This field is only displayed for the Retrieve for WorkGroup option.
Status
The status of the work orders. Valid status options are:

Any Status
Displays all work orders regardless of status matching the search criteria.
(Default)
Authorised
Displays only authorised work orders matching the search criteria.
Completed
Displays only completed work orders matching the search criteria.
Open
Displays only open work orders matching the search criteria.
Work Group
The work group assigned to the work order.

2009 Mincom
212
Work Orders - 3620
MSE620 - Work Orders Search

The Work Order search screen provides facilities for searching for a work order from another
application, eg MSE857 - Employee Weekly Labour Costing, based on a specific search method and
criteria. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid for selection and return
to the calling application.
Options
Enter one of the following options:

Search
Select this option to search using the entered criteria.
Clear
Select this option to clear the entered search criteria.
Search via Ref Codes Select this option to search for Work Orders by Reference Codes.
Search Method
The method used to search for work orders.

Options are:
All
Displays all work orders matching the entries made in the search
fields.
Exact Match
Displays only the matching work order. A Work Order number must
be entered for this option.
Starts From
Displays all work orders starting from the specified characters which
match the entered search criteria.
Starts With
Displays all work orders which start with the specified characters and
Work Order
(Work Order Number)

The work order number. This must be specified for an Exact Match.
PRIMARY SEARCH CRITERIA
At least one primary search criteria must be specified for all search types except an Exact Match.
Select the type of equipment search required. Valid equipment search types are:
All
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
213
Equipment or Plant Number
Equipment Class
Equipment Group Identifier
Equipment Location
Productive Unit
Equipment Status
Equipment List Ind
Indicates whether both lists and sub-lists are to be searched for the selected Equipment List.
Valid options are:
List Items Only
Retrieves all work orders for the selected Equipment List.
Lists and SubLists
Retrieves all work orders for the selected Equipment List and any sub-lists of
that list.
Equipment Reference
The equipment number for the work order.

Equipment List Type
(Equipment List Type)

An equipment list is an ordered list of items. Each item has an individual piece of equipment or a
subordinate equipment list. Entry is validated against the Table File LI - Equipment List Type.
Work Group
The work group assigned to the work order.

Search Method
Select whether to search for All or only Open work orders.

Crew
The crew the Work Order has been assigned to. This is validated against the Table File CREW - Work
Group Crew.
Parent Work Order
The parent work order number to list work orders belonging to that parent work order. The parent
work order is validated against the Parent Work Order file MSF625.
Originator ID
The employee ID of the person who created the work order.
2009 Mincom
214
Work Orders - 3620
Project Number
The Project Number to search for all work orders belonging to a project.
Entry is validated against the Project file MSF660.
This field displays only if the Project Control module (3660) is installed.
Account Code
The account code or cost centre for the work order.

Assigned To
The employee ID of the person assigned to the work order.

System Status
The system status code of the work orders. Valid system status codes are:
All
Displays all work orders regardless of status matching the search criteria.
(Default)
Open
Displays only open work orders matching the search criteria.
Authorised
Displays only authorised work orders matching the search criteria.
Closed
Displays only closed work orders matching the search criteria.
Uncompleted
Displays only uncompleted work orders matching the search criteria.
Estimate Number
The job estimate number.

Request ID
The work request ID to display all work orders created from this work request.
Shutdown Number
The shutdown number of the work orders to be selected.

All Districts
Indicates if the search should include work orders for all districts. If not selected, the search will be
restricted to work orders for the current district.
SECONDARY SEARCH CRITERIA
Component Code
A code indicating the subassembly. The description displays to the right.

Component Mod Code
(Component Modifier Code)

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
215
A code indicating the subassembly if there is more than one subassembly. The description displays to
the right.
Originator Priority
The originator's priority defaults from the work request priority if the work order was generated as a
result of a work request. This is a number from 1 to 99, inclusive. 1 is the highest priority. The values
and their meanings are held on the Table File PY - Work Order Priority Code. The adjacent field
displays the originator's priority description.
Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they are recalculated.
Planners Priority
The priority set by the person who planned the job. This entry is validated against the Table File PY Work Order Priority Code. Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they
are recalculated.
If no priority is entered the tolerance calculation is not performed, however the Required Start Date
and Required by Date fields are updated with the Plan Start Date and Plan Finish Date field dates.
Standard Job No
The number and description of the standard job template used to automatically create a work order.
and District
The district in which the standard job number exists.

Work Order Type
The work order type to be searched. Entry is validated against WO Table File.
Maintenance Type
The code for the type of maintenance being performed. Examples of maintenance types are
breakdown, safety, preventative.
Failure Part
The identity of the part causing the failure.

Location
The location referenced on the work order.

Shutdown Type
The code for the shutdown type.

Entry in this field is validated against Table File SD - Plant Shutdown Type.
User Status
This code is used to define the status of a work order or task. The User Work Order Status is
changed manually on the work order as the job progresses through different stages of work.
2009 Mincom
216
Work Orders - 3620
Raised Date From
The earliest date the work order was created on.

Raised Date To
The latest date the work order was created on.

Planned Start Date From
The earliest date the work order was planned to commence on.
Planned Start Date To
The latest date the work order was planned to commence on.
Segment From
The first continuous asset segment in the current range associated with an item of equipment.
Segment To
The final continuous asset segment in the current range associated with an item of equipment.
JOB CODES

The Job Codes shown on this tab use ten table files (W0-W9), and are user-defined in both table name
and table entry:
W0 - Work Order Classification 0
through to:
The name of each code can be altered by changing the code description on Table File XX - Table File
Control Record. A table file XX entry can also be used to indicate which Work Order Job codes are
mandatory. The table code descriptions that display on the screen are configured by the customer as
part of the work order system setup.
Note: The following work order class field names will differ, depending on the code description name
defined in the tables.
The table files can be set up so they do not display on the screen.
REFERENCE CODES
Reference Code
The reference codes for work orders as agreed during implementation. A list of valid codes for work
orders displays.
Reference Code Value
The value of the reference code for the work order.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
217
2009 Mincom
218
Work Orders - 3620
MSM001A - Maintain System Control File

Use this menu screen to access and maintain System and District Control files. The System and
District Control files contain information used to control functionality within Ellipse. The options
selected determine the functionality available through the activation of modules and entry of data.
Hint: Changing fields within the System or District Control files after implementation could lead to
corrupted files or program failure. If in doubt as to the impact of changing any control settings, refer to
your Mincom Support consultant.
Option

Maintain Systems
Control Information
Use this option to update information held on the System Control file at a
global level. Use this option for activating modules and maintaining
other system control settings.
Define a New District
Use this option to create a new legal entity or charter. This creates
information on the District Control file.
Modify District Control

Information
Use this option to modify existing districts' specific control file settings.
Modify Bank Accounts

for a District
Use this option to create, modify, or delete bank account information held
on the District Control file.
Modify Account Code for Use this option to update Ellipse with account codes required to prepare
a District
balanced entries for various accounting transactions within the integrated
system. For example, Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable.

Modify Accounting
Periods for a District
Use this option to maintain past, present, and future accounting periods
for a given district. This option can also be used to review a financial
year to ensure month end has occurred in all periods for a given financial
year.
Modify Current Period

Information
Use this option to identify or update the current accounting periods for
modules used within districts.
Modify Program Printer

Allocations
Use this option to enter default printing parameters for batch reports
produced by Ellipse. This would usually only be for certain control type
reports or updates.
Modify District Address

Details
Use this option to create or maintain each district's postal address,

telephone numbers, and relevant government IDs.
Modify HR details for a

District
Use this option to define default Human Resources and payroll

information for a district.
Suspend District
Use this option to deactivate district attributes for a district that is no

longer required, or for a newly created district that is yet to have its data
loaded.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
219
Reactivate District
Use this option to reactivate a district for use after the district has been
defined and the details have been added.
Close District
Use this option to close a district if no longer required.
Maintain Warehouse
Control Information
Use this option to maintain information relating to the setup of a

warehouse within Ellipse.
Maintain Site Control

Information
Use this option to maintain information relating to the setup of a site that
uses the Permits to Work module.
District

This field identifies an accounting entity, business unit, military base or geographical location that
performs business in its own right. A district can be thought of as a separate set of books.
This field is mandatory for all options, except options Maintain Systems Control Information and
Maintain Warehouse Control Information.
Copy District
This field displays only when selecting option Define a New District. Enter the district from which
information is to be copied for the new district.
The following information does not copy from the old district, and must be entered directly:
Bank Accounts
Account Codes
Accounting Periods
Current Periods
Program Printers
District Address Details
Where a Copy From district derives the Chart of Accounts or the Expense Elements from another
district, the default expense elements copied during the Copy District function will be correct and
available for use within the Copy To district.
Where a Copy From district controls its own Chart of Accounts or Expense Elements, the default
expense elements copied during the Copy District function will not exist within the Copy To district.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that all default expense elements are valid within the Copy
To district prior to processing.
Warehouse
This field refers to a major stock storage location within a district. This field is required when option
Maintain Warehouse Control Information is selected.
2009 Mincom
220
Work Orders - 3620
Site Code
This field refers to a site for the purposes of setup details for the Permit to Work module. The entry in
this field is validated against the Table File PSIT - Site Code. This field is required when the option
Maintain Site Control Information is selected.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
221
MSM001C - Maintain Systems Control File

(Cont.)
Use this screen to update the Systems Control file with details relating to the Materials and
Maintenance modules.
Tabs
Catalogue
Accounts Payable
Suppliers
Customers
Equipment
Scheduling/WO's
Journal Holding
Chart of Accounts
General Ledger
Catalogue tab
Enter numbers from one to seven to indicate the order in which Cataloguing screens are to appear. A
zero indicates that the screen is to be bypassed.
Item Classification
Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen.
This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Item Classification screen.
A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed.
Part Number Information
Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen.
This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Part Number Information
screen. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed.
Colloquial Name
This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Colloquial Name
Information screen.
Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen. A zero indicates the screen
will be bypassed.
2009 Mincom
222
Work Orders - 3620
APL Fitment
(Application Part List Fitment)

This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Application Part List
screen.
will be bypassed.
Cross Reference
This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Cross Reference screen.
will be bypassed.
Item Commentary
This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Item Commentary screen.
will be bypassed.
This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Extended Description
screen.
will be bypassed.
Last Stock Number Allocated
This is the last stock number allocated by Ellipse.

If the catalogue numbers are not manually assigned, the last stock number allocated is incremented
automatically when Ellipse generates the next number.
First Search Screen
On catalogue inquiry screens, an A displays a screen that allows you to enter additional descriptive
filters to further narrow your search criteria. A B in this field takes you directly to the matching item
screen.
Last INC Number Allocated
(Last Item Name Code Number Allocated)

This is the last item name code number allocated. This is a counter which increments automatically.
Extended INC
Allows for a nine character Item Name Code to be used for cataloging purposes. An extra field will be
displayed for the INC to allow an additional four characters to be included.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
223
Last List Number
This field applies to lists in the Foreign Military Sales module only. This is the last list number
allocated by Ellipse. If a list number is not assigned by the user when creating a list, Ellipse assigns a
number automatically and increments this counter.
Accounts Payable tab
The following information can be created or modified only if the Accounts Payable module is
installed. The fields in this group are described below:
Receipt of Services
The Ellipse Accounts Payable system includes the capability to record the receipt of service
orders. This indicator activates or de-activates the facility. Once the decision has been made to activate
or de-activate, it is recommended that the indicator is not amended.
Enter Y if service purchase orders must be received into Ellipse (similar to a goods purchase order)
before an invoice for that service can be paid.
Enter N if purchase orders do not have to be received into Ellipse before an invoice for those service
orders may be paid.
Check Subsystem for Service Items
This field has become obsolete and does not impact the system regardless of whether the value entered
is Y or N.
Validate PO Number for Field Release
(Validate Purchase Order Number for Field Release)

Enter Y if the Purchase Order Number is to be validated when users load invoices for field release
purchase orders.
Next MSB261 Run Number
Enter the number that identifies the next run of the Generate Automatic Invoices report (MSB261).
Upon initial setup of the system, this number should be 1, and Ellipse automatically increments the
number each time MSB261 is generated.
Enter the number that identifies the next run of the Invoice Approval report (MSB265).
Enter the number that identifies the next run of the Invoice Batch Match report (MSB267).
2009 Mincom
224
Work Orders - 3620
Suppliers tab

Last Supplier Number Allocated
Enter the last Supplier Code allocated by Ellipse.

Upon initial setup of the system, this number should be 0.
2 Step Authorisation Process
Enter Y if separate steps for modifying and approving supplier changes are required.
Activating this facility may impact on the use of new or recently modified suppliers. Such
modifications must be authorised (in a separate process) before the supplier can be used in a purchase
order.
Supplier Class Heading A
Market Share Classification 1 for commodity types.

This field is used to record the percentage of market share held by the supplier for each commodity
type. For example, the percentage of the domestic market for each of the commodities supplied.
Supplier Class Heading B
Market Share Classification 2 for commodity types.

This field is used to record the percentage of market share held by the supplier for each commodity
type. For example, the percentage of the domestic market for each of the commodities supplied.
Customers tab

Last Customer Number Allocated
Enter the last customer code allocated by Ellipse.

Upon initial setup of the system, this number should be 0.
2 Step Authorisation Process
Enter Y if separate steps for modifying and approving customer changes are required.
Activating this facility can impact on the use of new or recently modified customers. Such
modifications must be authorised (in a separate process) before the customer can be used in a sale
transaction.
Equipment tab

Last Equipment Number Allocated
Enter the last equipment number allocated by Ellipse. This is a system-incremented field but may be
entered or changed to force Ellipse to start at a new, pre-defined number.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
225
Structured Plant Numbers
Enter Y if a Structured Plant Number is required. This field must be Y if a continuous asset delimiter
has been entered.
Continuous Asset Delimiter
Enter a symbol to be used as a delimiter between continuous asset segments when entering or
displaying and validating an equipment reference field. If this field is not entered, the system will not
allow the use of continuous asset segments. The Structured Plant Nos flag must be Y if a delimiter is
used. When setting the delimiter, keep in mind that it should be visible and easily recognised. Fullstop, comma or apostrophe (. , ') characters may be overlooked, whereas ampersand, slash and asterisk
(& / *) are more visible.
OPERATING STATISTICS
Day Average
Enter the default value for the Day Average which will be used in the calculation of daily averages for
equipment items.
The Day Average value determines the number of days over which the daily average is to be
calculated for an item of equipment. The routine finds the most recent operating statistic record for the
item. The routine then calculates a date at which to begin searching for the next record by subtracting
the Day Average from the date of the most recent record.
The daily average derived against an equipment item's Operating Statistic Profile from the recorded
statistics is used to predict future maintenance requirements.
This default value will be used only when a Day Average value has not been specified in the
Operating Statistics Profile of an equipment item or its Equipment Group Identifier (EGI).
Maximum Days
Enter the default value for the Maximum Days which will be used in the calculation of daily averages
for equipment items.
The Maximum Days value determines whether operating statistics are sufficiently up-to-date to allow
a daily average to be calculated for the item. The routine finds the most recent operating statistics
record for the item. It then checks that this record is eligible, by comparing the date of the record
against today's date, less the Maximum Days value.
This default value is used only when a Maximum Days value has not been specified in the Operating
Statistics Profile of an equipment item or its Equipment Group Identifier (EGI).
Scheduling/WO's tab

Last Maintenance Schedule Run Number
Enter the last maintenance schedule run number allocated. On system startup, this should be set to
zero. The scheduling mechanism maintains this field from then on, whenever the Forecast program
(MSB700) is run.
Default Warranty WO Type
(Default Warranty Work Order Type)

2009 Mincom
226
Work Orders - 3620
Enter the work order type to be applied to work orders during work order creation when Ellipse
detects that a warranty condition is in force. Entry is validated against the Table File WO - Work
Order Types. If this field is left blank, the work order type applied to the Work Order is not
overwritten.
Journal Holding tab

Cash Accounting
Enter Y to enable cash accounting across all districts within Ellipse.

Account Delimiter
Enter an appropriate character for delimiting cost code segments. Permissible characters include:
Full-stop (.)
Comma (,)
Dash (-)
Slash (/)
Semi Colon (;)
Ampersand (&)
Colon (:)
An example of using account delimiters is when entering a journal entry or a non-order invoice entry,
for an account connected to a project or work order (with a cost centre attached, not a General Ledger
code). Enter the delimiter, the expense element, the work order or project number and press ENTER.
Ellipse generates the full account code.
Last Inter-District Journal Number Allocated
Enter the last inter-district journal number allocated by Ellipse. After system initialisation, Ellipse
automatically increments this value when inter-district journals are allocated.
Inter-District Journal Prefix
Enter the prefix used on inter-district journals.

Order Transactions
This field dictates the way unposted totals are updated against accounts as transactions are generated.
Enter Y if the number of transactions updating a particular control account is large, causing database
performance issues.
Enter Y if interdistrict transactions are used frequently and deadlocking is an issue.
Enter N if deadlocking within your system is not an issue.
This flag should only be changed when there are no active processes within Ellipse that generate
transactions.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
227
Chart of Accounts tab

Inter-District Table of Accounts Used
Enter Y if inter-district processing is subject to an inter-district table of accounts, whereby interdistrict accounting entries can be targeted to inter-district account codes, as defined by the account
code on the initiating accounting entry. For more information, refer to Maintaining Interdistrict
Processing.
Otherwise, inter-district accounting entries are recorded against the system-defined inter-district
account codes. This is the standard Ellipse functionality. For more information, refer to Maintaining
System Control Settings - System Activities.
Validate Control Accounts
Enter Y to validate control accounts.

Euro Currency Type
Enter the currency type code used for the European Monetary Unit. This currency type code must exist
on the Table File CU - Currency Type.
General Ledger tab
The following information can only be entered if the General Ledger module is installed. The fields in
this group are described below:
Subledger Delimiter
This is an optional field. Enter an appropriate character for delimiting subledger data entry wherever
entry of an account code and subledger data applies. Permissible characters are the same as for the cost
code segments delimiter. Permissible characters include:
Full-stop (.)
Comma (,)
Dash (-)
Slash (/)
Semi Colon (;)
Ampersand (&)
Colon (:)
An example of using the sub-ledger delimiter is:
General Ledger posting account is 11101504362
This account is linked to the sub-ledger of TE - Travel Expense Type of which a valid subledger
entry is HOTEL
The sub-ledger delimiter as set up in the System Control file is /
2009 Mincom
228
Work Orders - 3620
When processing an entry to this account code in Ellipse, the account and sub-ledger would be entered
as:
11101504362/TEHOTEL
Do not enter the same delimiter as one already defined for cost code segments (see Account
Delimiter).
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
229
MSM00AA - Modify Modules Installed

Use this screen to update the information held on the Table File MD - Modules Installed. All available
Ellipse modules are defined in the MD Table File. This screen enables users to define the modules
that are installed for their organisation.
MODULE
This field displays the numerical identifier for each Ellipse module. The modules are listed in
numerical order. A module is a group of programs with related functionality.
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the title of the Ellipse module.

INSTALLED
If the module is installed, Y displays. If the module is not installed, N displays. During the startup
process, you must identify the modules that are active by entering Y.
2009 Mincom
230
Work Orders - 3620
MSM00BA - District Control Information

Use this screen to create or modify information maintained on the control file for an individual
district. The screen is divided into general information about the district and sections with modulespecific fields. When the modules are not active, the associated control fields are not available.
District Name
Enter the name of the subsidiary company, branch, or accounting unit. Entry in this field is
mandatory.
Many customers include the Ellipse instance as part of each district name, for example, BUSINESS
UNIT XYZ - PRODUCTION.
Tabs
General
Suppliers
Forward Purchasing Agreements
Repairable Item Management
Fuel and Oil
Work Orders
Equipment Costing
Scheduling
Fixed Assets
Telex/Fax
Notices
General

Country Code
Enter the code indicating which country this district operates in. Entry is mandatory and is validated
against the Table File CR- Country Code.
The specified country code directly impacts on certain calculations carried out within the district.
Examples of this include Fixed Asset Revaluation and Value Added Tax (VAT) reporting within the
UK.
Date Format
Enter the code relating to the date format to be used in this district. Entry is not required if the district
will use the date format identified in the System Control file. Examples are:
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
231
DD/MM/YY (Australian format) For example, enter 31/12/10 for 31 December 2010.
DD-MM-YY (International format) For example, enter 31-12-10 for 31 December 2010.
DD/MMM/YY (Military format) For example, enter 31/DEC/10 for 31 December 2010.
MM/DD/YY (USA format) For example, enter 12/31/10 for 31 December 2010.
Time Difference
Enter the time difference between the time zone that this district operates in and that of the host
machine. For example, -14.00 would be entered if the district was in Atlanta, USA and the host
machine was based in Brisbane, Australia. If completed, this information must be entered in HH.MM
format, and can be a value between -23.59 and +23.59.
Entry in this field is optional.
Window Default Level
Enter the window default level to be applied when assigning default values and editing rules to screen
fields. These defaults can only be applied to MSM screens, not to MSQ screens:
0
Enter to indicate that screen defaults cannot be assigned.
Enter to indicate that a user ID must be used when assigning screen defaults.
Enter to indicate that screen defaults are to be assigned at the global level.
Enter to indicate that screen defaults can be assigned with a user ID or at the global level.
Banner Required
Enter Y for this facility to be enabled. Enter N for it to be unavailable. This indicates whether a report
identification banner can be specified when a report is requested.
Online Report Retention Days
Enter the number of days that online reports will be retained on file. This default can be overridden
when reviewing the report.
Multi-Warehouse
(Multiple Warehouses)
Enter one of the following values to identify whether or not this district operates multiple warehouses:
Y
Indicates that there is more than one warehouse in the district and that they are all to be included
in the re-ordering process.
Indicates that there is more than one warehouse in the district but not all of them are to be
included in the reordering process, and is used if vendor-held warehouses exist.
2009 Mincom
232
N
Work Orders - 3620
Indicates that the district operates a single warehouse, however, we suggest that you do not use
this value as it cannot be changed at a later stage to Y or E.
Warehouse
Enter the central or main warehouse for the district. It will appear as the default warehouse on many of
the warehousing and issue requisition screens. Entry is validated against the Table File WH Warehouse Identification.
Bypass Estab
(Bypass Establishment)
Enter Y to bypass Position Management (formerly called Establishment) module transactions or
authority checking in this district; otherwise, enter N. This field only has an effect if the Position
Management module is installed.
Establishment Commentary
This field is used if Diary (Notification) text messages are to be recorded and sent when an
establishment-generated (position management generated) transaction is acted on using the MSM877A
- Authorise Transactions screen. For example, to re-route, return, or authorise a given transaction.
Consumption Tax
Enter one of the following values:

Y
If consumption tax is to be used in this district. Enter Y to enable the consumption tax
throughout Ellipse modules (that is, in Purchasing, Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable
modules). Note for Australia and the United Kingdom, Ellipse consumption tax functionality is
only used for Accounts Receivable processing.
If consumption tax processing is for Accounts Receivable only. Enter R to allow the
consumption tax to be enabled for the Accounts Receivable module in isolation of the
Purchasing and Accounts Payable modules. This option is used For Australia GST and For
the UK VAT as the additional tax functionality in Ellipse is used to process consumption tax
calculations for Accounts Payable invoices.
Enter N if the Accounts Receivable module is not implemented. If N is entered, it will not
enable the consumption tax functionality.
As stated above, for Australian GST and UK VAT purposes, the Ellipse additional tax functionality is
to be used for Accounts Payable. However, the Ellipse consumption tax functionality is best suited for
Accounts Receivable; for clients in these countries, Consumption Tax should be set to R.
Consumption Tax Type
Enter the consumption tax type your organisation will be accruing. This will be the literal that Ellipse
displays on all screens where consumption tax fields exist.
Additional Tax
Enter Y if additional tax is to be used in this district. Valid values are Y and N. For example, for
Australian Goods and Services Tax (GST) in Accounts Payable, United Kingdom VAT, and possibly
for state taxes in the USA.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
233
Default Additional Tax Code
Enter a default additional tax for the district. Valid values are current tax codes stored in the Tax Code
System Definition file (maintained by MSO018 - Maintain Tax Code Definitions).
A default additional tax code can only be entered if the Additional Tax field is set to Y.
Where Additional Tax applies, the Additional Tax code from the Additional Tax Defaults fields on
MSM20DA - Supplier Business Information defaults. If there is no supplier Additional Tax codes in
these fields, the district default Additional Tax code defaults. In either case, the Additional Tax code
can be modified.
Sales Tax Applies
Enter Y if sales tax applies and N if sales tax does not apply.
In Australian districts, since GST is employed, this sales tax indicator should be set to N.
Accounting Periods per Annum
Enter the number of accounting periods used within the site ledger and in the costing mechanisms for
the year. You can have up to 14 accounting periods in a year. The accounting calendar is maintained
using the MSM00CC - Modify District Accounting Periods screen.
Password Expiry Days
Enter the maximum number of days allowed before Ellipse forces a change of passwords. Entering
zero disables password expiry.
Validate Bin Location
Enter Y to enforce the use of pre-established bin locations in the receiving, issuing or transfer
processes.
Suppliers tab

Performance Parameters (Days late in Ascending Sequence)
Ellipse automatically maintains statistics on the number of occasions when a supplier is late in
delivering materials orders. Four categories of late delivery are provided according to the number of
days overdue.
The following fields give the current stratification for days late for three of the categories, the fourth
category deliveries later than category 3.
Category 1
Enter the number of days late that apply to the least late classification for late delivery. For example,
if this field is set to 7, orders delivered one to seven days late increment the late delivery field for least
late.
Category 2
Enter the number of days late that apply to the second least late classification for late delivery.
2009 Mincom
234
Work Orders - 3620
Category 3
Enter the number of days late that apply to the third least late classification for late delivery.
Category 4 - Balance
This field displays the lead times greater than the third least late classification for late delivery
(Category 3).
Forward Purchasing Agreements tab

Quotation Prefix
Enter the prefix used on quotations.

Last Quote Number
Enter the last quotation number allocated by Ellipse.

Consolidate Quote Items
This field displays M to generate multiple quote numbers (default). Enter D for one quote number, if
required. Consolidates all items for quotation under the same quote number(D) or generates multiple
quote numbers (M).
Repairable Item Management tab

Repair Expense Element
Enter a valid expense element to use as a default on the debit of the cost of a repair on receipt.
Create Repair Request
Enter either I, T or R.
I
repair requests are created at issue time
repair requests are created at requisition time
repair requests are created at issue time
repair requests are created when acquitting the issue requisition at zero quantity and not
completing the requisition
Work Orders tab

Auto Authorisation
(Automatic Authorisation)
Enter Y to indicate that automatic authorisations of work orders will occur on creation. Leaving this
field blank indicates that work orders will remain open until they are manually authorised by a user
with the appropriate security.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
235
Reallocation Debit Expense Element
Enter a valid expense element to use as a default on the debit transaction of the work order reallocation
process.
Reallocation Credit Expense Element
Enter a valid expense element to use as a default on the credit transaction of the work order
reallocation process.
Equipment Costing tab

Last Archive Period
Enter the period last archived with respect to equipment costing, in the format MMYY.
Equipment Hire Retention Days
Enter the number of retention days to be used for equipment hire transactions. Entry is optional.
Fuel and Oil tab

Warehouse
Enter a default warehouse for fuel and oil issues. Entry is validated against the Table File WH Warehouse Identification.
Bin Location
Enter a default bin location for fuel and oil issues.

Default Transaction Type
Enter the default transaction type for fuel and oil issues. Entry is validated against the Table File IT Issue Transaction Type.
Scheduling tab

Last Shutdown Number
Enter the last shutdown number assigned by Ellipse.

Fixed Assets tab

Calculate Depreciation
Enter Y to calculate depreciation and post it to the Transaction file when running the Fixed Assets
Month End. Entry must be Y or N.
Note that if the value of this field is set to N, you will still need to execute the MSB685 - Fixed Assets
Month End report at the end of each period to roll over the Fixed Assets module into the next
accounting period. However, since this indicator is set to N, no depreciation amounts or General
Ledger transactions will be calculated.
2009 Mincom
236
Work Orders - 3620
Pro-Rate Calculation
Enter Y to pro-rate the depreciation calculation for assets according to the number of days in the
closing accounting period.
When calculating depreciation charges, Ellipse calculates the annual depreciation charge then the
charge for each period. If the Pro-Rate Calculation field is set to Y, the periodic charge is based on
the number of days in the accounting period that the depreciation is being calculated for. You cannot
enter Y unless the Calculate Depreciation field also contains Y.
Last Asset Number
Enter the last asset number assigned by Ellipse.

Secondary Currency Rptg
(Secondary Currency Reporting)

This field is mandatory when MSM00DA - Maintain District Control Information - Journal Holding
details has secondary currency enabled.
Enter Y to enable secondary currency fields for entry. Local and secondary currency values must be
entered throughout the Fixed Assets (3680) module. The exchange rates in MSM912A - Maintain
Foreign Currency Exchange Rates are not used.
An entry of N results in Ellipse automatically calculating the secondary currency values from the local
currency fixed asset values using MSM912A - Maintain Foreign Currency Exchange Rates.
Secondary currency fields are not available.
Last Count Sheet Number
Enter the last count sheet number assigned by Ellipse.

Telex/Fax tab

Telex Local Country Code
Enter the local country code to be used for telex transmissions.

This field is required if you are using telex functionality.
Retention Days
Enter the number of days for which telexes or faxes are to be retained before being deleted. After
submitted, telexes and faxes are stored in the Packet Switching file. This will be the default for all
programs that send telexes and faxes. When sending or re-sending manual telexes or faxes, the
retention days can be changed if the default is greater than zero.
For example, you can reduce the number of retention days to save space in the Packet Switching file,
or increase the retention days if you want to re-send the message at a later date.
Last Xmit ID: Prefix
(Last Transmit Identification: Prefix)

Enter a one-character, alphabetic prefix to be used when assigning transmission numbers. The last
transmitted ID prefix and number are used by Ellipse to assign transmission numbers to identify each
telex or fax transmission. When a telex or fax is produced, the system looks at these fields in the
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
237
District Control file, assigns the next sequential number as the transmission number, then updates this
field. You can reset these fields by modifying the current entries.
For example, if the last transmitted number is T00003 and you enter the prefix A and number 0, the
next fax submitted will be given the Transmission Number A00001.
Number
The last transmitted ID prefix and number are used by Ellipse to assign transmission numbers to
identify each telex or fax transmission. When a telex or fax is produced, the system looks at these
fields in the District Control file, assigns the next sequential number as the transmission number, then
updates this field.
Enter a number (up to five digits) from which to start assigning transmission numbers.
Fax Interface Type
Enter the type of fax interface to be used. Entry is validated against the Table File FI - Fax Interface
Type.
This field is required if you are using fax functionality.
Notices tab

Work Notice Required
Entry must be Y or N. If the field is left blank, Ellipse assumes a default of N.

This is a mandatory field if the Notifications module is installed. The Work Notice Required field
controls whether work notices are to be created for the nominated district.
Daily Whereabouts Notice Required
This is an optional field if the Notifications module is installed.

The Daily Whereabouts Notice Required field controls whether notices are to be created for the
nominated district. Entry is optional where Notifications are in use. Entry will be validated as Y or N.
If you leave the field blank, Ellipse assumes a default of N.
2009 Mincom
238
Work Orders - 3620
MSM00EA - District Control Information Maintain Work Order Prefix Information

This screen is one of a number of screens used to set up District Control information. Use this screen
to create or modify information maintained on the control file with regard to work order prefix
information to control automatic assignment to work orders.
District Name
This field displays the name of the district that is being maintained. Work order prefixes are District
specific so work order prefixes must be set up in each District if needed.
FOR USE WHEN NO PREFIX APPLIES
Parent Sequence Number
This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed parent work order. To
initialise, enter the sequence number as one number less than the next parent work order number to be
assigned.
Hint: The grid is for entering the details of prefixes you wish to apply to Work Orders.
Workorder Sequence Number
This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed work order. To
initialise, enter the sequence number as one number less than the next work order (subordinate)
number to be assigned.
Prefix
Enter the alphanumeric prefix to apply to the work order number. This is validated against the WO
table file. The first prefix line is not available because it is used to define the zero-suppression rules for
work orders that do not have prefixes.
Description
This field is available for work order prefixes only, therefore it is not available online.
Enter a description for the prefix.
The description should be clear enough to understand when the prefix should be used on a work order.
Zero Suppress
Enter Y to signify that leading zeroes on system-generated work order numbers are to be suppressed.
The first line defines the need for leading zeros on any work order that does not use prefixes. Each
additional line defines the zero suppression rules for each work order prefix.
Enter N if leading zeroes are required.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
239
Parent Seq No
This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed parent work order. To
initialise, enter the sequence number as one number less than the next parent work order number to be
assigned.
Workorder Seq No.
(Workorder Sequence Number)

This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed work order. To
initialise, enter the sequence number as one number less than the next work order (subordinate)
number to be assigned.
Act
(Action Code)
Enter a valid action code. The following actions are available, depending on the level of user access
and the modules installed:
D
Delete a Prefix Record. A prefix record can be deleted by overtyping it.
2009 Mincom
240
Work Orders - 3620
MSM097A - Review Standard Text

This screen is used to display textual information relating to various areas of Ellipse. For example:
Commentary attached to stock codes or suppliers
Narrative attached to purchase orders
Text for employee payroll details
Text for employee higher duties records
Text for recruitment records such as position vacancy details, vacancy status, non- employee
applicant details and applicant activity status
Text for training records such as training programs/ courses/ sessions and training history
Text for resource types
The fields that display depend on how the screen is accessed. For example, if the text commentary is
inventory instructions for a stock item, the stock code for that item displays.
Text Code
This field displays the two- character code that specifies the type of text.
Commentary Type
This field displays if a commentary type is required.

STANDARD TEXT
Text Heading
This field displays the text heading.

Line
This field displays the line number of the commentary displays.

Text
This field displays the text itself.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
241
MSM620A - Maintain Complete Work Order

Information
This screen is used to update Work Orders. A number of screens are available to create and maintain
work order information, most specific to a type of Work Order. This screen is a sub-menu for a range
of general maintenance screens which can update all information in the Work Order data set.
Options

Create a Work
Order/Task
Use this option to create a new work order and/or work order task. All fields
are available to enter data.
Modify All Work

Order Information
Use this option to open all work order fields for modification.
Modify Work Order

General Information
Use this option to modify work order general information. The general
information screen displays and only general information is available for
modification.
Modify Work Order

Use this option to modify work order planning information. The planning
Planning Information screen displays and only the planning information is available for
modification.
Modify Work Order
Code/ Completion
Information
Use this option to modify work order code and /or completion information.
The work order code/completion information screen displays and only work
order code completion information is available for modification
Maintain Equipment
Tracing for Work
Order
Use this option to maintain equipment tracing for a work order. The work
order tracing screen displays and only tracing information can be entered or
modified.
Modify Work Order

Use this option to modify work order duration information. The work order
Duration Information duration screen displays and only duration information can be modified.
Modify Work Order
Reallocation
Information
Use this option to modify work order reallocation information. The work
order reallocation screen displays and only reallocation information can be
modified.
Modify Work Order

Task Planning
Information
Use this option to modify work order task planning information. The work
order task planning screen displays and only work order task planning
information can be modified.
Modify Work order

Task Completion
Information
Use this option to modify work order task completion information. The work
order task completion screen displays and only work order task completion
information can be modified.
Delete a Work Order
Use this option to delete an existing work order. On confirmation all tasks for
the work order are also deleted.
2009 Mincom
242
Work Orders - 3620
Work Order Number
Enter a Work Order number.

Task Number
Enter a task number.

Prefix
Enter a prefix number if neither a Work Order or Task were entered in the Work Order or Task
Number fields.
COPY FROM
(create option only)

Standard Job
Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order.
Work Order
Enter a Work Order number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order.
Task Number
Enter a task number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order.

District
Enter the district code which identifies the district in which the copied work order exists.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
243
MSM621A - Review Work Order Information

This screen is a sub-menu. Use it to enter selection criteria to review work order.
You can enter an unlimited number of search parameters on this and the subsequent selection screen,
MSM621B - Review Work Order Information. The search parameters are mutually exclusive.
Option
Enter the Option for the action required. The review screen displayed depends on the option selected.
Work Order
The work order number.

For options 1 and 2, enter a complete Work Order Number. This field is mandatory for these options.
The work order must be on file.
For option 3, this field is optional. If user enter a number it must be incomplete if entered. The partial
work order must end with *. Only work orders that match all characters before the * are selected.
For the options to review work order costs, Calculate Estimates must be turned off for the Work
Order Number.
The Work Order Number must not be entered for any other options.
Work Order Task
Enter a numeric task number for the associated work order for option 2. If this field is left blank, a
summary of all tasks for the work order is displayed. If the task is entered, it must be on file.
Mincom Work Order Status
Enter one of the following codes to restrict the review to work orders with the specified status:
O
Open Unauthorised
Authorised and Open
Completed
Uncompleted (status O and A work orders)
User Work Order Status
Enter the user status attached to the work order to restrict the review to work orders with that status.
Entry is validated against the Table File WS Table File.
Enter the appropriate information.

2009 Mincom
244
Work Orders - 3620
The Equipment Search Type and Equipment Search Key fields are used together. The Equipment
Search Type field indicates the kind of equipment search, as follows:
E
A Continuous Asset segment range can be entered in conjunction with an Equipment or Plant
Number to restrict the search to Work Orders that refer to Continuous Asset segments falling
within the range specified in the search criteria
Equipment Class
Equipment List
Equipment Location
Productive Unit
Equipment Status
The search key is the appropriate identifier.

If one field is completed, the other must also completed.
Note: You can only enter equipment search type E for option 4.
List Type
Enter the list type of the list to be created. Entry is validated against Table File LI - Equipment List
Type. This field is mandatory if you entered an Equipment Type of L. An equipment list identifier
must be entered in the Equipment Search Key. The list type and identifier must exist as a valid
equipment list.
List Indicator
This field is mandatory if the user entered an Equipment Type of L.

Valid entries are:
L for retrieval of work order for equipment items of the entered list.
A for retrieval of work orders for all items of the entered list and its sub-lists.
Originator
Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the work order. Entry is validated against the
Table File RC - Responsibility Code or the Employee master file, for integrated Payroll users.
Account/Cost Centre
Enter the account code or cost centre to which the jobs requiring review are charged. This code is
validated in accordance with the standard costing validation mechanisms.
Parent Work Order
Enter the number to search for work orders belonging to a parent work order. The parent work order is
validated on the Parent Work Order file (MSF625).
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
245
Work Group
Enter or search for the work group to which work orders are currently assigned.
Entry in this field is validated against the Work Group master file MSF720.
This field is mandatory for option 4.
Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work orders are assigned.
Entry is validated against the Table File RC - Responsibility Code or the Employee master file, for
Raised Dates
Enter the range of dates for which the work orders are raised, to select only jobs between these dates,
inclusive.
The first date defaults to the earliest date on file. The second date defaults to the last date on file.
If only one date is to be searched, enter that date in both fields.
Planned Start Dates
Enter the range of dates for which the work orders are planned to start, to select only jobs between
these dates, inclusive.
The first date defaults to the earliest date on file. The second date defaults to the last date on file.
If only one date is to be searched, enter that date in both fields.
Current District Only
Enter Y to restrict the search to the current district. Enter N to review work orders in all districts for
which you have access security.
Additional Filters
Enter Y to enter additional selection criteria.The MSM621B - Review Work Order Information screen
displays.
If you selected option 3 and did not enter a partial Work Order Number, you must enter one of the
following, as they represent the primary access paths to the work order information.
Equipment Search
Originator
Account/Cost Centre
Parent Work Order
Work Group
Project.
2009 Mincom
246
Work Orders - 3620
If you entered a partial work order for option 3, the above fields, if entered, act as a filter.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
247
MSM621B - Additional Work Order

Selection Parameters
This screen is the second in a set of two that enable the entry of selection criteria to review work order
information.
Originator's Priority
The code indicating the originator's priority. This field is validated against the Table File PY - Work
Order Priority Code.
Planner's Priority
Enter the code indicating the planner's priority. This field is validated against the Table File PY Work Order Priority Code.
Component Code
Enter the Component Code of the equipment sub-assembly from the drop-down list. Entry in this field
is optional. Entry is validated against Table File CO - Component Code.
Modifier Code
Enter the code used to further define the location specified by the component code. Entry is validated
against the Table File MO - Modifier Code. Entry is only allowed when a component code has been
entered.
Standard Job and District
Enter a Standard Job Number and district. These are used to create the work orders.
The Standard Job is validated against the Standard Job file (MSF690).
The District Code is validated against the System Control file (MSF000).
If the district is not entered, the district currently in operation is used.
Work Order Type
The work order type to be searched. Entry is validated against WO Table File.
Maintenance Type
Enter the maintenance type to be searched.

For maintenance-related work orders, this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order
activity. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Table File.
Shutdown Type
The code indicating the type of shutdown. This field is validated against the Table File SD - Plant
Shutdown Type.
2009 Mincom
248
Work Orders - 3620
Part Causing Failure
Enter the identity of the part causing failure. Entry is not validated.
WORK ORDER CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Code
Enter the codes to classify the work orders to be searched. Entry is validated against Table Files W0 to
W9, inclusive.
Ellipse provides for up to 10 user-defined codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes.
Only work orders that match the entered codes are selected for display.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
249
MSM621D - Review Work Order - Summary

This screen displays the most significant information in a condensed format for the work order
selected for review.
Work Order Number
Enter a Work Order Number to review. Entry is validated on the Work Order file (MSF620).
Standard Job
The Standard Job Number for this task, if one has been assigned to it.
District
This field displays the district.

Number of Tasks
The number of Tasks contained in the Standard Job Plan.

Tasks Completed
This field displays the number of tasks completed for the work order and can be modified.
Definition tab

Description of Job
This field displays the short description of Work Order

Equipment Reference
This field displays the equipment number or equipment reference for the target being reviewed.
Component Code
This field displays the Component Code.

Modifier Code
If the component has a modifier identified, the modifier code and description display.
Raised Date
This field displays the date the work order was created.
Assigned to Individual
This field displays the employee ID of the person to whom the task was assigned.
2009 Mincom
250
Work Orders - 3620
User Status
This field displays the code of the currently assigned User Status.
Scheduling tab

SHUTDOWN DETAILS
Equipment
(Shutdown Equipment Number)

The shutdown equipment number and description to which this schedule applies.
Type
This field displays the type of shutdown the work is included in.
Number
This field displays the shutdown number the work is included in.
Planned Start
This field displays the date when the job is to start.

Planned Finish
This field displays the planned finish date.

Must Start
This field displays the indicator that displays Y if it is a requirement for the job to start on the plan
start date, otherwise an error or warning message displays when the date is changed.
Costs tab

COSTS
Estimated Resource Hours
The gross resource hours estimated for the subordinate Work Orders.
Actual Resource Hours
The total actual resource hours charged to subordinate Work Orders.

DURATION HOURS
Estimated
(Duration Estimate Hours)

This field displays the estimated duration of the activity in hours.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
251
Actual
(Duration Actual Hours)

This field displays the actual duration of the activity in hours.
Earned Value
This field displays the value of the work completed to date and is calculated based on the rate held on
the associated value of the unit of work, and the units of work completed.
Cost Allocation tab
Parent Work Order
This field displays the Parent Work Order

Project
If costing is allocated to a project, this field displays the project number to which the cost allocation
relates.
Account
This field displays the account code to which costs are allocated.
Unit of Work
This field displays the unit of work. Entry is validated against the Table File UW - Unit of Work.
Units Required
This field displays the number of units of work required to complete the job.
Percent Complete

Units Complete
Enter the number of units that have been completed against this work order or project.
Action
C
Review WO Codes/Completion Information
Review WO Duration Information
Review WO Extended Description
Review WO Completion Comments
Review General Information
Review Issue Requisitions for WO

2009 Mincom
252
Work Orders - 3620
Review Journal Transactions (All) for WO
Review WO Equipment Tracing
Review WO Materials Information
Review WO Planning Information
Review WO Reallocation Information
Review WO Summary of Tasks
Update Work Order Information
Review Work Order Costs by Category
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
253
MSM622A - Review Work Order - General

Information
This screen is one of a set that displays all master file information for a work order. This screen
displays general information about the work order.
This screen displays general information, and has action codes to related displays. Refer to the
following sections for additional information:
MSM622B - Review Work Order - Planning Information
MSM622C - Review Work Order/Completion Information

Work Order
District
This field displays the district.

Description of Job

Definition tab

EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Reference
(Equipment Reference)
Component Code

Modifier Code
Location
This field displays the new location. This updates the equipment register record when the work order
is saved.
This entry is validated against the Table File EL - Equipment Location.
2009 Mincom
254
Work Orders - 3620
Status
This field displays the status code of the equipment's current status. This updates the equipment
register record when the work order is saved.
This entry is validated against the Table File ES - Equipment Status.
Originator
This field displays the originator.

Work Group
The work group to which the crew is assigned. This field is mandatory when creating a new crew.
Assigned To
This field displays the assigned responsibility.

Originator Priority
This field displays the originator's priority.

Date Raised
Date Required
This field displays the date the requisition item was required.
Originating Document Type
This field displays the document number, when items are being reviewed for a issue requisition or
work order.
Document Number
The document number.

Detail tab

MAINTENANCE DETAILS
Work Order Type
This field displays the work order type.

Maintenance Type
The code and description that designates the basic category of maintenance being performed. Many of
the statistical and management reports of the maintenance system use this code as a selection
parameter. Examples of maintenance types are breakdown, safety, preventative. This field is
displayed when the Standard Job Based check box is clear.
User Status
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
255
ACCOUNT DETAILS
Cost Centre/Account
This field displays the Cost Centre or Account.

Parent Work Order

Project
The project number to which the work order belongs. The project description displays in the adjacent
field.
RELATED WORKORDER DETAILS
Related Work Order
This field displays the Work Order related.

Capital Work Order
This field displays the Capital Work Order

Standard Job
The Standard Job Number for this task, if one has been assigned to it.
Action
C
Review Journal Transactions for WO
Review Document Info Linked to WO General

2009 Mincom
256
X
Work Orders - 3620
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
257
MSM622B - Review Work Order - Planning

Information
displays the planning information for the work order as a whole.
This screen displays planning information and has action codes to related displays. Refer to the
following sections for additional information:
MSM622A - Review Work Order - General Information
MSM622C - Work Order Code/Completion Information

Work Order Number
Definition tab

EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Reference
The number of the equipment for the relevant work order. The second field displays the description.
Planner Priority
This field displays the priority set by the person who planned the job.
Originators Priority

Work Group
The work group to which the crew is assigned. This field is mandatory when creating a new crew.
Assign To
This field displays the identification of the person to whom the task is assigned.
Authorised By
This field displays the person who authorised the work order.
Authorised Date
This field displays the date the work order was authorised.
2009 Mincom
258
Work Orders - 3620
Number of Tasks
This field displays the number of tasks on the work order and can be modified.
Complete Tasks
User Status
Maintenance Type
Earned Value
This field displays the value of the work completed to date and is calculated based on the rate held on
the associated value of the unit of work, and the units of work completed.
Costs tab

COSTS

Estimated Resource
The estimated cost of resources required to fulfil the work order.

Actual Resource
The actual costs for resources required to fulfil the work order.
Estimated Material
The estimated cost of material required to fulfil the work order.

Actual Material
The actual costs for materials required to fulfil the work order.
Estimated Equipment
The estimated cost of equipment required to fulfil the work order.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
259
Actual Equipment
The actual costs for equipment required to fulfil the work order.
Estimated Other
The estimated cost of other costs required to fulfil the work order.
Estimated Total
The total of estimated costs.

Actual Other
The actual costs of other costs required to fulfil the work order.
Actual Total
The total of actual costs.

DURATION
(Duration Estimate Hours)

This field displays the estimated duration of the activity in hours.
Actual Duration Hours
(Duration Actual Hours)

This field displays the actual duration of the activity in hours.
Units Required
Unit of Work
This field displays the unit of work. Entry is validated against the Table File UW - Unit of Work.
Units Complete
Enter the number of units that have been completed against this work order or project.
% Complete
(Percentage Complete)
This field displays the percentage of work completed to date for the corresponding work
order/task/project.
Notes: The % Complete field displays when using daily view, if the Show Work in Process is set to
Yes on the District Control file.
2009 Mincom
260
Work Orders - 3620
Actual Cost Realloc
The total of the costs reallocated.

Scheduling

PLANNING DATES
Planned Start Date

Planned Finish Date
This field displays the planned finish date.

STATISTICS
Statistic Type
(Statistic Type)
The primary Operating Statistic type (from the Table File SS - Operating Statistic Type) if the MST is
scheduled based upon statistics.
Statistic Value
The value of this statistic when work should start, for example 50,000 km, 10,000 hr.
SHUTDOWN DETAILS
Number
Type
Equipment
(Shutdown Equipment Number)

The shutdown equipment number and description to which this schedule applies.
Action
C

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
261
Review WO General Information
Review WO Summary of Tasks. Review work order task details for single task work order. Is
to be processed before any other action code entered simultaneously.
2009 Mincom
262
Work Orders - 3620
MSM622C - Review Work Order

Code/Completion Information
displays all the codes and related descriptions pertaining to the completion of the job.
This screen displays codes, with English-language descriptions, pertaining to the completion of the
job. Reference to the following sections for additional information:
Review Work Order - General Information (MSM622A)
Review Work Order - Planning Information (MSM622B)

Work Order

Work Order Details tab

EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Reference
The number of the equipment for the relevant work order. The second field displays the description.
Equipment Status
The current equipment status code. The code description displays in the adjacent field.
Location
This field displays the location code relevant to this equipment item.
Date Completed
This field displays the date when all work related to this work order was completed.
Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option.
Completed By
This field displays the ID of the employee who performed the work or closed the work order.
Completion Code
This field displays the completion code depending on whether the work order was closed, cancelled or
deferred.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
263

Maintenance Type
Statistic Type
The operating statistic code and value used as an indicator of the expected life of equipment fitted in
this installation position.
Paper History Kept
This field displays indicator shows paper history is kept for review.
Job Codes tab

Job Code Type
This field displays the job code type that identifies the type of sub-task being undertaken as part of the
repair task.
Job Code
This field displays the job description code that identifies the type of sub-task being undertaken as part
of the repair task.
Job Code Description
of the repair task.
Action
9
Review Reference Codes
2009 Mincom
264
Work Orders - 3620
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
265
MSM622D - Review Duration Information

This screen is one of a set that displays all master file information for a work order. It displays
duration information of a work order. This screen displays the information generally input in
originally entering a work order for future performance. Reference should also be made to screens
MSM622A, MSM622B, MSM622C.
Work Order Number
2009 Mincom
266
Work Orders - 3620
MSM624A - Review Work Order - Summary

of Tasks
This screen displays a summary of all tasks belonging to a selected work order.
You can enter a new Work Order Number to restart display.
Work Order
Enter the Work Order Number to restart the review. The work order is validated against the Work
Order master file for the district selected.
Task
The work order task number. The description displays on the right.
Work Group
This field displays the work group ID where each task belongs.
Work Centre
This field displays the work centre ID where each task belongs.
Status
This field displays the status of Task of Work Order.

Plan Start Date

Action
A
Review APL for Task
Review Job Instructions for Task
Review Task Details
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
267
MSM624B - Review Work Order Task

Information
This screen displays the full details of a task belonging to a selected work order.
Enter a new Work Order Number and Task Number to restart display.
Work Order Number
Enter the Work Order Number to restart the review. The work order is validated against the Work
Order master file for the district selected.
Work Order Task
Enter the Task Number of the work order for review. If this field is left blank the first task for the
work order is reviewed. If entered, the task is validated on the Work Order Task master file.
Linked Task
This field displays a value to link the previous task. Valid values are:
Y (Linked)
N (Not linked)
Space (Linked).
Definition tab
Work Group or Centre
This field displays the Work Group or Work Centre for current Work Order Task.
This field displays the employee ID of the person to whom the task was assigned.
Job Description Code
of the repair task.
Safety Instruction Code
The safety instruction code and description for the safety instructions to be performed before the job
starts. The texts of these safety instructions are held in a standard text file (SI).
Completion Instruction Code
This field displays the Completion Instruction Code to indicate the completion instructions to be
performed after the job is completed.
2009 Mincom
268
Work Orders - 3620
Completion Text Code
The completion text code and title for the text that prints on the right side of maintenance schedules
for easy return of completion information, such as circle ABCDEF or brush length **** mm. The
completion text is held in a standard text file (CC).
APL
Component
A code indicating the subassembly.

Modifier
This field displays the Modifier Code for an equipment-based task.

Sequence
The sequence number used to distinguish the APL from others.

Planning tab

Plan Start Date
The planned start date of the task.

Plan Finish Date

Must Start
This field displays the indicator that displays Y if it is a requirement for the job to start on the plan
start date, otherwise an error or warning message displays when the date is changed.
Estimated Machine Hours
This field displays the number of estimated hours any machinery will be required to operate for this
Standard Job Task.
Float Days
This field displays the number of days when the job can remain unactioned without impacting related
tasks.
Unit of Work
This field displays the unit of work required to complete the Task.
Units Required
Units Complete
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
269
% Complete
(Percentage Complete)
This field displays the percentage of work completed to date for the corresponding work
order/task/project.
Notes: The % Complete field displays when using daily view, if the Show Work in Process is set to
Yes on the District Control file.
Scheduled Units/Day
This field displays the rate of processing in units of work per day.
Resourcing tab

Resource Class
This column displays the resource class.

Resource Code
This field displays the resource code.

Crew
This field displays the crew planned to do the work.

Estimated Hour
The hours estimated for the resource type to complete the selected scheduled task.
Actual Hours
This field displays the total actual resource hours charged to subordinate Work Orders.
Action
A
Review APL for Task
Review Completion Task Text
Review Issues Requisitions for WO
Review Job Instructions for Task
Print APL for Task
Review Repair Requests
2009 Mincom
270
Work Orders - 3620
MSM625A - Maintain Parent Work Order

Information
This screen is a sub-menu. It enables user to select of the type of action to be performed and enter the
identification of an existing record, either a parent standard job or existing parent work order, to use as
a skeleton.
Option
Enter the Option for the action required.

Parent Work Order Number or Prefix
For the Create (addition) option, the parent work order number can be entered or left blank. If it is left
blank, the work order prefix can optionally be entered.
If both fields are left blank, Ellipse assigns the parent work order number from the next available
number and prefix using the employee's default prefix. If the employee doesn't have a default prefix,
the parent work order is assigned from the next available number with no prefix.
If a prefix only is entered, Ellipse assigns the next available number with the prefix.
For the Modify and Delete options, the parent work order number is mandatory and must be on file.
COPY EXISTING
Parent Standard Job
Either of this field or Parent Work Order can be entered in Create mode to display information from
the files to assist in creating the new parent work order. If entered, the record must be on the
appropriate file.
MSF695 Parent Standard Job
Parent Work Order
Either of this field or Parent Standard Job can be entered in Create mode to display information from
the files to assist in creating the new parent work order. If entered, the record must be on the
appropriate file.
MSF625 Parent Work Order
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
271
MSM625B - Parent Work Order

This screen is used to create, modify or delete parent work orders.
This screen displays either blank, or with information from the Parent Standard Job file (MSF695) or
Parent Work Order file (MSF625). Information can be changed by overtyping. The number of existing
subordinate jobs exists on this screen for reference purposes.
A message indicates whether:
Extended Description Exists
or Extended Description Does Not Exist
Parent Work Order

Description
Enter a short description to describe the job.

Originator
Enter the code of the person initiating this job.

Date Raised
Enter the date the job is initiated.

Date Required By
Enter the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator. This field is optional.
Enter the equipment ID (for reference purposes), if the entire job pertains to a single piece of
equipment.
Authorised By/Date Authorised
Enter the code of the person authorising this job, and the date on which authorisation took place. The
effect of entry of authorisation varies, depending on your company's procedures.
Planned Start Date/Planned Finish Date
Enter the dates when work on the first subordinate work order is planned to commence and the date
when work on the last is planned to finish. These fields act as a guide in the entry of similar fields on
subordinate work orders.
This field is optional
2009 Mincom
272
Work Orders - 3620
Confirm Deletion
Enter Y to delete the displayed parent work order. This field displays only when delete mode is
selected on the MSM625A - Maintain Parent Work Orders Information screen.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
273
MSM626A - Review of Parent Work Orders

This is a sub-menu. It allows selection of parent work orders for review.
Option

Parent Work Order
(Parent Work Order)

Enter a full or partial Parent Work Order number.
This field is mandatory for option 1.
User can enter a combination of Prefix, Equipment Reference and Originator except for option 1.
Parent Work Order Prefix
(Parent Work Order Prefix)

Enter a prefix. When you save the details entered on the Parent WO tab, the system allocates the next
available Parent Work Order with that prefix. You cannot enter both a Parent WO number and a
Parent WO Prefix.
Equipment Reference
Enter an Equipment Reference. Entry is validated against the Equipment Register file (MSF600),
according to the equipment numbering standards.
Originator
Enter the originator's responsibility code for the Work Order. The originator is validated against the
Employee Master file. Refer to the Work Order Authorisation procedures for details on the security of
this field.
Parent Work Order Status
Enter a parent work order status to restrict the review to this code.
2009 Mincom
274
Work Orders - 3620
MSM626B - Review Parent Work Order

Detail
This screen displays all information for a selected parent work order.
Parent Work Order
Enter a parent work order to restart the review.

Description of Job

General tab

Originator

Date Raised
Date Required By
This field displays the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator.
Authorised By
Date Authorised
Planned Start Date

Planned Finished Date
This field displays the date when the job is scheduled to finish.
Equipment Reference
This field displays the equipment reference to be reviewed.

Cost of Subordinates tab
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
275

Material Costs
Actual Equipment Costs
Estimated Equipment Costs
The estimated costs for equipment recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
Estimated Other Costs
The estimated other costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.

Actual Other Costs

Actual Total Costs
The total actual costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.

Resource Hours of Subordinates tab
2009 Mincom
276
Work Orders - 3620
MSM626C - Summary of Parent Work

Orders
This screen displays summary information of parent work orders matching a work order number
prefix, an equipment reference or an originator.
Prefix
Enter a prefix to restart the review.

This field can be changed as Equipment Reference or Originator.
Parent Work Order

Action
R
Review Parent Work Order
Select Work Orders
Review Summary of Subordinate Work Orders
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
277
MSM627A - Maintain Incident Logsheets

Use MSM627A to enter selection criteria to create, modify or delete Incident Logsheet entries.
Option

Create Logsheet Entries
Select this option to create a new logsheet entry.
Modify Logsheet Entries
Select this option to modify an existing logsheet entry.
Delete Logsheet Entries
Select this option to delete a logsheet entry which is no longer

required.
Work Group
Enter or right-click and search for the code of the Work Group performing the work when the incident
took place.
Entry is validated against the Work Group master file MSF720.
Date
If creating a logsheet entry, enter the date that the incident took place. The default is today's date.
If maintaining or deleting an existing logsheet entry, enter the date of the incident.
Shift
Select the code of the shift in which the incident took place from the drop-down list.
Entry is validated against Table File SH. If an associated value on the SH table file designates the
code as a Production Allocation Shift Code, the shift code will not be allowed.
Originator
Enter or right-click to search for a Responsibility Code to restrict selection of items to only those
originated by that person.
This field can only be entered in conjunction with the Modify and Delete options.
Entry is validated against either MSF810 or the Employee Master File for integrated payroll users.
Equipment Reference
Enter or right-click and search for an equipment ID to restrict selection of items to only those
pertaining to the entered equipment.
2009 Mincom
278
Work Orders - 3620
Entry is validated against MSF600.

Incident Status
Select one of the following options to restrict the search and display of logsheet entries to those with a
status that corresponds to the code entered:
C
Closed
Open
If left blank, all entries that satisfy the selection criteria are displayed, regardless of their status.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
279
MSM627B - Create/Modify/Delete Incident

Logsheet Entries
Use MSM627B to create, modify, and delete Incident Logsheet Entries for an incident occurring
during a particular shift for a specific Work Group.
Incident Logsheet Entries are displayed based on the selection criteria entered in MSM627A.
This window also provides a link to enable the creation of Work Orders in relation to a particular
incident.
Work Group
The responsible Work Group when the incident occurred.

This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM627A.
Date
The date when the incident started.

Shift
The shift code of the shift during which the incident occurred.
Work Order Prefix
Enter a valid work order prefix to apply to the creation of Work Orders related to the incidents raised.
Valid work Order prefixes and associated last used Sequence Numbers are held on the System Control
file (MSF000).
Start Time
Enter the time that the incident occurred, in the format HH:MM.
The default is the current time.
Enter a short description of the incident.

Maintenance Type
Enter the Maintenance Type Code for this incident from the drop-down list.
Entry is mandatory if a Standard Job for the Incident Short Form Work Order is not available.
2009 Mincom
280
Work Orders - 3620
This field is validated against Table File MT.

Originator Id
Enter the Responsibility Code of the person raising the incident from the drop-down list.
Entry is mandatory if a Work Order is to be raised in relation to the Incident. Otherwise, it is optional
and is validated against Table File RC or the Employee Master File, for integrated Payroll users.
End Time
Enter the time at which the incident ended, in the format HH:MM.
If this field is left blank and the Duration Hours field is completed, Ellipse will calculate the end time
accordingly.
Status
The status of the incident logsheet entry.

Enter or right-click and search for the Equipment Number or Reference ID of the equipment related to
the incident.
Entry is mandatory if a Work Order is to be raised in relation to the incident. Otherwise, it is optional.
Component
Enter the ID of the component related to the incident from the drop-down list.
Entry is optional. This field can only be completed if an Equipment Reference has been entered.
Entry is validated against Table File CO.
The combination of Equipment/Component/Modifier is also validated against the Equipment Profile,
if it exists.
Modifier
Select the Modifier Code for the component related to the incident from the drop-down list.
Entry is optional. This field can only be completed if a Component Code has been entered.
Entry is validated against Table File MO.
Job Duration Code
Select the Job Duration Code for the incident from the drop-down list.
Entry is mandatory if a work order is to be raised in relation to the incident. Otherwise, it is optional.
Entry is validated against Table File JI.
If a Work Order is to be raised, the JDC is attached to the newly created Work Order. Once it has
been created, the incident is independent of the Work Order and changes to the JDC will not flow on
to any Work Order based upon this Work Order.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
281
Duration Hours
Enter a number in the range 0 to 99999.95, or enter the hours in the format HH:MM, to indicate the
number of hours taken by the incident. Entry is optional.
If this field is left blank and the End Time field is completed, the system will calculate the duration
hours accordingly.
If both the End Time and Duration Hours fields are completed, Ellipse will verify that the entries are
correct and correspond to each other. An error message will display if a discrepancy occurs.
Standard Job
Enter or right-click and search for the Standard Job Number to be used as a template for the creation of
Work Orders in relation to the incident.
Entry is optional and is validated against the Standard Job Master file.
If Work Order creation is required and no Standard Job is entered, Ellipse will default the Standard
Job according to the Work Order prefix entered.
Corrective Action
The corrective action taken in relation to the incident.

This field is mandatory if action code C - Close incident is selected in the Action field.
Work Order
This field displays the work order created from this incident, if one was created.
Action
A
Auto WO creation use default descript - MSO62T
Auto WO creation use incident descript - MSO62T
Close incident
Delete incident
Maintain extended description - MSM096A
Review equipment history - MSM633A
Reopen incident
Review work order details - MSM621D
Create/maintain incident work order - MSM62TA
2009 Mincom
282
Work Orders - 3620
MSM628A - Review Work Order Materials

Status
This screen displays materials information in relation to issue requisitions and direct charge items
required for a work order.
This screen displays all issue and purchase requisitions with a cost allocation that includes the selected
work order. The purchase order and item is shown for requisitions that have been placed as order in
addition to the current purchasing details. These details include:
the date ordered and the date due
the quantity ordered and received
the allocated and total value of the item
A requisition type (Req. Type) is shown on the screen, to distinguish between purchase requisitions
(P) and issue requisitions (I).
Work Order
Enter the work order against that issuing and purchasing information is required to be displayed. Entry
is validated on the Work Order file (MSF620).
Req. Number
This field displays the requisition number of the requisition.

Req Type
This field displays the requisition type code for which requisitions are displayed. Requisition types
are:
P
Purchase requisitions
Warehouse requisitions
All
Requisitions of any type
Supplier
This field displays the supplier name for the requisition item.
Action
A
Review Requisition cost Allocations
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
283
Review Requisition Extended Description
Review Requisition Item Detail
Review Purchase Order Item Detail
Review Requisition Header Details
2009 Mincom
284
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62AA - Modify Work Order - General

Information
Use this screen to update general information related to a Work Order.
Work Order
This field displays the work order number entered on the MSM620A - Maintain Complete Work Order
Information screen.
Status
This field displays the status of the project:
O - Open
C - Closed
A - Authorised
Description
Enter a short description of the reason for the job.

Standard Job
The number of the standard job to which the work order is linked.
District

Printer
Enter the project number to review the project general information.

Tabs
Work Order Details
Equipment Details

Cost Centre/Account
Enter the cost centre or account to which the job is to be charged. This code is used to create the
General Ledger number when only the work order number is entered in an accounting transaction.
This field is mandatory if equipment number and project number are not provided.
This field is mandatory if the work order is capital. If the work order is capital and has un-capitalised
costs, the cost centre/account cannot be changed. This field is not available when the Utilities Asset
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
285
Accounting Module is installed, costs exist against the work order, no estimate items are present and
where Job type is derived from the cost centre.
Originator
Enter the Employee Id of the person who created the Work Order.
Originator Priority
Order Priority Code. The priority code numbers are between 1 and 99 inclusive.
Work Order Type
Enter the Work Order Type or select a valid entry from the Table File WO - Work Order Type.
Maintenance Type
Enter the maintenance type or select a valid entry from the Table File MT - Maintenance Type.
User Status
The user-defined status code. Entry is validated against the Table File - WS - User Work Order Status.
Date Raised
Enter the date the work order was created. Default is today's date if left blank. This date can not be a
future date.
Date Required
Work Group
Enter the work group this job is assigned. Entry is validated against the Work Group master file.
If the Maintenance Scheduling (3701) module is installed when you enter the work group the work
order is scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. If this field is left blank the
work group of the first work order task created with a work group defaults.
Assigned To
Enter the Employee Id of the person to whom the work order is assigned. This field is optional,
however a work group/work centre and/or an assigned to person must be entered.
Parent Work Order
Enter the number if the work order belongs to a parent work order. This relationship accumulates the
costs incurred by this work order at the parent work order level and the work order.
Capital Work Order
Enter Y to indicate this is a capital work order or N to indicate an operating work order. A capital
work order must be capitalised (costs cleared from the Capital Work in Progress accounts and posted
to the Fixed Asset Register) before it can be finalised. If the work order has associated costs, it cannot
be set as a capital work order.
2009 Mincom
286
Work Orders - 3620
Related Work Order
This field is optional and is a reference between two work orders.

Project
Enter the project number if this work order belongs to a project. This relationship accumulates all
costs incurred by the work order against the Project Number and its parent projects, as well as being
accumulated on the work order itself. If the work order is capital, entry of a project is mandatory and
the entered project must be a capital project. When the project number on a work order with existing
costs is added, removed or modified, batch program MSB664 - Update Project Costs is submitted
online to reallocate the work order costs to the appropriate project(s). A message is displayed
indicating whether the program has been successfully submitted or not.
Originating Document Type
Enter a valid originating document type to indicate the original source of the job. Entry is validated
against the Table File OD - Originating Document.
Number
This field displays the code selected in the Originating Document Type field. If MS (Maintenance
Schedule) or CM (Condition Monitoring Test) are selected the document number identifies the
schedule or condition test.
Equipment Details tab

Reference
Enter the equipment id on which the job will be performed.

Component Code
Enter a valid component code or select an entry from the Table File CO - Component Code.
Modifier Code
Enter the code used to further define the location specified by the component code. Entry is validated
against the Table File MO - Modifier Code. Entry is only allowed when a component code has been
entered.
Equipment Status
Enter a valid equipment status or select from the Table File ES - Equipment Status.
Location
Enter a valid location or select from the Table File EL - Equipment Location.
Action
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
287
C Maintain WO Completion Information. The MSM62CA - Maintain Work Order Code Completion
Information screen displays.

D Maintain WO Duration Information. The MSM62EA - Maintain Job Duration Information screen
displays.
E Maintain WO Extended Description. The MSM096B - Maintain Text screen displays.
I
Create Issue Requisitions for WO. The MSM140A - Maintain Warehouse Requisition - Normal
Issue screen displays.
Review Standard Jobs for Task List. The MSM692D - Review Std Job Plans/Parent Std Jobs/Std
Jobs Summary screen displays.
K Print WO Job Card. A message is returned Job Submitted for Processing

L
Maintain Document Info Linked to WO General. The MSM58JA - Maintain Entity To Document
Link screen displays.
M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Info. The MSM62DA - Maintain Equipment Tracing For Work
Order screen displays.

P Maintain WO Planning Information. The MSM62BA - Maintain Work Order - Planning

R Maintain WO Reallocation Information. The MSM62RA - Maintain Work Order Billing

T
Maintain WO Task Details. The MSM623A - Modify Work Order Task Information screen
displays.
V Review Open/Authorised Work Orders for Eq/Comp/Mod. The MSM621C - Review Work Order
Information - summary screen displays.

W Print Work Order Details. A message is returned Job Submitted For Processing.
2009 Mincom
288
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62CB - Work Order Subsystem

Finalization
This screen provides for the maintenance of the Costing Finalization flags, on a subsystem basis.
This screen displays the current Costing Finalization flag settings for each of the installed Ellipse
subsystems, and allows finalization of the work order for one or more of these subsystems.
Work Order Number
The identifying number of the work order.

Subsystem Finalization Flag
Each installed Ellipse subsystem, which allows costing against a Work Order, will have a
corresponding subsystem finalization flag field.
The current list of such subsystems is as follows :
Supply
Accounts Payable
Payroll
Labour Costing
Journal Holding
Accounts Receivable
General Ledger
By setting the corresponding Finalization flag to Y for an individual subsystem, no further costs may
be accrued against the work order by functions within that subsystem.
However, programs from other subsystems may successfully cost to that work order, providing that
their finalization flag is set to N.
The initial default for all subsystem finalization flags is N. Allowable entries are Y or N. Once a
subsystem is finalized, it may not be unfinalized (UNLESS the reallocation frequency is C (Cyclic),
or the frequency is E (End), the Actual Cost Reallocated is zero, and the Units Invoiced/Charged is
zero).
If all installed subsystems except General Ledger are finalized, then the General Ledger subsystem
will also be finalized, by this program (resulting in all subsystems being finalized).
If all Installed Subsystems are Finalized, then the Work Order in Total is also Finalized. It is not
possible to finalize all Subsystems when the Work Order is Capital and has associated costs.
Refer to screen MSM62CA - Work Order Code/Completion Information - for further information
regarding the Work Order finalization flag and its effect on the subsystem finalization flags.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
289
2009 Mincom
290
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62DA - Maintain Equipment Tracing

for Work Order
Use this screen to enter equipment tracing information for rotable equipment for a work order.
Work Order
This field displays the work order with the equipment tracing information.
Equipment
This field displays the equipment being traced.

Date
Enter or change the date of the action, as required.

If the work order has a date out of service or a date completed recorded, this date displays in this field.
The date out of service takes precedence over the date completed.
Entry is mandatory if this date is not available from the work order to be actioned.
Status
This field displays the status of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed.
Entry is validated against the ES - Equipment Status table file on MSF010. The current status of the
equipment reference from the MSF600 - Equipment Register.
The Status and Location fields can only be completed if you also entered an Equipment Reference on
the Work Order.
Location
This field displays the location of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed.
Entry is validated against the EL - Equipment Location table file on MSF010.
The current location of the equipment reference displays from the MSF600 - Equipment Register.
The Status and Location fields can only be completed if you also entered an equipment reference on
the work order.
Fitted Equipment Reference
Enter the fitted equipment reference to be actioned.

The fitted equipment reference entered is validated against the MFS600 - Equipment Register to
determine if it exists and is traceable. The entered fitted equipment reference is traceable if the fitted
equipment reference has the traceable flag set to Y on the MFS600 - Equipment Register.
The entered fitted equipment reference is traceable if the fitted equipment reference has the traceable
flag set to Y on the MFS600 - Equipment Register.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
291

Fitted Tag
Enter the serviceable or unserviceable tag number of the fitted equipment.

Fitted Status
Enter the status of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed.
Entry is validated against the ES - Equipment Status table file on MSF010.
The current status of the equipment reference from the MSF600 - Equipment Register.
Fitted Location
Enter the location of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed.
Entry is validated against the EL - Equipment Location table file on MSF010.
The current location of the equipment reference displays from the MSF600 - equipment register.
The Status and Location fields can only be completed if you entered an equipment reference on the
work order.
Reset Schedule
Enter a valid code to reset or review the maintenance schedule tasks for the installation position
reference entered.
Entry is only allowed where a tracing action of B - fitment, L - rebuild in situ or N - repair in situ has
been entered.
The following codes can be entered:
Y
Reset Required
No reset or review required.
Review Required
Tracing Action
Enter the tracing action code for the record being updated. This field is mandatory if you entered data
in either the Fitted Equipment Reference or an Installation Position Equipment fields.
This field is validated against TA Tracing Actions table file on MSF010.
If the tracing action is repair unfitted, the valid combinations of the tracing action codes differ
depending on whether the fitted equipment is in store or not. If the item of equipment is in store, the
valid tracing actions are:
2009 Mincom
292
Work Orders - 3620
Fitment
Scrap
Sold
Repair in Situ
If the item of equipment is not in store, the valid tracing actions are:
B
Fitment
Rebuilt Offsite
Rebuilt Onsite
Exchange
Scrap
Disassemble
Sold
Repair Unfitted
Tracing Action Description
This field displays the description of the tracing action.

Installation Position Equipment
Enter the equipment reference for where the fitted equipment is being traced. Refer to the equipment
numbering standards for information about entry format. This field is validated against the MSF600 Equipment Register.
If multiple entries are made for one equipment reference, the subsequent lines can have blank
equipment references and the screen will copy down.
Installation Tag
Enter the serviceable or unserviceable tag number of the installation position equipment where the
item of equipment is being fitted or defitted.
Entry is validated against the MSF601 - Alternate Equipment Register Reference file to ensure the tag
number is not linked to another item of equipment. You cannot complete this field if the installation
position equipment is itself currently fitted to another item of equipment.
Installation Component
Enter the Component Code for where the fitted equipment is being traced.
This field is validated against the CO - Component Code table file on MSF010.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
293
The default is the value held for the fitted equipment entered.
Installation Modifier
Enter the component modifier code for where the fitted equipment is being traced.
This field is validated against the MO - Modifier Code table file on MSF010.
Note: The installation position refers to the equipment reference, component code and modifier code
as a whole.
The Installation Position Equipment, Installation Component and Installation Modifier fields entered
are validated against the MSF610 - Equipment Group Identifier Component file if the equipment
reference or its EGI has the validate profile flag set on the MSF617 - Equipment Profile file. The
entered Installation position reference will not be accepted if it does not exist, or if it exists but the
rotable equipment indicator is 4 as tracing is not allowed in this installation position.
Note: An installation position reference is mandatory if one of the following tracing actions is entered:
B
Fitment
Defitment
Rebuild in Situ
Repair in Situ
You cannot complete these fields if one of the following tracing actions are entered:
D
Rebuild Offsite
Rebuild Onsite
Exchange
Scrap
Disassemble
Sold
Repair Unfitted
Action
A
Defit all Currently Fitted Equipment
Select Currently Fitted Equipment to Defit - MSM62UA
Delete tracing incident

2009 Mincom
294
R
Work Orders - 3620
Review Equipment Holes and Double Fitments - MSM656A
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
295
MSM62EA - Modify Job Duration

Information
This screen allows duration information (elapsed time) for a work order to be entered.
Estimated duration is entered when the work order is created or planned and appears on this screen for
reference.
Work Order
This field displays the work order number. The work order description displays to the right.
Plant Shutdown ID
This field displays the shutdown number of the work orders.

This field displays the time estimated to complete the job.

Actual Job Duration
Enter the total time taken to complete the job. It does not have to balance with the sum of detailed
durations. If left blank, it is set to the total.
Changing or adding details also update this total, if the total of duration details already on file agrees
with the total initially displayed.
To reset this total to the total of details, blank it out.
Date
Enter the date that the delay or work activity start.

Duration Delay Code
Enter the delay or duration code or select from the drop-down list.
This entry is validated on the Table File JI - Job Duration Code.
Hours/Start Time/Stop Time
Enter the duration of the activity in one of a number of ways.

Enter elapsed time in the Hours column, if more than 24 hours, or if the start/stop times are not
significant.
Enter the start/stop times only, to have the program calculate the elapsed hours. It assumes that stop
time is no more than one day after start time.
If the Hours field is blank, both start and stop times are mandatory. If all three fields are entered, and
the computed elapsed time does not agree with the entered elapsed time, a warning is given.
2009 Mincom
296
Work Orders - 3620
Elapsed time and time of day can be entered in HHH:MM formats. Whole numbers without a
delimiter are taken as hours. The 24-hour clock applies to time-of-day fields.
The program does not check for hours or times overlapping.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
297
MSM62FA - Maintain Work Order Task

Completion Information
This screen is selected from MSM000B - Main Menu screen.
Option

Work Order Number
Enter a Work Order number. That is to be updated, it can also be entered in the subsequent screen
listed above.
Task Number
Enter the appropriate task number.

For work orders which have a single task, this field does not require entry.
For Option 1, entry is optional. If the task number is left blank, all tasks for the work order will be
displayed on the Complete Work Order Tasks screen (MSM62FB).
2009 Mincom
298
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62FB - Complete Work Order Tasks

This screen enables user to complete work order tasks, for work orders that are unrelated to units of
work but that are multi-task.
Work Order Number
Enter the Work Order Number to be updated, if it has not been previously entered.
This field is mandatory
Description
This field displays the description of this job.

Completed By
Enter the corrected employee code. Entry is validated against the Employee master file. Entry is
validated against the Table File also RC Table File. This field is mandatory
Completed Date
Enter the date of completion of the task. If the Completed By field is filled in and this field is left
blank, today's date is assumed.
Completion Code
Enter the code indicating the type, style, or reason for completion. This field is validated against the
Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status Codes.
Action
C
Maintain Task Completion Text
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
299
MSM62GA - Print Selected Work Orders

and/or Tasks
This screen enables user to print selected work orders and tasks in a random basis.
This screen displays blank. User can enter work orders and tasks to be printed to a nominated printer.
Defaults can be defined for the following fields via the Standard Default facility (MSM051A).
Printer - Printer-Name 1
If you enter a Work Order Number without a task, a request is submitted for the Print Work Order
Details program (MSR620). If you enter a work order and task, a request is submitted for the Print Job
Card Details program (MSR621).
Descriptions of the work order or task are displayed for confirmation prior to processing.
A message displays after processing, indicating whether or not submission of jobs was successful.
After successful execution, the screen re-displays blank with the ID of the previously selected printer.
User can the select further work orders and tasks for printing.
Printer ID
Enter a valid printer name. Entry is validated against the Table File PR Table File.
Work Order
Enter a valid Work Order Number to be selected for printing. Entry is validated against the Work
Order master file.
This field is mandatory if a Task Number is entered. Otherwise, This field is optional.
Task
Enter a valid Task Number belonging to the Work Order Number entered. Entry is validated against
the Work Order Task master file. This field is optional
Description
This field displays a description of the task.

Print Tasks
Enter Y to obtain summary details of all tasks pertaining to a Work Order. Otherwise it gets details for
the particular Work Order. Entry is not applicable when a valid Task Number belonging to the Work
Order Number is entered. This field is optional
2009 Mincom
300
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62HA - Create Work Order from

Standard Job
Screen MSM62HA enables user to enter the minimum amount of information required to create a
work order and its related tasks from a Standard Job.
Work Order Number or Prefix
Either enter a Work Order number that has not yet been used or leave this field blank for Ellipse to use
the next available Work Order Number.
The valid Work Order Number prefixes are held on the System Control file (MSF000).
Standard Job
Enter the Standard Job Number to be used to create the work orders. If user does not know the
number, enter ? in this field. Ellipse transfers to the MSM691A - Standard Job Review Menu screen to
search for the Standard Job.
Alternatively, leave this field blank and enter an Equipment Reference and press F9. The system
transfers to the MSM692D - Review Standard Jobs - Summary screen to display Standard Jobs for that
Equipment Number.
You can also leave this field blank if you are creating a work order from a Maintenance Schedule
which has a Standard Job. In this case, the Maint. Sched. Task field is filled in.
Originator
Work Group
Enter the code of the work group responsible for performing this task. Entry is validated against the
Work Group master file (MSF720).
The work group defaults to that on the Standard if it is recorded on the Standard Job.
User does not have to complete this field when user create a work from a Maintenance Schedule Task.
Equipment Reference
Enter the ID of the equipment on which this job is to be performed. If you are creating work orders for
a continuous asset type of equipment, the segment range can be entered as part of this field.
Refer to the equipment numbering standards for the method of equipment entry.
The equipment reference is also validated according to the Costing flag held against the item of
equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). The following happens, depending on the value of
the Costing flag:
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
301
A Equipment Reference has costing allowed; Equipment Reference entered is allowed.

W
Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed; a warning is displayed but the Equipment
Reference is allowed.
Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed; an error is displayed and the Equipment
Reference is not allowed.
This field is optional.

Component Code
Enter the component code of the maintenance schedule. Entry is validated against the Component
Code Table Code (CO). The system also checks that this is a valid component for this item of
equipment by examining its component profile. If no specific profile is found for the item of
equipment but it has a group identifier defined, the component profile of the group identifier is
checked. If no profile is found then any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid.
This field is optional, but is only allowed if user have entered an Equipment Number or Reference.
Modifier Code
Enter the Component Modifier Code for the work order or that relates to a Maintenance Schedule.
Entry is validated against the Modifier Code Table Code (MO).
This field is optional, but is only allowed if you have entered a Component Code.
Maintenance Schedule Task
Enter the task number for a Maintenance Schedule.

Along with the Equipment, Component and Modifier references, this code is used to find a
Maintenance Schedule Task (MSF700) record, which identifies repeating maintenance tasks. The
MSF700 record must have a Standard Job. This job is used to create the work order.
MSF700 also has a work group, which is assigned to do the repeating task. This work group overrides
any work group entered on this screen.
Job/APL Details tab
JOB DETAILS
Job Description
The job description from the standard job.

Number of Tasks
The number of Tasks contained in the Standard Job Plan.

APL DETAILS
APL Type
The APL type is either E for equipment number or G for EGI (Equipment Group Identifier).
2009 Mincom
302
Work Orders - 3620
Component
A code indicating the subassembly.

Modifier

A code indicating the subassembly if there is more than one subassembly.
Sequence
The sequence number used to distinguish the APL from others.

Printer
Enter Y in the appropriate fields and the ID of the printer to be used if user want to immediately print
either the work order or APLs required for the job (in requisitioning format).
Action
9
Maintain Reference Codes
Print WO Job Card
Review Standard Job Information
Print Work Order Details
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
303
MSM62IA - Create Short-form Orders For

Equipment
This screen enables user to create work orders by the quickest means, using minimal information.
Work Order Prefix
The work order prefix.

If this field is left blank, the system assigns the complete work order number. If a prefix is entered, and
is valid on the System Control file (MSF000), the system assigns the next number for the prefix.
Originator
Enter the code of the person initiating this job. Entry is validated against the Table File RC Table File
or the Employee master file for integrated Payroll users.
Equipment Reference

This field is mandatory for every work order line entered.
If user is creating work orders for continuous assets, the segment range is entered as part of this field.
The Equipment Reference is also validated according to the Costing flag held against the item of
equipment on the Equipment Register (SMF600). The following happens, depending on the value of
the Costing flag:
A
Equipment Reference has costing allowed; Equipment Reference entered is allowed.
Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed; a warning is displayed but the
Equipment Reference is allowed.
Component Code
Enter a valid component code or select an entry from the Table File CO - Component Code. The
system also checks that this is a valid component for this piece of equipment by examining its
componentry profile. If no specific profile is found and the item has a group identifier defined, the
componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. If no profile is found, any Component Code
can be entered as long as it is valid.
2009 Mincom
304
Work Orders - 3620
Modifier Code
Enter the component modifier code that identifies the component to be monitored. Entry is validated
against the Table File MO Table File. User can only complete this field if a Component Code has been
entered.
Equipment Location
The location of the equipment. Entry is validated against the Table File EL - Equipment Location.
Cost Centre/Account
Enter the cost centre or account that this job is to be charged. This code is used to create the Genera
Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting transaction.
The default value is taken from that held against the Standard Job on the window (if this value is
available). Otherwise, it is taken from the value held against either the Equipment Reference or the
Project Number, depending on the costing option available.
Work Order Description

Work Group
Work Order Number
Enter the complete Work Order Number unless user want the system to assign. If entered, this number
must not already exist on the Work Order File (MSF620).
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
305
MSM62JA - Create Short-form Work Orders

for Plant
This screen enables user to create work orders by the quickest means, using minimal information.
Work Order Prefix
The work order prefix.

If this field is left blank, the system assigns the complete work order number. If a prefix is entered, and
is valid on the System Control file (MSF000), the system assigns the next number for the prefix.
Originator
Enter the code of the person initiating this job. Entry is validated against the Table File RC Table File
or the Employee master file for integrated Payroll users.
Equipment Reference

This field is mandatory for every work order line entered.
If user is creating work orders for continuous assets, the segment range is entered as part of this field.
equipment on the Equipment Register (SMF600). The following happens, depending on the value of
the Costing flag:
A
Equipment Reference has costing allowed; Equipment Reference entered is allowed.
Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed; a warning is displayed but the
Component Code
Enter a valid component code or select an entry from the Table File CO - Component Code. The
system also checks that this is a valid component for this piece of equipment by examining its
componentry profile. If no specific profile is found and the item has a group identifier defined, the
componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. If no profile is found, any Component Code
can be entered as long as it is valid.
2009 Mincom
306
Work Orders - 3620
Modifier Code
Enter the component modifier code that identifies the component to be monitored. Entry is validated
against the Table File MO Table File. User can only complete this field if a Component Code has been
entered.

Work Group
Work Order Number
Enter the complete Work Order Number unless user want the system to assign. If entered, this number
must not already exist on the Work Order File (MSF620).
Cost Centre/Account
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
307
MSM62KA - Delete Work Orders

This screen is used to entered the work order number to be deleted, and confirm the deletion.
This screen can be accessed from a menu screen.
Work Order Number
Enter the work order number to be deleted.

Originator

Date Raised
Date Required
This field displays the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator.
Originator priority

Cost Centre/Account
This field displays the Cost Centre or Account.

Work Order Type
This field displays the work order type.

Component Code

Modifier Code
Reall. CC/Account
This field displays the account code where this work order is charged, if it is being carried out on
behalf of another cost centre.
2009 Mincom
308
Work Orders - 3620
Parent Work Order

Related Work Order
This field displays the Work Order related.

Originating Doc Type
This field displays the document number, when items are being reviewed for a issue requisition or
work order.
Confirm Deletion
Enter Y after display of the selected work order to confirm deletion of the work order and its
associated tasks.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
309
MSM62LA - Review Job Duration

Information
displays the duration information for the work order that includes delay or actual work time.
Work Order


Actual Job Duration
This field displays the actual time to complete the job.

Date
This field displays the date that the delay or work activity start.
Duration Delay
This field displays the Code of duration delay. The description of code is displays on right.
Hours
This field displays the duration of the job in hours.

Start Time
This field displays the planned start time of the job.

Stop Time
This field displays the stop time of the job.

Action
2009 Mincom
310
Work Orders - 3620
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
311
MSM62MA - Review Work Order Tasks - for

Work Group
This screen enables user to review all work order tasks associated with a given work group.
Work Group
Enter the Work Group Code to review associated work order tasks. Entry is validated against the
Work Group file (MSF720).
Crew
Enter the crew to be maintained for this Work Group. Validate that the crew entered exists on the
CREW table and that the associated value is equal to the entered Work Group. Resources may or may
not already exist for the crew entered. Entry in this field is optional.
Work Order
This field displays the work order number. The work order description displays to the right.
Task Number
(Standard Job Task)

This field displays the task number for the standard job.
Plan Start
The time scheduled for starting the work specified in the work order.
Plan Finish
This field displays the date scheduled for finishing the work specified in the work order.
Action
C
Complete Work Order
Review Work Order
Job Instructions
APL
Review Task
Update Task
2009 Mincom
312
W
Work Orders - 3620
Update Work Order
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
313
MSM62NA - Bulk Work Order Update

Selection
This screen allows you to search and select specific criteria to access work orders for the purpose of
bulk updating. At least one primary selection criteria must be entered on this screen.
Work Orders only display if they meet ALL criteria set in the filters on the MSM62NA and
MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screens.
Work Order Status
Enter the status of the work orders or select from the drop-down list. Bulk work order statuses are
either O - Open or A - Authorised.
If this field is left blank, all open and authorised work orders are selected.
User Status
Enter the user status code of the work orders or select from the drop-down list.
This code will be validated against the Table File WS - User Work Order Status.
Work Group
Enter or search for the work group to which work orders are currently assigned.
Entry in this field is validated against the Work Group master file MSF720.
EQUIPMENT SELECTION CRITERIA
Enter the equipment or plant number or select the equipment search type from the drop-down list.
If you enter an Equipment Search Type, an Equipment Search Key must also be entered.
List Type
If an Equipment Search Type of L is entered, this field is mandatory. An Equipment List Identifier
must be entered in the Equipment Search Key field.
Entry is validated against the Table File LI - Equipment List Type. The List Type and Identifier must
exist as a valid Equipment List.
Equipment Search Key
Enter the appropriate information.

The Equipment Search Type and Equipment Search Key fields are used together. The Equipment
Search Type field indicates the kind of equipment search, as follows:
2009 Mincom
314
Work Orders - 3620
A Continuous Asset segment range can be entered in conjunction with an Equipment or Plant
Number to restrict the search to Work Orders that refer to Continuous Asset segments falling
within the range specified in the search criteria
Equipment Class
Equipment List
Equipment Location
Productive Unit
Equipment Status
The search key is the appropriate identifier.

Indicator
Enter the indicator or select from the drop-down list. If an Equipment Search Type of L is entered,
entry in this field is mandatory.
The following indicators are available:
L
Retrieves Work Orders for equipment items of the entered list.
Retrieves Work Orders for all items of the entered list and its sub-list
Originator
Account/Cost Centre
Enter or search for the Account Code or cost centre to which the jobs requiring selection are
charged. This code is validated in accordance with the standard costing validation routine.
Parent Work Order
The parent work order number to list work orders belonging to that parent work order. The parent
work order is validated against the Parent Work Order file MSF625.
Project Number
The Project Number to search for all work orders belonging to a project.
Entry is validated against the Project file MSF660.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
315
This field displays only if the Project Control module (3660) is installed.
Shutdown Number
Enter the shutdown number of the work orders or select from the drop-down list.
Only work orders that have been assigned to the entered shutdown number are selected.
Entry is validated against the Plant Shutdown file MSF750.
This field displays only if the Maintenance Scheduling module (3701) is installed.
DATE SELECTION CRITERIA
Raised Dates
Enter the range of dates during which the required work orders were raised. Only one of the two dates
is required for the selection to be activated. You must enter dates in both fields.
This presents only those jobs raised on or between the two dates.
Planned Start Dates
Enter the range of dates during which the required work orders are planned to start. Only one of the
two dates is required for the selection to be activated. You must enter dates in both fields.
This presents only those jobs planned to start on or between the two dates.
Additional Filters
Enter Y to allow entry of additional search filters. The MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order
Update Selection screen displays for you to enter additional search filters.
2009 Mincom
316
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order

Update Selection
This screen allows you to enter additional filters to restrict the list of work orders for bulk update.
This screen displays after entering a primary search criteria on the MSM62NA screen by selecting Y
in the Addition Filters field.
Only Work Orders meeting ALL criteria set in the filters display on the MSM62NA and MSM62NB
screens.
Originator's Priority
Enter or select the originators priority for the work order from the drop-down list.
Entry in this field is validated against Table File PY - Work Order Priority Code.
Planner's Priority
Enter or select the planners priority for the work order from the drop-down list.
Entry in this field is validated against Table File PY - Work Order Priority Code.
Component Code
Enter or select the component code from the drop-down list. This indicates the specific sub-assembly
on which the Work Orders are to be filtered.
Entry in this field is validated against Table File CO - Component Code.
Modifier Code
Enter or select the modifier code from the drop-down list used to further define the location specified
by the component code.
Entry in this field is validated against Table File MO - Modifier Code.
Entry in this field is only allowed if the Component Code field has been completed.
Standard Job
Enter or right-click, search and select a standard job number used to create the required work orders.
Entry in this field is validated against the Standard Job file MSF690.
District
Enter the District where the standard job belongs. The District Code is validated against the System
Control file MSF000.
If the district is not entered, the district currently in operation is used.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
317
Work Order Type
Enter or select a work order type from the drop-down list.

Entry in this field is validated against Table File WO - Work Order Types.
Maintenance Type
Enter or select the maintenance type from the drop-down list. For maintenance-related work orders,
this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order activity.
Entry in this field is validated against Table File MT - Maintenance Type.
Job Code Type 1
Enter or select from the drop-down list the job code Table File types W0 to W9 - Work Order Job
Codes to be displayed/ updated on the multiple-item update screen MSM62NC.
The default value is W0.
Job Code Type 2
Enter or select from the drop-down list the job code Table File types W0 to W9 - Work Order Job
Codes to be displayed/updated on the multiple-item update screen MSM62NC.
The default value is W1.
Shutdown Type
The code for the shutdown type.

Entry in this field is validated against Table File SD - Plant Shutdown Type.
Enter the identity of the part causing failure.

Entry in this field is not validated.
JOB CODES
Work Order Classification Codes
Enter or select from the drop-down list the codes to classify the work orders required to be
searched. Entry is validated against Table File types W0 to W9 - Work Order Job Codes, inclusive.
The system provides up to 10 user-defined codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes.
Only work orders that match the entered codes are displayed.
2009 Mincom
318
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62NC - Maintain Bulk Work Order

Code and Duration
Based on selection criteria entered on the MSM62NA - Bulk Work Order Update Selection and
MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen, MSM62NC enables you to
update completion and duration type information for all Work Orders selected.
Search By:
Work Group:
These fields display the code and description of the primary search criteria entered on MSM62NA Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen.
Date
Enter a valid date. This date will be used for:
Work Order completion date. Entry is mandatory if a System Completion Code is entered in the
detail section.
Duration update. Entry is mandatory if a Job Duration code is entered in the detail section.
Completed By
Enter or right-click, search and select the ID of the employee who either performed the work or closed
the Work Order. Entry is mandatory if a System Completion Code is entered.
Entry is validated either against the Payroll master file, for integrated users, or Table File RC Responsibility Code.
Position attributes are verified on the Associated Position Management master file.
Equipment Reference
This field displays the equipment reference number.

Equipment Description
This field displays the description of the equipment as recorded in the Equipment Reference field.
Work Order
The identifying number of the work order.

This field displays the description of the work order.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
319
Job Codes
Enter the job codes to classify the Work Order. Entry in this field is validated against Table File W0 W9 - Work Order Job Codes, as indicated in the selection details on MSM62NB - Additional Bulk
Work Order Update Selection screen.
Entry in this field is mandatory or optional as per job code definition.
Planned Finish
Enter the planned finish date and time.

Job Duration Code
Enter or select a Job Duration/Delay Code from the drop-down list.

Entry is validated against Table File JI - Job Duration Code.
Hours
Enter elapsed time of activity in hours. The default is zero.

Completion Code
Select a Completion Code from the drop-down list. Entry in this field is only valid if the Completed
By and Date data fields are completed at the header level. These three entries together complete the
nominated Work Order.
Entry is validated against Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status.
Action
A
Create Short Form WO for Plant MSM62JA
Maintain WO completion information MSM62CA
Maintain WO duration information MSM62EA
Maintain WO extended description MSM096A
Maintain WO general information MSM62AA
Maintain WO tasks MSM623A
Maintain WO task Completion MSM62FA
Labour costing Transaction Entry MSM854A
Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Info MSM63DA
Create/Maintain Short Form WO MSM62PA
Maintain Operating Statistics MSM400A
2009 Mincom
320
Work Orders - 3620
Maintain WO planning information MSM62BA
Maintain WO Reallocation Information MSM62RA
Maintain WO task details MSM623A
Create Short Form WO for Plant MSM62IA
Create/Maintain Short Form WO for Task MSM62QA
Maintain Text MSM096B
Action
B
Labour Costing Transaction Entry MSM854A
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
321
MSM62PA - Create/Maintain Short-form

Work Order
This screen enables user to create and modify work orders by entering a minimum of data.
Work Order or Prefix
Enter a complete Work Order Number, or allow Ellipse to assign a number if in Create mode. In the
latter case, have Ellipse assign the whole number by leaving the prefix field blank, or enter the Work
Order Prefix and have Ellipse assign the next number for this prefix.
Valid prefixes and associated Last Used Sequence Numbers are held on the System Control file
(MSF000).
If a work order number is entered and the work order already exists then the details is to be returned to
allow maintenance. Any details already entered on the screen is to be overwritten.
Work order prefix only applies to creations.
Standard Job
Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order. Entry in this field
applies only to creation of work orders. If this field is not completed and a user-defined default
Standard Job exists, this is used as the default. Otherwise, one of the following applies.
If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format
M62P<PREFIX>. If one exists the program uses it as a template for work order creation.
If no prefix has been entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job (M62PMW). The
same processing as for the prefix input applies.
If it uses a Standard Job as a template, the program only defaults fields that have not been entered by
the user.
Parent Work Order
This field is protected if Actual Costs or Actual Labour Hours exist for the particular work order.
Printer
Enter a valid printer name.

Entry is validated against the Table File PR Table File. User can only complete this field if Print
actions (W or K) are selected.
2009 Mincom
322
Work Orders - 3620

Originator
Enter the Responsibility Code of the person who initiated the work order.
Entry is validated against RC Table File or the Employee master file (MSF810) if the Establishment
module (3870) is installed.
If the Establishment module (3870) is installed this field can either be protected or unprotected and
defaulted to the userid.
Originator Priority
Order Priority Code. The number is between 1 and 99 that the highest is 1.
Work Order Type
Enter the Work Order Type Code that applies to this work order. Entry is validated against the Table
File MT - Table File.
Completed
Enter Y to complete a work order. The default is N.

To enable completion of a work order from this window, user must set up a default Completion Code
by entering Y in the associated value of the appropriate code on SC Table File.
The following defaults are be used when you complete a work order:
Completion Date
Defaults to today's date.
Completion Code
Defaults from SC Table File
Completed By
Defaults to the contents of the Assign To/Completed By field.
Maintenance Type
Enter the maintenance type code for the work order. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Maintenance Type . This field is mandatory
Shutdown Type
The code indicating the type of shutdown. This field is validated against the Table File SD - Plant
Shutdown Type.
Assign To/Completed By
Enter either the person that this work order is assigned to or is completed by.
This field has two purposes:
Before and after completion of a work order, it is used to maintain the ID of the person to whom
the work order is assigned. In this case, This field is optional.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
323
When a work order is being completed (i.e., the completed indicator changes from N to Y) this
field is used to store the ID of the person completing the work order. In this case, This field is
mandatory.
Entry is validated against RC Table File or the Employee master file if the Position Management
module (3870) is installed.
Work Group
Enter the work group that this job is assigned. Entry is validated against the Work Group master file
(MSF720).
If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed, completing this field causes the work order to be
scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group.
Note: The Assign To and Work Group fields are optional. However, user must complete at least one
of them. User can complete both fields, if required.
Date Raised
Enter the date the job is initiated. The default is today's date. User cannot enter a date in the future.
Date Required
Enter the date that the work order is required to be completed.

Cost Centre/Account
Reference
The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed. If user is creating work
orders for a Continuous Asset type of equipment, the segment range can be entered as part of this
field. Refer to the equipment number standards for the format of Equipment Reference entry.
This field is mandatory if the Standard Job selected does not contain an Account Code or Reallocation
Account Code. Otherwise, this field is optional.
equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). The following happens, depending on the value of
the Costing flag:
A
Equipment Reference has costing allowed; Equipment Reference enter is allowed.
Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed; a warning is displayed by the Equipment
Reference is allowed.
2009 Mincom
324
E
Work Orders - 3620
Work Order Description tab

Description

Action
9
Blank out Description
Maintain WO Codes/Completion Information
Maintain WO Duration Information
Maintain WO Extended Description
Maintain WO Completion Comments
Maintain WO General Information
Create Issue Requisition for WO
Print WO Job Card
Labour Costing Transaction Entry
Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information
Maintain WO Planning Information
Maintain WO Reallocation Information
Maintain WO Task Details
Print WO Details
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
325
MSM62QA - Create/maintain Shortform

Work Order
This screen allows creation or maintenance of a work order and a single task via one screen.
Work Order Number of Prefix
(MSF000).
Parent Work Order
Standard Job
Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order. Entry is only
applicable to creations.
The Standard Job task used for default must have a single task number 001.
If a user defined defaulted job exists, this is used, otherwise one of the following is applied.
If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62Q
<prefix> and if one exists it uses it as a template for the Work Order creation.
If no prefix was entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job M62QMW and the same
processing as for the prefix input applies.
When using a Standard Job as a template, the program only defaults those fields that have not been
entered by the user.
This is a single task creation window, therefore only one task is copied from the template standard
job regardless of the number of tasks under it.
Description of Job

2009 Mincom
326
Work Orders - 3620
This field is mandatory. This is to be used as both the work order and task description.
Printer
On entry to the program the PRINTER field contains a default printer. For Actions K or W the printer
name is used to print the Task or Work Order.
For Action W a value for PRINTER must be entered. The field may be left with the default value, or a
user specified value may be supplied.
For Action K entry of a value for PRINTER is optional. The field may be left with the default value,
blanked out or a user specified value be may supplied. If no printer is entered the printer defaults from
the Work Group of the Work Order.
The printer is validated at the district and global level on the Table PR File Type.
Originator
Enter the responsibility code of the person originating this project or sub-project.
This field is mandatory. Entry is validated against the Table File RC - Responsibility Code, or for
integrated payroll users, the employee master file.(MSF810)
Depending on the access level of the user, this field is either be protected or unprotected and defaulted
to the user ID.
Originator Priority
Order Priority Code. The number is between 1 and 99 that the highest is 1. This is one of two work
order priorities, the other being the planners priority.
User Status
Enter the user status code of the work orders or select from the drop-down list.
This code will be validated against the Table File WS - User Work Order Status.
Work Order Type
If Ellipse determines that the equipment entered is still under warranty, then the warranty work order
type is defaulted.
Maintenance Type
Enter the Maintenance Type. For maintenance related work orders, this code represents the main
statistical dissection of work order activity. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Table File.
Work Group
Enter the Work Group to which this job is assigned. Entry is validated against the Work Group Master
file. This is used for both the work order and the task.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
327
If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed, entry in this field causes the work order to be
This is used for both the work order and the task.
Date Raised
Enter the date that the work order was raised. The default is today's date. User cannot enter a date in
the future.
Date Required
Planned Start
Enter the date on which this task is scheduled to commence. This date is used as the Due Date when
scheduling the task for the work group.
This is consequently the most important job planning data item.
Project
Enter the project number to be associated with this work order. This field is optional and, if entered, is
validated on the Project Control File MSF660.
If the project number is under AFUDC control, then so must be the Cost Code/Account. Otherwise the
Cost Code/Account can not be an AFUDC controlled code.
Job Description
Enter the code that indicates the primary action to be taken to complete the job. Entry is validated
against the Table File JD Table File.
Safety and Completion Instruction
Enter the Safety Instruction Code and the Completion Instruction Code, that are always used in
tandem the first indicating standard text describing procedures that should be performed before or
during the job to ensure safe conditions.
The Completion Instruction code indicates the procedures that should be performed at the end of the
job, often the reverse of the safety procedures.
Note: These are standard procedures applying to the job, in addition to job procedures pertaining to
individual jobs.
2009 Mincom
328
Work Orders - 3620
Cost Centre/Account
Enter the Cost Centre or Account to which this job is to be charged. This code is used to create the
General Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting
transaction.
If no value is entered, the default value is from that held against the standard job on the window (if the
standard job's value is available), otherwise it is from that held against either the equipment reference
or the project number, depending on the costing option set.
If the Capital Work Order has any associated costs, then the costing information cannot be modified.
If the code entered has a segment that is under AFUDC project control, then an AFUDC controlled
project must be entered. Otherwise an AFUDC controlled project can not be entered.
EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Reference
The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed. If the Work Order
refers to a Continuous Asset, the segment range is entered as part of the Equipment Reference field.
Refer to the equipment number standards for the format of input. If the equipment is under warranty,
an extra confirmation process is to be performed.
The equipment reference will also be validated according to the costing flag held against the item of
equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). The following occurs depending on the value of the
costing flag:
A
If the equipment reference has costing allowed, the equipment reference entered is allowed.
If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed, a warning is to be displayed but the
equipment reference is allowed.
If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed, an error is to be displayed and the
equipment reference is not allowed.
Component Code
Enter the code for the sub-assembly on which the task was performed. Valid codes are maintained on
Table File CO. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this item of equipment by
examining its componentry profile. If no specific profile is found for this item of equipment but it has
a group identifier defined, the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. If no profile is
found, any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid.
User can only complete this field if an Equipment Number or Reference has been entered.
Modifier Code
Enter a modifier code from the drop-down list. Entry is validated against the Table File MO - Modifier
Code. It is used to further define the location specified by the component code.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
329
This field is optional but only be allowed where a component code has been entered.
APL DETAILS
Enter the APL (Application Parts Listing) to be used, if material is required for this job. The APL is
entered using the following fields:
APL Type
Enter the Equipment identification type being one of:
E - Equipment Reference (if Equipment Registeris installed)
G - Equipment Group Identifier
APL Reference
Enter one of the following (indicate by the APL Type):
Equipment Reference, being an equipment or plant number identified in the equipment

Register file (MSF600).
Equipment Group Identifier, being a group or equipment items or components which share the
same parts and maintenance characteristics, identified in the GI - table file.
Component Code
Enter a Component Code if appropriate. This field is optional and is validated against the CO table
file. The value --- can be used instead of spaces.
Modifier Code
Enter a Modifier Code if appropriate, to designate a particular Component Code. This field is
optional and is validated against the MO table file. The value -- can be used instead of spaces.
Sequence Number
Enter the sequence number if appropriate, to designate individual Application Parts Listing. This
field is optional.
A question mark (?) in any APL related field causes the APL Preview Mechanism to be activated
(MSO131).
Resource tab
Each work order task has the capability to record the estimated resources required. A resource can be
any item required that can be expressed in hours:
machinery hours
labour hours
This forms the basis of extensive resource planning and allocation in maintenance systems.
The Resource Code is user defined and is validated against the TT Table file. It indicates the type of
resource required. A particular Resource Code can only appear once for a work order task. Due to
space restrictions only four resource groups appear on this window. If the general task maintenance
window is also used to update this task, it is possible that there may be two extra resource groups that
exist, but do not appear on this window.
2009 Mincom
330
Work Orders - 3620
If the standard job used as a template includes resources on the task, they only appear as defaults if no
resources are initially entered. If resources are initially entered on the MSM62OA - Create/Maintain
Shortform Work Order, any remaining codes remain blank even if some exist on the standard job
template.
Crew
Enter the number of persons or machines normally needed to do the job efficiently.
Estimated Hours
Enter the total required resource hours for this job.

Action
9
Create Issue Requisitions for WO
Maintain WO Task Job Instructions
Print WO Job Card
Review Open/Authorised Work Orders for Eq/Comp/Mod
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
331
MSM62RA - Maintain Work Order Billing

Information
This screen enables user to maintain cost reallocation information in relation to a work order.
This screen displays with existing information and allows modifications.
Defaults can be defined for the following fields via the Standard Default facility (MSM051A):
Reallocation Method (RLOC-METHOD1)
Reallocation Frequency (RLOC-FREQ-IND1)
The default debit and credit reallocation expense elements set up on the district control windows are
displayed here for reference purposes. A warning is displayed the first time this window is displayed if
any of the default reallocation expense elements are blank.
Note: Both the credit and debit default reallocation expense elements must be set up for the
reallocation process to work. If one of them is blank reallocation does not occur. Instead, an error is to
be produced by the Reallocation program (MSB622).
The following fields only appear if the Accounts Receivable module is installed:
Billable Indicator
Billing Level Indicator
Purchase Order Number
Purchase Order Item Number
Customer Number
Revenue Code
Amount Invoiced
Standard Value
The Reallocation Project field is protected if the work order project is not blank.
The following fields are protected if the Billable Indicator is Y and the total cost invoiced is greater
than zero:
Billable Indicator
Customer Number
Customer Mnemonic
Reallocation Method
Reallocation Frequency.
The Reallocation Method and Reallocation Frequency fields are also protected if any of the following
fields are greater than zero:
2009 Mincom
332
Work Orders - 3620
Units Invoiced/Charged
Total Cost Reallocated.
Costing can be finalised on this window as the reallocation is processed. Particularly for end of job
reallocation, this flag can be set to prevent charging of further costs against the work order.
Work Order

Work Order Account
This field displays Account that the current Work Order to be charged.
Work Order Project
This field displays the work order number or project number the requisition item is associated with.
REALLOCATION DETAILS
Default Expense Element
This field displays expense element to use in the debit portion of the reallocated costs.
Default Expense Element Credit
This field displays expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs.
Reallocation Account
(Reallocation Cost Account)

The cost centre/ Cost Code/ General Ledger Account Code to be used for reallocation of costs on this
work order. If only a cost centre is entered, the reallocation expense element defaults to the
Reallocation Debit Expense Element that is set up on the MSM00BA - District Control screen.
If this field is left blank and a reallocation work order is entered, the account related to that work order
displays enabling you to confirm or make changes as required.
Reallocation Project
The Project Number to reallocate the work order costs to. This field only applies if the work order
project is blank.
If a project number is entered and the Reallocation Account field is left blank, the project account
displays for confirmation or amendment.
Reallocation Method
The method to be used to reallocate the work order cost. Entry is validated against RM Table File.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
333
This field is mandatory if a Reallocation Account/project/work order are entered. Otherwise, This field
is optional
Note: A reallocation method based on work completed cannot be entered if the work order is billable.
Reallocation Frequency
Enter one of the following indicate when reallocation of this work order occurs:
C
Indicates reallocation occurs on a cyclic basis (daily, weekly, etc.).
Indicates reallocation occurs when the work order is finalised.
This field is mandatory if a reallocation method is entered. Entry is not required if the work order is
billable.
Credit Expense Element
Enter a valid expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs. If you do not enter
an expense element in this field, the system uses the default credit reallocation expense element that is
set up on the MSM00BA - District Control file.
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE DETAILS
Customer Number
Enter the customer number to be invoiced. The adjacent field displays the customers name.
Entry in this field is mandatory if the Accounts Receivable module is installed and the Billable
Indicator is Y.
or Mnemonic
A mnemonic may be entered as an alternative to the customer number.

PO No./Item
Enter a valid purchase order number and item to indicate the source of the work that is required.
Entry in this field is mandatory if the Accounts Receivable module is installed and the Billable
Indicator is Y.
Revenue Code
Enter a revenue code for the work order or select from the drop-down list. Entry in this field is
validated against Table File RV - Revenue Code.
You must enter a revenue code in this field if the Accounts Receivable module is installed and the
Billable Indicator is Y.
Billable Indicator
Indicates whether the work order units are billable.
2009 Mincom
334
Work Orders - 3620
Billing Level Ind.
(Billing Level Indicator)

Enter one of the following options from the drop-down list:
P - to indicate that Project level is to be used for invoicing.
W - to indicate that the MSF740 record type is to be used for invoicing.
Y - to indicate that the Work Order is available to be billed.

Amount Invoiced
This field displays the amount to be invoiced for the purchase order and item indicated.
Standard Value
This field displays the standard value of the purchase items.

Quote Value
Enter the value quoted for this work order.

This field is mandatory if the reallocation method selected is based on the quoted value. Otherwise,
This field is optional. When this field is modified check the Actual Costs Reallocated to see if Quote
value has reached this limit. Quote Value can then only be increased. This modification rule applies
only to Non-Billable Work Orders.
Note: Total Quote Value entered is to be reallocated at the frequency specified, eg. A cyclic frequency
reallocates the total quote value when the Reallocation process is run.
+/- Margin Percent
Enter a % if the Quoted Value is in use (refer to Reallocation Method field). This will increase the
quoted value used to create the invoice by this percentage. If this field is completed, the reallocation
amount is calculated as follows:
Actual Cost/Earned Value +/- Percent Specified
This field cannot be completed if the reallocation method is based on the quoted value and the work
order is not billable.
Recharge Value Limit
Recharge Value Limit Enter a number in the range 0 to 9999999999.99 to indicate that the reallocated
costs cannot be greater than the limit specified.
If this field is completed, the reallocation amount is checked against it. If the reallocation amount is
greater, only up to the specified limit is reallocated to the Costs account. The difference is held
against the work order until the limit is increased.
This field only applies when the work order reallocation is based on actual costs.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
335
Notes: When the Recharge Value Limit field is modified, check the actual costs reallocated to see if
the recharge value limit has reached this limit. Only the recharge value limit increases. An
appropriate error message displays when the recharge value limit is attempted to be decreased. This
modification rule only applies to Non-Billable Work Orders.
Action
B
Review Purchase Order
2009 Mincom
336
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62SA - Review Work Order Billing

Information
This screen enables user to review cost reallocation information in relation to a work order.
Work Order

Work Order Account
This field displays Account that the current Work Order to be charged.
Work Order Project
This field displays the work order number or project number the requisition item is associated with.
REALLOCATION DETAILS
Default Expense Elements: Debit
This field displays expense element to use in the debit portion of the reallocated costs.
Default Expense Elements: Credit
.This field displays expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs.
Reallocation Account
(Reallocation Cost Account)

The cost centre/ Cost Code/ General Ledger Account Code to be used for reallocation of costs on this
work order.
Reallocation Project
The Project Number to reallocate the work order costs to. This field only applies if the work order
project is blank.
Reallocation Method
The method to be used to reallocate the work order cost. Entry is validated against RM Table File.
Reallocation Freq.
(Reallocation Frequency)
Indicates when reallocation of this work order occurs:
C
Indicates reallocation occurs on a cyclic basis (daily, weekly, etc.).
Indicates reallocation occurs when the work order is finalised.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
337
Variance Account
The account to which cost variances are to be reallocated.

Credit Expense Element
The expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs.
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE DETAILS
Customer Number
The customer number to be invoiced. The adjacent field displays the customers name.
PO No./Item
The purchase order number and purchase order item number that indicates the source of the work
required.
Revenue Code
The revenue code for the work order. This field is validated against Table File RV - Revenue Code.
Billable Indicator
Indicates whether the work order units are billable.

Billing Level Ind
(Billing Level Indicator)

Indicates the billing level to be applied to this work order. Valid options are:
P - the Project level is to be used for invoicing.
W - the MSF740 record type is to be used for invoicing.
Y - the Work Order is available to be billed.
Amount Invoiced
This field displays the amount to be invoiced for the purchase order and item indicated.
Standard Value
This field displays the standard value of the purchase items.

Quote Value
Enter the value quoted for this work order.

This field is mandatory if the reallocation method selected is based on the quoted value. Otherwise,
This field is optional. When this field is modified check the Actual Costs Reallocated to see if Quote
value has reached this limit. Quote Value can then only be increased. This modification rule applies
only to Non-Billable Work Orders.
Note: Total Quote Value entered is to be reallocated at the frequency specified, eg. A cyclic frequency
reallocates the total quote value when the Reallocation process is run.
2009 Mincom
338
Work Orders - 3620
+/- Margin Percent
Enter a % if the Quoted Value is in use (refer to Reallocation Method field). This will increase the
quoted value used to create the invoice by this percentage. If this field is completed, the reallocation
amount is calculated as follows:
Actual Cost/Earned Value +/- Percent Specified
This field cannot be completed if the reallocation method is based on the quoted value and the work
order is not billable.
Recharge Value Limit
Recharge Value Limit Enter a number in the range 0 to 9999999999.99 to indicate that the reallocated
costs cannot be greater than the limit specified.
If this field is completed, the reallocation amount is checked against it. If the reallocation amount is
greater, only up to the specified limit is reallocated to the Costs account. The difference is held
against the work order until the limit is increased.
This field only applies when the work order reallocation is based on actual costs.
Notes: When the Recharge Value Limit field is modified, check the actual costs reallocated to see if
the recharge value limit has reached this limit. Only the recharge value limit increases. An
appropriate error message displays when the recharge value limit is attempted to be decreased. This
modification rule only applies to Non-Billable Work Orders.
Action
B
Review Purchase Order

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
339
MSM62TA - Create/Maintain Incident Work

Order
This screen enables you to create or modify work orders for an incident by entering a minimum of
data.
On initial entry, a blank window is displayed, except when the program is not called from the
MSM000B - Main Menu screen.
A Standard Job can be specified as a template for creating the work order.
If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62PREFIX. If
one exists it uses it as a template for work order creation. If no prefix is entered, the program will try
to use a default Standard Job (M62TMW). The same processing as for the prefix input applies.
Control can be transferred to the Review Standard Job Information program (MSO691) or the Review
Equipment/EGI Relationships for Standard Job program (MSO692) to search for and/or review
standard job information before the update is committed. This can be done by:
Entry of ? in the standard job number field. This results in control being transferred to MSO691.
Entry of an Equipment Reference and pressing F9. This results in control being transferred to
MSO692, with the Equipment Number being passed.
Once a Standard Job has been found and entered, the window redisplays with information defaulted
from that job. If window details have been entered prior to the selection of a Standard Job, the
Standard Job details merges with the entered details. That is, the Standard Job details do not overwrite
the previously entered details.
In Create mode the Work Order Prefix field is displayed. In Modify mode the Work Order status is
displayed instead of the Work Order Prefix.
If a Work Order Number is not entered, the system allocates a number according to the prefix entered.
It displays the allocated number for confirmation prior to update.
Defaults can be defined for the following fields via the Standard Default facility (MSM051A).
Standard Job - STD-JOB-NO1

Work Order Number
The work order number. Or Allow the program to assign a number in Create mode. In the latter case,
either leave the prefix field blank to let the program assign the whole number, or enter the prefix and
let the program assign the next number for this prefix. Valid prefixes and associated last-used
sequence number are held on the System Control file (MSF000).
If a Work Order Number is entered and the work order already exists the details is displayed to allow
maintenance. Any details already entered on the screen is to be overwritten.
A work order prefix only applies to creations. In Modify mode the work order status displays in this
field.
2009 Mincom
340
Work Orders - 3620
Related Work Order
Enter the related work order related to the existing work order.
Standard Job
Enter a valid Standard Job Number to be used as a template to create a work order. Entry in this field
applies only to creations. If left blank, it defaults as follows:
If a user-defined default Standard Job exists, this is used. Otherwise, one of the following applies:
For the work order prefix entered, if a related Standard Job in the format M62PREFIX is on
file, it is used.
If no prefix is entered, Standard Job M62TMW must be on file.
When using a Standard Job as a template, the program only defaults those fields not entered by the
user.
Description

Definition tab
EQUIPMENT DETAILS
The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed. Refer to the Equipment
Numbering Standards for the format of Equipment Reference input.
This field is mandatory if the standard job selected does not contain an Account Code or a
Reallocation Account Code.
The Equipment Reference is also validated according to the costing flag held against the item of
equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). The following occurs, depending on the value of the
costing flag:
A
Equipment Reference has costing allowed. Equipment Reference entered is allowed.
Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. A warning is displayed but the
Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. An error is displayed and the
Equipment Reference is not allowed.
Component Code
Enter the code indicating the specific sub-assembly that the work is to be performed. Entry is validated
against the Table File CO - Table File. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this
item of equipment by examining its componentry profile. If no specific profile is found for this item of
equipment but the equipment has a group identifier defined, then the componentry profile of the group
identifier is checked. If no profile is found, any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid.
Entry is only allowed if an Equipment Number or reference has been entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
341

Modifier Code
MAINTENANCE DETAILS
Originator
Work Order Type
Enter the Work Order Type Code that applies to this work order. Entry is validated against the Table
File MT - Table File.
Plan Priority
Enter the planned priority that applies to this work order. Entry is validated against the Table File PY Table File.
Maintenance Type
Work Group
Enter the identification of the work group performing the work. Entry is validated on the Work Group
master file (MSF720).
This field is optional, but either the Work Group or Assign To field must be completed.
Assign To
Enter the ID of the person that this job is to be assigned. Entry is validated against the Table File RC
Table File or the Employee master file, for integrated Payroll users.
This field is optional, but either the Work Group or Assign To field must be completed.
COMPLETION DETAILS
2009 Mincom
342
Work Orders - 3620
Completed Code
Enter the completion code. The code is to be applies to this work order. Entry is validated against the
Table File SC Table File. This field is optional
Completed By
Enter the ID of the person completing the work order. Entry is validated against the Table File RC
Table File or the Employee master file, for integrated Payroll users.
This field is optional. However, if a Completed Code has been entered and this field is left blank, the
system defaults this field to the contents of Assign To or the Originator ID field, in that order.
Completed Date/Time
Enter the date and time on which the work order is completed. This date cannot be in the future.
This field is optional. However, if a Completed Code has been entered and this field is left blank, the
system defaults the Completed Date/Time to today's date and the current time.
Job Codes tab
Job Code
This section is reserved for work order JDC (Job Duration Code) information display only. If the work
order is being created, this screen displays the newly created Job Code (to be attached to the newly
created work order). If the work order already exists, this screen displays up to four Job Duration
Codes that are attached to the work order.
Note: The data in this area is not available for update. Use the MSM62CA window (via action code
'D' on this window) to modify or add to the JDC information on this work order.
Job Duration tab
Enter the identity of the part causing failure. Enter is not validated, but can be useful for future
reference. This field is optional
Enter the estimated duration time in hours.

Hours can be entered as a number in the range 0 to 99999.99, or in a standard time format of hours,
minutes and seconds with a delimiter of :, . or space; eg., HH:MM.
Job Duration Code
Enter the duration code to identify the type of downtime related to this work order. Entry is validated
against the Table File JI Table File.
This field is optional However, this field must be entered if the Duration Hours, Start Time, Stop Time
or description for the incident are entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
343
MSM62VA - Review Incident Logsheets

Use MSM62VA to enter selection criteria to review Incident Logsheet Entries in MSM62VB Review Incident Logsheet Entries.
Work Group
Enter the ID of the Work Group for which the logsheet entries are to be reviewed.
Entry is mandatory if the Date or Shift fields are entered. Otherwise, it is optional. If this field is left
blank, entries for all work groups will display.
Entry is validated against the Work Group master File MSF720
Date
Enter the date for which logsheet entries are to be reviewed.

Entry is mandatory if the Shift field is entered. Otherwise, it is optional.
If this field is left blank, all entries for work groups that satisfy the remaining selection criteria are
displayed, regardless of their date.
Incident Status
Select one of the following options to restrict the search and display of logsheet entries to those with a
status that corresponds to the code entered:
C
Closed
Open
If left blank, all entries that satisfy the selection criteria are displayed, regardless of their status.
Originator
Enter or right-click to search for a Responsibility Code to restrict the search to items raised by the
specified person.
Entry is validated against Table File RC or the Employee master file, for integrated Payroll users.
Equipment Reference
Enter an equipment ID to restrict the search to items that correspond to the equipment selected.
Refer to the Equipment Number Standards for the format of input.
2009 Mincom
344
Work Orders - 3620
Component Code
Enter a Component Code from the drop-down list to restrict the search to items that correspond to the
component selected. This field can only be entered if an Equipment Reference has been entered. Entry
is validated against Table File CO.
Maintenance Type
Enter a Maintenance Type Code from the drop-down list to restrict the search to items corresponding
to the Maintenance Type selected.
Entry is validated against Table File MT.
Job Duration Code
Enter a Job Duration Code from the drop-down list to restrict the search to items corresponding to the
Job Duration Code selected.
Entry is validated against Table File JI.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
345
MSM62VB - Review Incident Logsheet

Entries
Use MSM62VB to display summary information for Incident Logsheet Entries.
Incident Logsheet Entries are displayed based on the selection criteria entered in MSM62VA.
The fields displayed on this screen are for review only and cannot be modified.
Work Group
The Work Group of the incident.

This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM62VA.
Entry is validated against the Work Group master File MSF720.
Date
The date of the incident.

Shift
The shift code of the shift during which the incident occurred.
Entry is validated against Table File SH. If an associated value on the SH table file designates the
code as a Production Allocation Shift Code, the shift code will not be allowed.
Start Time
The time that the incident occurred.

Equipment Reference
The Equipment Number or Reference ID of the equipment related to the incident.

Component Code
The ID of the component related to the incident.

Modifier Code
The Modifier Code for the component related to the incident.

A description of the incident.

2009 Mincom
346
Work Orders - 3620
Maintenance Type
The Maintenance Type Code for the incident.

Job Duration Code
The Job Duration Code for the incident.

Originator Identification
The Responsibility Code of the person raising the incident.

Duration Hrs
The number of hours taken by the incident.

End Time
The time at which the incident ended.

Work Order
The Work Order which applies to the incident.

Status
The status of the incident.

Extended Text
An * in the Extended Text field indicates that extended description exists for that incident.
A N in the Extended Text field indicates that no extended description exists for that incident.
Corrective Action
The corrective action taken in relation to the incident.

Action
E
Review Extended Description MSM097A
Review Equipment History MSM633A
Review Work Order Details MSM621D
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
347
MSM62WA - Create/Maintain Shortform

Work Order
Allow creation/maintenance of a work order and a single task using one screen.
A standard job can be specified as a template for creating the work order. If a prefix has been entered
the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62W <prefix> and if one exists it uses it
as a template for the work order creation. If no prefix is entered the program tries to use a default
Standard Job M62WMW and the same processing as for the prefix input applies.
Control can be transferred to the Review Standard Job Information (MSO691) or the Review
Equipment/EGI Relationships for Standard Job program (MSO692) to search for and/or review
standard job information before the update is committed. This can be done by:
Entry of a ? in the standard job number field. This result in control being transferred to MSO691.
Entry of an equipment reference and function key F9. This result in control being transferred to
MSO692, with the equipment number being passed.
Once a standard job has been found and entered, the screen re-displays with information defaulted
from the standard job. Where screen details have been entered prior to the selection of a standard job,
the standard job details merges with the entered details, NOT OVERWRITE.
Printer name field (PRINTER-NAME1) can be defaulted via the Standard Default Facility (MSO051).
Work Order Prefix/Number
(MSF000).
Parent Work Order
Standard Job
Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order. Entry is only
applicable to creations.
This field is optional but defaults is applied as follows:
2009 Mincom
348
Work Orders - 3620
If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62W
<prefix> and if one exists it uses it as a template for the Work Order creation.
If no prefix was entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job M62WMW and the same
processing as for the prefix input applies.
When using a Standard Job as a template, the program only defaults those fields that have not been
entered by the user.
This is a single task creation window, therefore only one task is to be copied from the template
standard job regardless of the number of tasks under it.
Job Description

This is to be used as both the work order and the task description.
Definition tab
EQUIPMENT DETAILS
costing flag:
A
Component Code
examining it's componentry profile. If no specific profile is found for this item of equipment but the
equipment has a group identifier defined, then the componentry profile of the group identifier is
checked. If no profile is found than any component code can be entered as long as it is a valid
component code.
This field is optional but only be allowed where an equipment number or reference has been entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
349
Modifier Code
This field is optional but only be allowed where a component code has been entered.
Originator
Enter the responsibility code of the person originating this project or sub-project.
This field is mandatory. Entry is validated against the Table File RC - Responsibility Code, or for
integrated payroll users, the employee master file.
Depending on the access of the user, this field may either be protected or unprotected and defaulted to
the user ID.
Originator Priority
Order Priority Code. The priority code numbers are between 1 and 99 inclusive.
This is one of two work order priorities, the other being the planners priority.
User Status
Select the User Status from the drop-down list.

The codes which display are user defined and are contained in the WS table file.
Work Order Type
If Ellipse determines that the equipment entered is still under warranty, then the warranty work order
type is defaulted.
Planned Start Date
This is consequently the most important job planning data item.
Maintenance Type
2009 Mincom
350
Work Orders - 3620
For maintenance related work orders, this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order
activity.
Planned Start
scheduling the task for the work group. Consequently, it is the most important job planning data item.
Project Number
Enter the project number to be associated with this work order. Entry is validated on the Project
Control file (MSF660).
If the project number is under AFUDC control, then so must be the Cost Code/Account. Otherwise the
Cost Code/Account can not be an AFUDC controlled code.
Work Group
file (MSF720). This is used for both the work order and the task.
If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed, entry in this field cause the work order to be
This field is mandatory if an assigned to responsibility code has not been entered, otherwise This field
is optional.
Printer
Enter the identification of the printer to be used to immediately print the Work Order after update.
Entry is validated against Table File type PR. This defaults to the user's default printer when screen is
initiated.
This field is mandatory if Action 'K' or 'W' is selected, otherwise This field is optional
Assigned To
Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work order is assigned. Entry is validated
against the RC Table file or the Employee Master file for integrated PAYROLL users. This is to be
used for both the work order and the task.
Entry is optional.
Cost Centre or Account
Enter the Cost Centre or Account to which this job is to be charged. This code is used to create the
transaction.
If no value is entered, the default value is from that held against the standard job on the window (if the
standard job's value is available), otherwise it is from that held against either the equipment reference
or the project number, depending on the costing option set.
If the Capital Work Order has any associated costs, then the costing information cannot be modified.
If the code entered has a segment that is under AFUDC project control, then an AFUDC controlled
project must be entered. Otherwise an AFUDC controlled project can not be entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
351

Job Codes tab
Job Code
Enter the codes to classify the Work Order. Entry is validated against Table File types W0 to W8
inclusive.
Ellipse allows up to ten codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes but only nine codes are
displayed on this screen. Update of non displayed codes can be done via the Maintain
Code/Completion Information screen (MSM62CA).
The use of these codes is completely user defined and can include such things as:
Failure Codes
Part Defect Codes
Work Classification Codes
The name of each code (its use) is user defined in Table File type XX and appears on the screen.
Certain codes are mandatory, and this is determined if the sixth special character of the code on Table
File type XX is Y for mandatory. If a code type is not defined in Table File type XX, it will not appear
on the window.
Costs tab
Unit of Work
Enter a number from 1 to 9999999.99 to indicate the number of Units of Work to be covered by this
work order. This field is optional default is Standard Job units required.
Unit of Work
Enter a valid Unit of Work from the UW Table file that is relevant to this Work Order. This field is
optional but is mandatory if Units Required is entered. Default is Standard Job Unit of work.
Enter the estimated duration time in hours. This is the requirement to complete the job.
Hours can be entered as a number in the range of 0 to 99999.99 or as standard time format of hours,
minutes and seconds delimited by :, . and space. For example HH:MM.
ESTIMATED COSTS
These fields are used to record the estimated cost of the job, for comparison to actuals.
(i) Create Mode
Enter the estimated costs within the following categories:
Resource (Hours)
Resource (Cost)
Material (Cost)
Equipment (Cost)
2009 Mincom
352
Work Orders - 3620
Other (Cost)
Total (Cost)
These values default to Standard Job values when a Standard Job is specified. When a Standard Job
and Units Required are specified, these values are calculated by multiplying corresponding values on
the Standard Job by a factor of (Specified Units Required/ Standard Job Units Required).
If the Units Required field is changed, these fields are recalculated but not displayed unless the
window field has been overtyped with spaces. The use may alter the values as displayed and/or have
selected values re-calculated by (1) changing Units Required AND (2) blanking out the window
field(s) of those to be re-calculated.
In some cases, it may not be possible to determine the segments of cost when planning a job i.e.
whether labour costs are going to be incurred or contractors (other) costs. Ellipse therefore allows any
combination of fields to be entered as follows:
if one or more segments are entered, and a total, all fields are accepted as entered, except that the
total will be checked and changed if necessary
if one or more segments are entered with no total, the system cross adds and inserts a total
a total can be entered with no segments.
Hours may also be input in standard time format of hours, minutes and seconds with delimiters of :, .
and space. e.g., . HH:MM.
(ii) Modify Mode
Any of these fields may be altered as required (spaces acceptable). In this mode, no reference is made
to the associated Standard Job values.
Action
9
Maintain WO Task Job Instructions
Print WO Job Card

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
353
2009 Mincom
354
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62XA - Create Work Orders from a Std

Job Plan Parent Std Job
MSM62XA enables you to create a Parent Work Order and its subordinate Work Orders from a
Standard Job Plan or a Parent Standard Job.
Standard Job/Parent Standard Job Indicator
Enter the indicator to be used to create the Parent Work Order and Work Orders. The indicators are J
for Standard Job Plan and P for Parent Standard Job.
Standard Job/Parent Standard Job
Enter the Standard Job Plan or Parent Standard Job Number to be used as a template.
Parent Work Order Prefix
Enter a valid Parent Work Order prefix. Entry is validated against the System Control file (MSF000).
Entry of a Prefix is optional.
Parent Work Order
Either enter a Parent Work Order Number that is not already used or leave this field blank for Ellipse
to automatically assign the next available Parent Work Order Number.
Description

Equipment Reference
Enter the default Equipment Reference or the override Equipment Reference if the entire job is for a
single piece of equipment.
Override
Enter Y for Yes or N for No.

Yes indicates that the specified Equipment should override the equipment reference on every resulting
Work Order.
No indicates that the specified Equipment Reference will only default on a Work Order where no
equipment reference existed on the Standard Jobs templates being used.
You can only enter Y if an entry has been made for Equipment.
Work Order Type
Enter the Work Order type.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
355
Entry is validated against Table File WO. If entered this Work Order Type overrides the Work Order
type details found on the Standard Jobs being used to create Work Orders.
Work Order Prefix
Enter the Work Order prefix to be used when automatically generating Work Order Numbers.
Entry is validated against the District Control file.
Maintenance Type
Enter or select the maintenance type from the drop-down list. For maintenance-related work orders,
this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order activity.
Entry in this field is validated against Table File MT - Maintenance Type.
If entered, the maintenance type overrides the Maintenance Type details found on the Standard Jobs
being used to create Work Orders.
Date Required
Enter the date on which the entire job must be completed.

Cost Centre/Account
Enter the cost centre or account to which this job is to be charged.

Entry is mandatory if no default or override Equipment Number is entered. The default is the cost
centre associated with the default/override Equipment Number.
Default Plan Start Date
Enter the Planned Start Date to be entered against Work Orders generated for which no specific
Planned Start Date is entered.
Originator
Entry in this field is mandatory.
Work Group
Enter the work group to which this job is assigned.

Entry is validated against the Work Group Master file. If the Maintenance Scheduling module is
installed, completing this field causes the resulting Work Orders to be scheduled when a scheduling
run is next processed for this work group, provided the generated Work Order:
Has a planned start date
Contains at least one task
Is authorised after being added to the entered work group
2009 Mincom
356
Work Orders - 3620
Standard Job
Enter a valid Standard Job for creation of a Work Order in addition to the Standard Jobs already
associated with the entered Standard Job Plan or Parent Standard Job.
Parent Standard Job
Enter a valid Parent Standard Job for creation of Work Orders in addition to the Standard Jobs already
associated with the main Parent Standard Job or Standard Job Plan. If a Parent Standard Job is entered
it is expanded into its subordinate Standard Jobs.
You can only complete this field if the Standard Job field is blank. You cannot complete this field
when you are creating Work Orders from a Parent Standard Job.
Description
This field displays the description of each subordinate standard job or parent standard job.
Equipment
Enter the Equipment Reference for this Work Order. A default equipment will be allocated in one of
the following ways, as appropriate:
The equipment related to the Standard Job, if one exists
The equipment related to the Parent Standard Job, if one exists
The equipment related to the Standard Job Plan, if one exists
The default equipment entered at the top of the window for the Parent Work Order
In each case, if a non-unique Equipment Reference is found, the Equipment Number is not defaulted.
If the Equipment Override flag is set on for this on the window header information, that Equipment
Number is allocated.
Component
Enter the code indicating the specific sub-assembly on which the work is to be performed. Entry is
validated against Table File CO.
You can only complete this field if an Equipment Number or Reference has been entered. Otherwise,
it is optional.
Modifier
Work Order
Either enter a Work Order Number that is not already used or leave this field blank for Ellipse to
automatically assign the next available Work Order Number.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
357
Planned Start
Priority
A valid Priority Code. Entry is validated against Table File PI - Priority Codes.
Unit Work
Enter a valid unit of work. Entry is validated against Table File UW.
Rate Per Period
Enter the charging rate of the unit of work per period.

Quantity of Work
Enter the quantity of work required to complete the job in terms of the unit of work.
Action
C
Maintain Work Order codes and completion information MSM62CA.
Maintain Work Order duration information MSM62EA.
Maintain Work Order extended description MSM096A.
Maintain Work Order general information MSM62AA.
Maintain Work Order Tracing Information MSM62DA. This action is only available if Module
3650 has been installed.
Maintain Work Order planning information MSM62BA.
Review Equipment Relationships for a Standard Job Plan/Parent Standard Job/Standard Job
MSM692A. This action is only available if Module 3690 has been installed.
Maintain Work Order Reallocation Info MSM62RA.
Maintain Work Order Task Details MSM623A. Action is only available if Module 3620 has
been installed.
Exclude this standard job from creation of Work Orders.
2009 Mincom
358
Work Orders - 3620
MSM62YA - Create/Maintain Work Order

For Equipment
This screen enables you to create work orders for equipment from minimal information entered on the
window.
This window can be used to create a work order or amend an existing work order. Existing work
orders for the Equipment Reference (and optionally the Component Code and the Modifier Code) are
displayed in the bottom half of the window before a work order is created. These work orders are
displayed in the reverse sequence of the date raised within work order status (open/authorised/closed).
Work Order Prefix/Number
(MSF000).
Standard Job
Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order.
If a user-defined default standard job exists, this is to be used. Otherwise, one of the following applies:
If a work order prefix has been entered, the program looks for a default standard job in the format
M62Y<PREFIX >. If one exists the program uses it as a template for work order creation.
If no work order prefix has been entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job
(M62YMW). If one exists, the program uses it as a template for work order creation.
When the program uses a standard job as a template, it only defaults fields that have not been entered.
Job Description

This is to be used as both the work order and the task description.
Printer
When you display this screen the Printer field contains a default printer. For action code K, the printer
name is used to print the task.
User can blank out the default value or specify the required value.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
359
The printer name is validated against Table File PR. This initially defaults to your default printer.
costing flag:
A

Component Code
examining its componentry profile. If no specific profile is found for this item of equipment but it has
a group identifier defined, the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. If no profile is
found, any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid.
User can only complete this field if an Equipment Number or Reference has been entered.
Modifier Code
User can only completer this field if a Component Code has been entered.
Equipment Status
Enter a valid equipment status or select from the Table File ES - Equipment Status.
Originator
Enter the Employee Id of the person who created the Work Order. Entry is validated against the
Employee file. Depending on you access level, this field is either protected or unprotected and
defaulted to the user id. This field is mandatory
2009 Mincom
360
Work Orders - 3620
Originator Priority
This is one of two work order priorities, the other being the planner's priority (see MSM62BA
Maintain Work Order - Planning Information)
Work Order Type
Maintenance Type
Date Raised
Enter the date that the work order was raised. The default is today's date. User cannot enter a date in
the future.
Date Completed
Enter the date that the work order was completed. This field defaults to today's date if the Completed
By field is completed.
Completed By
Entry is validated against the Employee file (MSF810).

This field is mandatory if the Date Completed field is completed. Otherwise, This field is optional.
Work Group
file (MSF720). This is used for both the work order and the task.
If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed, entry in this field cause the work order to be
Cost Centre/Account
Enter the cost centre or account to which this job is to be charged. This code is used to create the
transaction.
The default value is taken from that held against the Standard Job (if a Standard Job is entered and one
is held against the standard job). Otherwise, it defaults from the value held against the Equipment
Reference. This defaulted value can be changed by overtyping it.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
361
JOB CODES
Enter up to three Work Order Job Codes to classify the work order. Entry is validated against Table
Files W0, W1 and W2, respectively.
The name of each code (i.e., its use) is defined by the user in Table File XX and appears on this
window. A code is mandatory when the sixth special character of the code on Table File XX is Y
(mandatory). If a code is not defined in Table File XX, it does not appear on this screen.
Action
A
Review WO Summary Information
Create Tasks
Review WO Code Completion Information
Create Issue Requisition for WO
Print WO Job Card
List APLs
2009 Mincom
362
X
Work Orders - 3620
Action
9
Reference Codes
Review W/O Summary Information
Create Tasks
Review WO Codes & Completion Information
Review W/O Completion Comments
Print WO Job Card
List APLs
Review W/O Purchasing Information
Maintain W/O Planning Information
Maintain W/O General Information
Update Labour Costs

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
363
MSM633A - Review Complete Maintenance

History
This screen displays a summary of all maintenance actions on an item of equipment. The maintenance
actions are displayed in chronological sequence.
Equipment Reference
Enter the Equipment Number or Reference to start or restart the history review.
The equipment number or reference is validated according to the numbering standards for equipment.
Date
Enter a date at which to start or restart the review.

Action
C
Review Extended Completion Comments
Review Maintenance Scheduling Task
Review Work Order Task Details
Review Work Order Details
2009 Mincom
364
Work Orders - 3620
MSM854A - Labour Costing Transaction

Entry
This screen is used to enter new labour costing transactions and to maintain existing labour costing
transactions that have not been processed by MSB857 - Labour Trans. Posting Update Control Report.
Any number of transactions per date, work order or project combination can be entered in this screen.
However, if you need to enter multiple rows for an employee, use the MSM850A - Maintain Labour
Costing Transactions or MSE857 - Employee Weekly Labour Costing screen.
This screen can also be used to modify transactions where data has been imported into Ellipse using an
interface file, however the transaction has been rejected due to invalid data.
After the Date, WO/Project and W/O or Project No fields have been completed the MSM854A Labour Costing Transaction Entry screen must be refreshed. Employees assigned to this work order
using a work group automatically populate the Employee and Employee Name fields in the order
they joined the project or work group.
Hint: There are two screens provided by Mincom Ellipse to enter timesheet data into Labour
Costing. The MSM850A - Maintain Labour Costing Transactions or MSE857 - Employee Weekly
Labour Costing screen and MSM854A - Labour Costing Transaction Entry.
Both provide the facility to enter time spent by individual employees against Work Orders, Projects or
Equipment codes.
The MSM850A or MSE857 screen is formatted to assist data entry for several activities of an
employee. The MSM854A - Labour Costing Transaction Entry is formatted to assist data entry for
several employees entered against a single activity.
Date
Enter the date labour is to be costed to a job. A date in the future cannot be entered.
District
This field displays the district where the Work Order or Project belongs. The district name displays in
the second field.
WO/Project
Enter either a W for a Work Order labour costing entry or P for a Project labour costing entry.
This field is mandatory and indicates whether the next field displayed is for a Work Order or a Project.
W/O or Project No
Enter either a work order or project number. The WO/ Project indicator is used to determine whether
a Work Order or Project Number is entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
365
Employee ID
Enter the Employee Code assigned to the employee for this labour costing transaction. Alternatively, if
a Work Group has been assigned to the Work Order being entered, the employees assigned to this
work group default to this field.
Employee Name
This field displays the employee name.

District
Enter the employee's district in this field.

Labour Class
Enter a valid Labour Cost Classification. This field is validated against the Table File LC - Labour
Classifications.
The entry in this field defaults from the employees' Payroll Costing Record as maintained on the
MSM826A - Maintain Employee Costing Details screen.
Earnings Class
Enter a valid Earnings Classification. This field is validated against the Table File EA - Earnings
Classification.
The default for this field is 001.
The Labour Cost Classification and the Earnings Classification combination is validated against the
Labour Costing Rates file. If this combination does not exist the entry is rejected.
If the employees district is not the same as your login district, the Labour Cost Classification and the
Earnings Classification combination is validated against the employees District Code.
Hours
Enter the hours worked for this labour costing transaction in the format HH.MM (for example, eight
and a half hours is entered as 08.30). If this job was quoted as a fixed price or flat rate, you can leave
this field blank and enter the value of the job in the Value field.
You enter data in either the Hours field or the Value field, but not both. When data is entered in this
field the Value field is automatically updates data as display only.
Value
Enter the value of the job in this field, if this job was quoted as a fixed price or flat rate.
You enter data in either the Hours field or the Value field but not both.
2009 Mincom
366
Work Orders - 3620
Equipment Ref.
Enter a valid Equipment Number. If this field is left blank, the Equipment Number is updated from the
relevant work order or project.
If the employee's district is different from your login district, entry is validated against your login
district instead of the employee's district.
W/O Task
Enter a valid work order task number to allocate labour costs to a specific task for this work
order. This field is not completed where the WO/Project field indicates a project.
Account/Cost Centre
Enter the account code, cost code or cost centre to which the labour costing transaction is to be posted.
When an account is not specified, the cost centre is derived from the specified work order, project or
equipment item. If none of these items are specified, the system attempts to derive the cost centre from
the Labour Classification debit account (MSM855B). When this has not been maintained, the home
cost centre for the employee (MSM826A) or their position (MSM8PUA) is used.
Units Comp
(Units Completed)
This field displays the units of work completed since the last labour costing transaction was recorded
for this employee. This allows work in progress to be monitored for the corresponding work order or
project.
%
(Percentage)
Enter a valid percentage in the range 0 to 100 to indicate the percent of work completed to date for the
corresponding work order/task/project. This field is protected if the Show Work in Progress Details
flag is set to N at the district level.
Cde
(Completion Code)
Enter the status code for the completion of the work order/work task. This field is validated against
Table File SC - Maintenance Completion.
Status
This field displays the current status of the Labour Costing transaction. This field can only be updated
using the action codes. Access to all of the action codes is limited by security.
The table below displays valid status values:
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
367
Confirmed Labour Costing Transaction
Processed Labour Costing Transaction
Rejected Labour Costing Transaction
Action
C
Confirm Labour Costing Transaction
Delete Transaction
Insert multiple transactions. This action code provides the option to jump directly to the
MSM850A - Maintain Labour Costing Transactions or MSE857 - Employee Weekly Labour
Costing screen where multiple employee transactions can be entered.
Reset Labour Costing Transaction
2009 Mincom
368
Work Orders - 3620
MSQ140 - Requisition
The MSQ140 - Search for Requisition program can be used to retrieve and display information on
requisitions. This program can also be used to create, modify and delete the following types of
requisition:
Normal issue or warehouse requisition where the goods are stocked items
Purchase requisition where the goods are not catalogued in Ellipse, and may have to be purchased
Credit/Return requisition where the items are being returned
Loan requisitions where stock items are issued for a pre-determined period of time, at which time
a return requisition is automatically generated
There are eight search tabs on the MSQ140 - Search for Requisition screen, each of which allows you
to search for requisitions using different criteria. After the requisition is selected other tabs display that
can be used to review existing data, create, modify and delete data.
MSQ140 - Search for Requisition
There are eight tabs you can use to identify your search parameters. These tabs and the selection
criteria specific to each Search tab are as follows:
Search
Issue Requisition Number, Purchase Requisition Number, Originating District,

Show All Items for Requisition.
Stock Code
Stock Code, Originating District, Warehouse.

Additional filters for the Stock Code search tab are Date Created From and Date
Created To.
Part No
Part Number, Requisition Status.

Additional filters for the Part No search tab are Date Created From, Date Created
To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only).
Material Group
Code
Material Group Code, Originating District, Requisition Status.

Additional filters for the Material Group Code are Date Created From, Date
Created To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only).
Requested By
Requested By, Originating District, Requisition Status.

Additional filters for Requested By search tab are Date Created From, Date
Created To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only).
Costing
Work Order, Originating District, Project No, Equipment No, Search Method,
Cost Centre, Requisition Status.
Additional filters for Costing search tab are Date Created From, Date Created To
up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only).
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
APL No
369
Equipment Group ID, Equipment Reference, Component Code, Component

Modifier Code, Sequence Number, Requisition Status.
Additional filters for the APL search tab Date Created From, Date Created To up
to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only).
Consolidated Req Consolidated Req No, Warehouse, Originating District, Requisition Status.
Additional filters for the Consolidated Req search tab are Date Created From and
Date Created To.
MSQ140 - Requisition

District Code
This field displays the originating District Code for the requisition.
Status
This field displays the status of the requisition.

Req No
This field displays the requisition number of the requisition.

Pur Req No
This field displays the number allocated to the purchase requisition. Purchase requisitions are used for
non-stocked items.
Req Type
This field displays the requisition type.

Tabs
General
Delivery/Priority
Questions
Purchase Details
Other
Items
Catalogued sub-tab
Non-Catalogued sub-tab
APL sub-tab
LinkOne sub-tab
2009 Mincom
370
Work Orders - 3620
General tab
In the General tab, you can enter the information required to create a requisition such as:
Person who requested the material
Equipment, work order or cost centres to which the goods should be charged

Requested By
Enter or right-click and search for the supply customer or employee ID requesting the material. This
field is mandatory.
Date Required By
Enter the date on which the requesting employee or supply customer requires the requisitioned items
to be supplied. This field is mandatory. The date may not be in the past.
This field defaults to today's date if the Def.Req.Date=Today indicator in the District Control file is
set to Y. Otherwise, it is blank.
When a work order task plan start date is added or modified and there are associated requisitions that
are either not printed (Issue Requisition) or not ordered (Purchase Requisition) the table file - MWDO
checks to determine if this date is to be updated. This field is updated by the same number of days the
Plan Start Date has changed. However, if a Plan Start Date is added to a work order task the required
by date on the requisition is updated to the day before the work order task plan start date.
This field can also be completed automatically by Ellipse, on the basis of the Priority Code on the
Delivery/Priority tab.
Authorised By
This field is optional and the default is the ID of the requesting employee. If the entry in Authorised
By is different to that in Requested By, all requisitions will be referred to the position of the employee
nominated for authorisation.
Original Warehouse
Enter the warehouse code of the warehouse from which the item is being requisitioned. This field
displays if there are multiple warehouses. The default is the District Home/Default Warehouse;
however, defaults for users can be set up using the MSM051A - Maintain Screen Defaults screen.
Inventory Category
Enter an inventory category. The inventory category can be selected from the drop-down list. This
field is mandatory if the Warehouse Management Module is enabled and the item is flagged for
category management.
It can be defaulted to a preset value using the MSM051A - Maintain Screen Defaults screen or a
default from the District Control file.
Entry is validated against the Table File IG - Inventory Category.
Transaction Type
Enter a transaction type. The transaction type can be selected from the drop-down list. This field is
mandatory. It can be defaulted to a preset value using the MSM051A - Maintain Screen Defaults
screen.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
371
Entry is validated against the Table File IT - Issue Transaction Type.

Protected Indicator
Select this check box if the items on this requisition are to be protected. The requisition items are
included in the recommended order calculation, regardless of the Required By date. The status of the
quantity requisition is Dues Out, rather than Reserved.
COSTING
Enter the work order, project cost centre or equipment reference that is to be charged for the items.
The definition of mandatory fields in this grid is determined by the Costing Option on your district
control file.
The costing method entered in this grid is the default costing for this requisition. Costing can be split
over two costing entities.
Whilst it may not be necessary to enter data in all fields, the identification of at least one costing entity
is mandatory.
Ind
Enter P if the requisition is to be charged to a project. Enter W if the requisition is to be charged to a

work order.
Wk Ord/Proj
Enter work order or project number. Right-click and search for a Work Order or Project if the number
is not known.
Equipment Ref
Enter or right-click to search for an equipment reference.

If Structured Plant Nos is flagged as Y on the System Control File and a plant number exists for the
equipment reference, that number always displays instead of the equipment number.
If the Plant Number is a duplicate, you are prompted to resolve the duplicates.
If a work order/project or equipment reference has been entered in the general costing grid, you can
use Show to return associated details.
Cost Centre
Enter a cost centre or right-click to search for a cost centre if the number is unknown.
% (Percentage)
This field defaults to 100% on the first costing allocation entry and zero for the second. If you enter
more than one costing allocation, the total allocation percent must add up to 100%. This percentage is
used to distribute the cost between the costing allocations.
If costing defaults are not used and you wish to requisition stock and non-stock items on a normal
requisition with the same costing details, when you enter the general costing details they automatically
default to the purchase costing grid on the Purchase Details tab.
2009 Mincom
372
Work Orders - 3620
If screen defaults are used and costing details are defaulted into the general grid, therefore not
requiring you to click in the grid, no costing details are defaulted into the purchase costing grid.
If changes are made to the costing that was initially entered, those changes are not automatically
defaulted. Only the initial costing defaults to another costing grid.
Cost District
The default district for costing is always the current district. If the district to which the requisition is to
be costed differs from the current district, select the correct district from the drop-down list.
This functionality allows requisitions raised in one district to be costed to another. The District field
only displays if you have multiple-district access and appropriate security access.
Delivery/Priority tab
Use the Delivery/ Priority tab to enter delivery instructions and priority details.
Picking Slip / Delivery Instructions
Enter any delivery instructions or picking details to be communicated to the issuing storeperson. This
information is printed on the picking slip. Up to 60 characters can be entered per line.
Once a requisition number has been assigned, if longer instructions are required, click More.
Priority Code
Select a priority code from the drop-down list.

This field is mandatory only if the field is set as mandatory on Table File XX - Table File Control
Record, and entry is validated against the PI - Priority Codes table. The associated values of priority
codes can have significant impact on a requisition. Review the PI - Priority Codes table associated
values for more information on those effects.
Material Group Code
Enter the material group code. This field enables a group of requisitions with the same material group
code to be tracked. For example, multiple requisitions for a project could be given the same material
group code and tracked using this value.
Use by Date
Select a use by date from the drop-down list.

Entering this date assists the store person when picking stock to ensure that the stock issued is useable
up to the date entered.
Delivery Location
Select the code for the delivery location to which the material is to be delivered from the drop-down
list.
Entry is validated against Table File DN - Delivery Location. The delivery location code selected is
returned to the Delivery Location field on the requisition.
LOAN INFORMATION
This group of fields applies only to loan requisitions.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
373
Loan Duration
Enter the loan duration in days. This value, in conjunction with the warehouse service time, is used by
Ellipse to automatically generate the loan return requisition.
Loan Requisition Number
This field displays the loan requisition number.

Questions tab
In the Questions tab you can answer predetermined requisitioning questions that assist logistic
personnel in supplying material.
QUESTIONS
Select a question code from the drop-down list. These fields are user defined. Up to four predetermined information questions can be configured.
Question 1
Select a question code from the drop-down list.

Entry is validated against one of the following Client-defined table files, depending on the type of
requisition:
I1 - Issue Requisition Information Codes
ICR1 - Credit/ Return Requisition Information Codes
IDI1 - Disposal Requisition Information Codes
ILN1 - Loan Requisition Information Codes
IRC1 - Recall Requisition Information Codes
IRT1 - Rotation Requisition Information Codes
ISS1 - Stores Sales Requisition Information Codes
R1 - Purchase Requisition Information Codes
Question 2

Entry is validated against one of the following client-defined table files, depending on the type of
requisition:

2009 Mincom
374
Work Orders - 3620
Question 3

requisition:
Question 4

requisition:
Purchase Details tab
In the Purchase Details tab, you can enter enough information to create a purchase requisition
header. This tab is available when you:
Create a normal requisition
Create a purchase requisition
Modify and/ or review a purchase requisition

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
375

Suggested Supplier
Enter a suggested supplier for the items on the requisition. This field is optional, and is not validated.
Purchase Officer
Enter a purchasing officer. A purchasing officer identifier can be located by right clicking and then
selecting Search from the context menu. Once the appropriate purchasing officer identifier is located,
select it from the drop-down list.
Inspection Code
Enter the quality inspection code to be used as a default against each item or click the arrow and select
an inspection code from the table. This field displays only when creating a requisition. This field is
optional. Entry is validated against the Table File QI - Quality Inspection Code.
Estimate Freight
Enter the estimated freight charge for the goods to be requisitioned. This field displays only when
creating a requisition as it is used as a default for the item, and entry is optional.
Group Class
Enter or right-click and search for the group class classification for the purchase requisition
items. This field displays only when creating a requisition.
Entry is validated against the Group Class file.
Delivery Instruction
Enter delivery instructions as required. A limit of 60 characters applies. This is a text field only; no
validation is performed.
COSTING
Costing can be entered for Purchase Requisition items. This grid provides for up to two different
costing levels for purchase requisition items on the requisition. The costing grid on the General tab is
used when creating Purchase type requisitions. The grid does not appear on the Purchase Details tab
except when creating Normal type requisitions.
Ind
(Indicator)
Enter a costing indicator. The indicator codes are:
P
If the requisition is to be charged to a project
If the requisition is to be charged to a work order
Wk Ord / Proj
(Work Order / Project)

2009 Mincom
376
Work Orders - 3620
Enter work order or project number. Right-click and search for a Work Order or Project if the number
is not known.
Equipment Ref
Enter or right-click to search for an equipment reference.
If Structured Plant Nos is flagged as Y on the System Control File and a plant number exists for the
equipment reference, that number always displays instead of the equipment number.
If the Plant Number is a duplicate, you are prompted to resolve the duplicates.
If a work order/project or equipment reference has been entered in the general costing grid, you can
use Show to return associated details.
Cost Centre
Enter a cost centre or right-click to search for a cost centre.

Alloc Per
(Allocation Percentage)
This field defaults to 100% on the first costing allocation entry and zero for the second. If you enter
more than one costing allocation, the total allocation percent must add up to 100%. This percentage is
used to distribute the cost between the costing allocations.
If costing defaults are not used and you wish to requisition stock and non-stock items on a normal
requisition with the same costing details, when you enter the general costing details they automatically
default to the purchase costing grid on the Purchase Details tab.
If screen defaults are used and costing details are defaulted into the general grid, therefore not
requiring you to click in the grid, no costing details are defaulted into the purchase costing grid.
If changes are made to the costing that was initially entered, those changes are not automatically
defaulted. Only the initial costing defaults to another costing grid.
Note: You can use the button below to add any text instructions relating to the purchase, however
there is a limitation. See below for more information.
Button
Purpose
Availability
Purchase Instructions
This button opens a text screen

for entry of purchasing
instructions.
This button cannot be selected until a

requisition number is assigned. At that
time, the button can be selected to allow
the addition of text instructions.
Other tab
In this tab you can review the authorisation, creation and item details for the requisition. In Create
mode, this tab's fields are blank. In Review mode, the information that appears cannot be modified.
This tab is not available when creating a requisition until you save the requisition.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
377
AUTHORISATION
Position
This field displays the most recent position to have authorised the requisition.
Authorised Date
This field displays the date on which the requisition was most recently authorised.
Authorised Status
This field displays the current authorisation status of the requisition.

Total Amount
This field displays the total dollar value of all items on the requisition.
Requested by Position
This field displays the position held by the person who initiated the requisition.
CREATION
Last Acquitted Date
This field displays the most recent date on which an item was issued.
Created By
This field displays the user code and name of the user who created the requisition.
Creation Date
This field displays the date on which the requisition was created.
Creation Time
This field displays the time that the requisition was created.
MISCELLANEOUS
Number of Items
This field displays the total number of items on the requisition.

Completed Items
This field displays the number of completed items on the requisition, that is, items that have been
issued in full and/or marked as complete.
Items tab
In the Items tab you create, modify or review items on a requisition. The tabs that are available when
adding items to a requisition are:
Catalogued
Non-Catalogued
2009 Mincom
378
Work Orders - 3620
APL
LinkOne
Catalogued sub-tab
Use the Catalogued sub-tab to enter catalogued items being requisitioned.

Quantity Required
Enter the quantity required, in terms of the unit of measure.

Unit of Measure
Select the unit of issue from the drop-down list. This field is mandatory. Entry is validated against the
Table File UM - Unit of Measure.
When a Stock Code is entered, this entry is also validated against the catalogue, to ensure that you are
requesting the unit of measure in which the item is transacted.
Stock Code
Enter the stock code. Right-click to search for the stock code for the requisition item. Entry is
validated against the catalogue, and is also validated against the district inventory record.
If the item is not included in district inventory, district control indicators determine the action taken by
Ellipse. That action may be to produce an error message, an automated search to find a district to
which the requisition can be referred, or the creation of a referred demand record which an inventory
controller can manually refer to another district.
Mnemonic
Enter the mnemonic from the drop-down list. You must complete this field or the Stock Code field.
Entry is validated against the Table File AA - Manufacturers Mnemonic.
Part No
Enter the part number for the requisition item. If the part number is associated with a catalogued item,
Ellipse advises that a stock code(s) in the catalogue has this part number.
Description
This field displays the description of the Stock Code.

Part Issue Acceptable
Select this check box if partial issues are allowed. The default is to allow partial issues.
If partial issues are allowed, when there is insufficient stock to complete the requisition, any stock that
is available can be issued to partially fill the requisition. If partial issues are not allowed, ensure the
check box is de-selected.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
379
Note: You can use one of the following buttons to execute the required action. However, the
availability of the buttons depends on the option you have selected. See below for more information.
Button
Purpose
Availability
Costing
This button opens a costing grid for

applying costing at the item level.
This button is only available when

creating a requisition item.
Narrative
This button opens a screen to allow the

use of narrative text on orders for this
requisition item.
This button is only available when a

requisition has been saved, and an
item is selected on the item grid.
New
This button opens the fields on this tab

for adding a new item to the requisition.
This button is available when

creating a requisition and adding
items.
Edit
This button opens the fields on this tab

for modifying an item requisition.

an item has been selected on the item
grid.
Delete
This button deletes an item from the

requisition.

an item has been selected on the item
grid.
OK
This button adds an items to the grid list,

after validating that the mandatory
information had been loaded.
This button is available when an

item has been selected for update,
whether or not an update has taken
place.
Cancel
This button cancels the action being

taken on an item.
This button is available when an

item has been selected for update,
whether or not an update has taken
place.
Non-Catalogued sub-tab
Use the Non-Catalogued sub-tab to enter non-catalogued items being requisitioned.

Quantity Required
The quantity required, in terms of the unit of measure. This field is mandatory for a goods item, and
should be left blank for a field release or service item.
Unit of Measure
The unit in which the item is issued. Entry is validated against the Table File UM - Unit of Measure.
When a Stock Code is entered, this entry is also validated against the catalogue, to ensure that you are
requesting the unit of measure in which the item is transacted.
This field is mandatory for a goods item, and should be left blank for a field release or service item.
Estimated Price
Enter the estimated price per item. This is only applicable to purchase requisition items.
2009 Mincom
380
Work Orders - 3620
Estimated Freight
Enter the estimated cost of freight for the item.

Mnemonic
Enter the mnemonic from the drop-down list. You must complete this field or the Stock Code field.
Entry is validated against the Table File AA - Manufacturers Mnemonic.
Part No
Enter the part number for the requisition item. If the part number is is associated with a catalogued
item, Ellipse advises that a stock code(s) in the catalogue has this part number.
Item Type
The type of item being requisitioned. Valid values are:
G - Goods (default)
S - Service
F - Field Release.
Once an item type has been selected, it cannot be changed. Once the requisition is finalised, service
items cannot be edited.
Description
Enter a description of the item. Entry is text only, and is not validated.
Button
Purpose
Availability
More Description
This button opens a free text area

for adding additional descriptive
text to a requisition item.

you select the requisition item in the
'Items' tab (by double clicking on the
item).
Costing
This button opens a costing grid for This button is only available when
applying costing at the item level.
creating a requisition item.
New
This button opens the fields on this

tab for adding a new item to the
requisition.
This button is available when creating

a requisition and adding items.
Edit

tab for modifying an item
requisition.
This button is only available when an

item has been selected on the item
grid.
Delete
This button deletes an item from the This button is only available when an
requisition.
item has been selected on the item
grid.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
381
OK
This button adds an items to the

grid list, after validating that the
mandatory information had been
loaded.
This button is available when an item

has been selected for update, whether
or not an update has taken place.
Cancel
This button cancels the action being This button is available when an item
taken on an item.
has been selected for update, whether
or not an update has taken place.
APL sub-tab
Use the APL tab to enter all or some of the items on an Application Parts List (APL) for
requisitioning. Select this link for more information about Application Parts Lists.
Quantity Required
Enter the quantity required, in terms of the APL.

For example, if the APL consists of 4 litres of oil and 1 oil filter, entering 2 in this field results in a
requisition for 8 litres of oil and 2 oil filters.
Equipment Group ID
Select this check box and enter an equipment group ID if you are identifying the APL by an
Equipment Group Identifier. Entry is validated against the EGI file. Select this link if you need more
information about Equipment Group Identifiers.
Equipment Reference
As an alternative to identifying an APL by Equipment Group Identifier, select the check box and enter
an equipment reference. Entry is validated against the Equipment Register.
Component Code
Select a component code modifier from the drop-down list. Modifier codes can only be selected when
a component code is been selected. If a Component Modifier Code is entered, entry is mandatory.
Select a component code modifier from the drop-down list.

This field is used to form a combination of Equipment Group ID/Component Code/Modifier or
Equipment Reference/Component Code/Modifier to enable more precise searches for APLs.
Entry is only permitted when a component code has been entered. Entry is validated against the Table
File MO - Modifier Code.
Sequence Number
Enter a sequence number, to precisely identify an APL based on either Equipment Group
ID/Component Code/Modifier/Sequence number or Equipment Reference/Component Code/Modifier/
Sequence number.
2009 Mincom
382
Work Orders - 3620
APL Search Button
Use the APL Search button to search for APL Numbers if full APL details are not known.
Button
Purpose
Availability
APL Search
This button initiates the APL search

application, using any data that you
have provided.
This button has constant availability,

provided the APL module is active.
New

tab for adding a new item to the
requisition.
This button is available when creating a

requisition and adding items.
OK
This button adds an items to the grid This button is available when an item has
been selected for update, whether or not an
list, after validating that the
update has taken place.
mandatory information had been
loaded.
Cancel

taken on an item.
This button is available when an item has

been selected for update, whether or not an
update has taken place.
LinkOne sub-tab
Use the LinkOne tab to select items from the LinkOne Parts Book for requisitioning.
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer of the item.

Part Number
This field displays the part number of the item.

Description
This field displays a description of the item.

Qty
This field displays the quantity of the item being requested.

Units
This field displays the unit of measure of the items being requested.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
383
Button
Purpose
Availability
New
This button opens the fields on this tab This button is available when creating a
for adding a new item to the
requisition and adding items.
requisition.
LinkOne
This button opens the LinkOne

application, to allow the selection of
parts graphically.
This button is available for the activation of

LinkOne. When you return from LinkOne,
the button will carry the caption 'Load
Data' for loading any LinkOne data to your
requisition item.
Load Data
This button loads the requisition item

with any data selected in the LinkOne
application.
This button is only available when you

have returned to Ellipse from LinkOne.
Cancel

taken on an item.
This button is available when an item has

been selected for update, whether or not
any update has taken place.
2009 Mincom
384
Work Orders - 3620
MSQ345 - Condition Monitoring Set

Measurements
This screen has a number of functions relating to the Condition Monitoring module, including the
following:
Measurement sets can be defined, including setting up the equipment or component being
measured, the measurement type, position and frequency, as well as defining the caution and
danger levels.
Measurements can be recorded either as a result of scheduled measurement activities or based on

observations.
Actual measurements can be reviewed against the measurement set.
Work orders can be generated automatically once an alarm setting is activated.
The summary view will display the list of Condition Monitoring Sets meeting the search parameters,
and this will always display in Date Order. Only one entry will appear for each Set of Measurements
taken on a particular Date and Time.
Measurement Sets that contain Caution Levels will display with a yellow symbol and those that
contain Danger Levels will display with a red symbol. Those that contain a Rate of Change warning
will also display a red symbol.
A Condition Monitoring Type refers to the type of measurement being taken, for example, oil analysis,
vibration monitoring. A Condition Monitoring Set refers to the C/M Type, Date, Equipment,
Component combination.
Search for Condition Monitoring Measurements - MSQ345
Search Criteria
The search screen provides facilities for searching for a condition monitoring measurements based on
a specific search method and criteria. There may be a number of search fields available on a number of
tabs on this screen. Primary search keys display in bold. Enter search criteria into these fields to
narrow the search.
Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid.
Choose the required search method:
All
Displays every condition monitoring measurement matching the selection criteria

entered.
Exact Match
Displays the exact condition monitoring measurement based upon the entries made in
the search fields.
Starts From
Displays the condition monitoring measurement which start from the specified
characters and match the entered search criteria.
Starts With
Displays the condition monitoring measurement which start with the specified
characters and match the entered search criteria.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
385
Condition Monitoring Set Measurements

Equipment Reference
This field displays the Equipment or plant number for which the condition monitoring measurements
display.
Description
This field displays the description of the equipment item or plant number for which the condition
monitoring measurements display.
Component Code
This field displays the component code and description for which the condition monitoring
measurements display.
Modifier Code
This field displays the modifier code and description for which the condition monitoring
Position
This field displays the position code and description for which the condition monitoring measurements
display.
Monitoring Type
This field displays the monitoring code and description for which the condition monitoring
Measure Date
The date that the condition monitoring measurement was taken.

Measure Time
This field displays the time the measurement was taken.

Type
This field displays the measurement type.

Type Description
This field displays the measurement type description.

UOM
(Unit Of Measure)
This field displays the unit of measure used for the measurement.
2009 Mincom
386
Work Orders - 3620
Value
This field displays the value of the measurement.

Visual Insp
(Visual Inspection)
This field displays the visual inspection code (3) that may assist in analysis of this environment/
conditions when the reading was taken.
Alarm
Red indicates DANGER LEVEL.

Yellow indicates CAUTION LEVEL.
Txt
(Text)
This field indicates in there is commentary text associated with this reading.
Alarm District
This field displays the District in which the alarm was raised.
Alarm Work Order
This field displays the Work Order raised when the alarm was triggered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
387
MSQ580 - Document
This screen is used to review all information about a document and the versions of a document.
Document version routing is also maintained from this screen. In addition, document links (links from
documents to other entities within Ellipse, such as Contracts, Job Estimates, and Work Orders) can be
maintained.
Documents - MSQ580

Document
This field displays the document number. The document status displays to the right of the document
number.
The document name displays below the document number.
Search for Document - MSQ580
Search Criteria
The search window provides facilities for searching for a document based on a specific search method
and criteria. There are a number of search fields available on six tabs on this screen. Enter search
criteria into these fields to narrow the search.
All
Displays every document matching the selection criteria entered.
Exact Match
Displays the exact document based upon the entries made in the search fields. If
this search method is selected, only the District Code and Document Number
fields are available for input.
Starts From
Displays the documents that start from the specified characters and match the
entered search criteria.
Starts With
Displays the documents that start with the specified characters and match the
Tabs
General
Versions
Links
Classifications
Specifications
Keywords
2009 Mincom
388
Work Orders - 3620
Lists
Extended Text
Commentary
General tab
This tab displays general information that is common across all versions of the document.
User Status
Enter a code indicating the user status type to select. This field is optional and is validated against the
Table File DOUS - Document User Status.
Document Type
This field displays the code indicating the document type (from the Table File DO - Document Types).
The type description displays to the right.
Reference
The reference number of the external or internal source.

AUTHOR
Company
This field displays the company where the document originated from.
Name
This field displays the name of the author of the document.

ADDRESSEE
Company
This field displays the company where the document was sent.
Name
This field displays the recipient of the document.

RELATED DOCUMENTS
Supersedes
The number of the document that this document take the place of.
Superseded By
The number of the document that replaces this document.

Versions tab
This tab displays a results grid with information on the existing versions of the document. The version
can be selected by double-clicking it to view version details in the Dialog Box - Document Version.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
389

Version
The document version.

Status
This field displays the document version status description (from the Table File DOVS - Document
Version Status).
Date Created
This field displays the date the document version information record was created in Ellipse.
Created By
This field displays the name of the employee who created the document version.
Authorised By
This field displays the name of the employee who authorised the document version.
Type
This field displays the document version type description (from the Table File DOVT - Document
Version Type).
Links tab
This tab displays information on the links between the document and entities in Ellipse such as
Contracts, Job Estimates, and Work Orders.
Link Type
Enter the code indicating the entity type to link to the document. This field is mandatory and is
validated against the Table File DOLT - Document Link Type.
Link Type Description
This field displays the description of the entity Link Type (from the Table File DOLT - Document
Link Type).
Link Reference
Enter a valid reference from the entity. This field is mandatory.

This field is validated based on the Link Type entered. The following table lists examples of data
required for the Link Reference field, based on the entity Link Type:
Link Type
Link Reference
EQ - Equipment Type
Equipment number or plant number
FP - Forward Purchase
Agreement (FPA)
The first character must be the FPA type (F-FPA/R-Repair Group/QQuote). The next five characters are the FPA group type.
2009 Mincom
390
Work Orders - 3620
RO - Recommended Order
Recommended order item
WO - Work Order
Work order number
Description
This field displays the description of the entity Link Reference.

Other
Enter additional information about the entity. This field is mandatory if the Link Type is a
Recommended Order (RO). This field is optional for all other entities.
The following information can be entered, based on the entity Link Type:
Link Type
Other
Equipment Number
Component code
FPA
FPA (Forward Purchase Agreement) item
Part Number
Mnemonic
Project Approval
Variation number
Purchase Order
Purchase order item
Recommended Order
Recommended order item
Classifications Tab
This tab displays information on the document classifications. Up to ten classification tables titles,
codes, and descriptions display from the Table Files L0 to L9 - Document Classification.
The table files are fully configurable by the customer.
Specifications tab
This tab displays information on the document design specifications. Up to five design specification
codes and descriptions display from the Table File DG - Design Specifications.
Keywords tab
This tab displays up to 18 keywords associated with the document.

Lists tab
This tab displays information on the lists that the document is registered to.
List
The code indicating the list that the document is registered to (from the Table File LD - Document List
Code Table).
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
391
List Description
The list description (from the Table File LD - Document List Code Table).
Extended Text tab
This tab displays the extended text for the document.

Commentary tab
This tab displays the commentary text for the document.
2009 Mincom
392
Work Orders - 3620
MSQ620 - Work Orders

The Work Order screen provides facilities for searching, creating, modifying, and reviewing details for
a specific work order or work order task. Work order and work order task requirements can also be
maintained. Menu options provide direct links to the accounting system and requisitioning application,
as well as several work management applications.
Select either the work order or task option to search for either a work order or work order
task. Depending on which option you select, different search screens display.
You can search for work orders with matching associated equipment items under the Primary Criteria
tab by entering an associated equipment item.
Search for Work Order Criteria - MSQ620
Search Criteria
The search screen provides facilities for searching for a work order based on a specific search method
and criteria. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid.
All
Displays every work order matching the selection criteria entered.
Exact Match
Displays the exact work order based upon the entry made in the Work Order No.
field.
Starts From
Displays the work orders that start from the specified characters and match the
Starts With
Displays the work orders that start with the specified characters and match the
To narrow the search, enter any additional search criteria available on the tabs.
You must include at least one of the primary search criteria on the Primary Criteria tab.
To search using a reference code, click the Reference Code tab and type the required reference code
in the field provided. When reference codes are used for a search, all other search criteria are ignored.
Work Order
(Search view Work Order option)

Select this option to search for work orders. The Work Order screen displays.
Task
(Search view Task option)

This option is selected for work order tasks. The Work Order Task screen displays.
Work Order

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
393
Work Order No
The work order number.

or Prefix
Enter the prefix of the work order.

The prefix is created as part of configuration on the District Control file.
Task No
This field is used to identify a task number for the work order.
District Code

Work Order Desc

Tabs
Definition
Planning
Tasks
Scheduling
Costs
Cost Allocation
Address
Completion
Job Codes
History
Reference Codes
Definition tab
This tab allows for recording, reviewing, and modifying definition information for a work order.
Definition information relates to the entire work order, including all tasks, until each task is updated
with changes. Information can include the following:
Equipment details
Identification number for the person who initiated the work order
2009 Mincom
394
Work Orders - 3620
Work group responsible for the work order
Identifier for a work request associated with the work order
The originator of the work order is mandatory information. If a work group is not entered on a work
order, the assigned person defaults from the originator.
EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Reference
The identification of the equipment when the job is performed. If this work order was generated as a
result of a work request, the reference defaults from the work request equipment reference. The
adjacent field displays the two-line description of the corresponding equipment. The equipment
reference is validated against the equipment file to determine if costing can be recorded against this
item. The following occurs depending on the flag on the equipment:
A
Costing is allowed on the equipment and the work order is to be saved.
Costing is not allowed on the equipment. A warning displays when the work order is saved.
The warning message does not stop the equipment from being used on the work order.
Costing is not allowed on the equipment. An error displays when a work order save is
attempted.
Entry of an equipment item defaults the item's Cost Centre/ Account field on the Cost Allocation tab.
This information can be changed if the resulting work is charged to a different work area.
Note: If an incorrect equipment reference was entered and you need to change it, you need to delete
the account code before saving the new equipment. If you do not delete the account code, this defaults
from the first equipment reference.
Segments Button
Note: Click Segments to enter segment start and end values. A segment range must exist and be set up
in MSO600.
Location
Enter the location of the equipment from the equipment record if an equipment number is entered. The
adjacent field displays the description of the location.
Status
The current status of the equipment. The adjacent field displays the description of the status.
Originator Id
The Originator ID from the user ID of the person logged in to Mincom Ellipse. If this is not the correct
originator ID, search and select the employee ID of the person who originated the work order. The
adjacent field displays the originator's name.
Work Group
The work group responsible for the work order. Assigning a work group allows the work order to be
scheduled if the following conditions are in place:
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Maintenance scheduling is in use
A planned start date is entered
395
The work order is authorised either by automatic authorisation or manual authorisation.

If no work group is entered, the Assign to Field defaults the logged on user. The adjacent field
displays the work group name.
Orig Priority
(Originator Priority)
The originator's priority defaults from the work request priority if the work order was generated as a
result of a work request. This is a number from 1 to 99, inclusive. 1 is the highest priority. The values
and their meanings are held on the Table File PY - Work Order Priority Code. The adjacent field
displays the originator's priority description.
Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they are recalculated.
Orig Doc Type
The original source of the job. The adjacent field displays the description of the document type. Entry
is validated against the Table File OD - Originating Document.
and No
The number of the original source document.

This field is mandatory if an Original Document Type is entered.
Request Id
The identification number of the work request associated with the work order. This field is populated
automatically if the work order was initiated from the work request application. The adjacent field
displays the work request description.
RAISED
Raised Date
The date the work order was raised. This information defaults on the History tab after the work order
is saved.
Raised Time
The time the work order was raised. This information defaults on the History tab after the work order
is saved.
MSSS Applies
Select the Maintenance Strategy and Support System (MSSS) option. This indicator is available if the
equipment referenced on the work order has data recorded and if the equipment register MSSS status
indicator is set to A. De-select the option if this work order is not to be treated as a maintenance
strategy support work order.
2009 Mincom
396
Work Orders - 3620
Planning tab
In the Planning tab you can record, review, and modify planning information for a work order.
Planning information includes the:
Type of work order and maintenance
Assignment details including required date and time for the work to be completed
Units of work and the quantity required
This tab holds some of the most important work order information for use in the planning process,
including the date that the work is required by and the ability to set a flag for automatic generation of
requisitions.
Work order types and maintenance types are mandatory.
icon displays the EGI Profile Search screen, allowing you to conduct a search for
Clicking the
component and modifier codes.
Work Order Type
The work order type code. Entry in this field is mandatory and is validated against the Table File WO Work Order. The description of the work order type code displays in the adjacent field.
If this work order was generated as a result of a work request, the work order type defaults from the
work request classification type.
Maintenance Type
The maintenance type code for this work order. Entry in this field is mandatory and is validated
against the Table File MT - Maintenance Type.
The maintenance type code is linked to a category of work code to generate work notices when the
work order is saved. This link is established by entering an existing CATW table code in the
associated values of the relevant maintenance type code.
In addition, to generate a work notice a valid Notice Location must be entered on the Address tab of
the work order.
The description of the maintenance type displays in the adjacent field.
Component Code
If an item of equipment is entered, select the code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the work
performed.
The adjacent field displays the description of the code.
The system checks if this is a valid component for the item of equipment by examining its component
profile. If no specific profile is located, but a group identifier is defined for the equipment, the
component profile of the group identifier is selected. If no profile is located, you can enter any valid
component code.
Entry is only allowed if an equipment number or reference has been entered.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
397
The component modifier code used to further define the location specified by the component code. If a
component code was entered, this field must be completed. Entry is validated against the Table File
MO Modifier Code. The adjacent field displays the description of the code.
Note: Click the

icon to display the Dialog Box - EGI Profile Search to search for component
and modifier codes.
Assign Person
This field displays the ID of the person responsible for carrying out this work order.
Required Start Date
The required start date the work is to commence.

If the work order has no planner/originator/priority record no tolerance information is recorded.
If the work order has a priority code record and the priority code has tolerance information, the field
updates according to the tolerance value. This entry is validated against the Table File PY - Work
This field is the same date as the Plan Start Date field on the Scheduling tab.
Required Start Time
The required start time the work is to commence.

This field is the same time as the Plan Start Time field on the Scheduling tab.
Required By Date
Enter the date when the work is required to be completed.

If this work order is generated as a result of a work request, the Required By Date defaults from the
work request.
Required By Time
Enter the date when the work is required to be completed. If this work order is generated as a result of
a work request, the Required By Date defaults from the work request.
2009 Mincom
398
Work Orders - 3620
Planners Priority
The priority set by the person who planned the job. This entry is validated against the Table File PY Work Order Priority Code. Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they
are recalculated.
If no priority is entered the tolerance calculation is not performed, however the Required Start Date
and Required by Date fields are updated with the Plan Start Date and Plan Finish Date field dates.
Units of Work
The unit of work for this work order. This entry is validated against the Table File UW - Unit of Work.
This field is mandatory if the No of Units Required field is completed.
The earned value of the work completed to date is calculated based on the rate held on the associated
value of the unit of work selected, and the units of work completed.
No of Units Required
Enter a number from 1 to 9999999.99 to indicate the number of units of work to be covered by this
work order. This is used to monitor work in progress.
User Status
The user-defined status code. Entry is validated against the Table File - WS - User Work Order Status.
Standard Job
The number of the standard job to which the work order is linked.
Auto Requisition?
Select this option to automatically requisition any APL items associated with this work orders tasks.
Related Work Order
The number of a related work order. This creates a link between this work order and the specified
work order.
Recall Time Hours
The length of time it takes for the plant to be back in production. The time is in hours and decimals,
for example, 5.5 for five and a half hours.
APTW
This field group displays if an Application for Permit to Work (APTW) exists for the selected work
order.
APTW Exists
This is a read only option. This is automatically selected when an APTW is linked to the work order
task.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
399
Select this option to indicate if an APTW is created for any of the work order tasks or not.
Tasks tab
The Tasks tab allows you to review or modify job information for each work order task. You can
record new task information and modify current task information. If tasks are created directly from a
standard job and you need to modify them to fit the current work order, they can be changed from this
tab. An option to use Microsoft Project is also available for managing task dates and relationships.
This option is only available if Project is loaded on the local machine.
No. of Tasks
This field displays the number of tasks on the work order and can be modified.
Tasks Complete
Highest Task No
This field displays the highest task number on the work order and can be modified.
Scheduling tab
The Scheduling tab allows you to record and review scheduling information for the work order. This
information determines the method the work order is included in the work groups schedule. The
majority of information on this tab is for review only. You need to select the Schedule Work Order
option to enter data.
SHUTDOWN DETAILS
Number
Type
Equipment Ref
This field displays the reference of the equipment item to be shut down.
Offset Tasks
Select this option if the task planned start dates are required to maintain an offset and the work order
header planned start date is changed.
MST
(Maintenance Scheduling Task)

This field displays the MST number created from a work order.
2009 Mincom
400
Work Orders - 3620
PLAN DATES/CREW
Plan Start Date
(Planned Start Date)

The date scheduled for starting the work specified in the work order.
When entering a plan start date it defaults to the Required Start Date field on the Planning tab.
Plan Start Time
The time scheduled for starting the work specified in the work order.
Plan Finish Date
(Planned Finish Date)

The date scheduled for finishing the work specified in the work order.
When entering a plan finish date the date defaults to the Required By Date field on the Planning tab.
Plan Finish Time
The time scheduled for finishing the work specified in the work order.
Select this option if the job is planned to start on the plan start date, otherwise an error or warning
message displays when the date is changed.
Error
Select this option if you want an error message to display when changes are made to the plan start
date.
Warning
Select this option if you want a warning message to display when changes are made to the plan start
date. The warning message will need to be confirmed.
Crew
This field displays the crew planned to do the work.

SCHEDULED FOR
Statistic Type
The type of statistic used to trigger the scheduling of the work.

Statistic Value
The value of this statistic when work should start, for example 50,000 km, 10,000 hr.
Costs tab
The Costs tab displays the total estimated and actual costs for the work order.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
401
Requirements including associated costs are recorded against a work order. The total estimated cost
for each type of requirement (labour, equipment, materials and other) and a total estimate cost for all
requirements display.
This tab is review only. Entry is controlled in the following manner:
Calculated entries on this tab are controlled by the requirements menu option.
Manually estimated costs are entered with the update estimates menu option.
The total actual costs are calculated from financial transactions against the work order.
Duration Hours are entered with the durations menu option.

COST TYPE
The resource hours, resource cost, material cost, equipment cost, other cost and total costs displays for
estimated, actual and variances required to fulfil the work order.
ESTIMATED
Note: You cannot select the Calc option next to the estimated group fields. If you want the system to
calculate the costs you need to select from the menu Work OrderUpdate Estimates and select the
calculation option.
After selecting the calculation option the Calc option is selected.
Resource Hours
The estimated resource hours required to fulfil the work order.

Resource Cost
The estimated cost of resources required to fulfil the work order.

Material Cost
The estimated cost of material required to fulfil the work order.

Equipment Cost
The estimated cost of equipment required to fulfil the work order.

Other Cost
The estimated cost of other costs required to fulfil the work order.
Total Cost
The total of estimated costs.

ACTUAL
Resource Hours
The actual resource hours required to fulfil the work order.

2009 Mincom
402
Work Orders - 3620
Resource Cost
The actual costs for resources required to fulfil the work order.
Material Cost
Equipment Cost
Other Cost
The actual costs of other costs required to fulfil the work order.
Total Cost
The total of actual costs.

VARIANCE
Resource Cost
The difference between actual and estimated costs for resources.

Material Cost
The difference between actual and estimated costs for materials.

Equipment Cost
The difference between actual and estimated costs for equipment.

Other Costs
The difference between actual and estimated costs for other costs.
Total Costs
The difference between actual and estimated costs for the total of all costs.
DURATION HOURS
Calculate Duration Hours
Select this option if you want the system to calculate duration hours.
Estimated

Actual
The total time actually taken to complete the job.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
403
Earned Value
The earned value for the number of units of work completed. This calculation is based on the rate
multiplied by the number of units completed.
The rate is held as an associated value on the Table File UW - Unit of Work.
Contractor Costs
Select this option if you want contractor costs included in a job estimate.
Actual Cost Reallocated
The total of the costs reallocated.

Actual vs Estimates Button
Note: Click Actual vs Estimates to view comparisons between actual and estimated costs or hours.
Actual Revenue
The actual revenue earned from the work order.

Cost Allocation tab
The Cost Allocation tab allows you to record and display details for the allocation of costs against the
work order.
ACCOUNT
Cost Centre/Account
The cost centre or account where the work order belongs. Right-click to search for the cost centre or
account number, if required.
If the equipment or project is quoted on this work order, the account from these entities default to the
work order. You can change the cost centre/account if a different account is charged for the work
order costs.
AFUDC
(Allowance for Funds Used During Construction)

This field displays the AFUDC, allowance for funds used during construction. For more information
on Utilities Accounting, refer to the Utilities Asset Accounting module.
Date in Service
The date the work being performed is deemed to be in use and can be modified. Subsequent to this
date, AFUDC is no longer calculated for this work order and any associated installation or removal
costs are capitalised.
Suspended
Select this option if you want a Date in Service set but capitalised costs are to be suspended.
2009 Mincom
404
Work Orders - 3620
Capital Work Order
Indicates if the work order is subject to the capitalisation process.

A capital work order is used to describe the creation of a fixed asset. Capital work orders are
capitalised before they are finalised. Do this by clearing costs from the capital work in progress
accounts and posting the costs to the fixed asset register.
If the work order has associated costs, it cannot be set to a capital work order status.
Closed to Commitments Date
The date the work order is closed to commitments.

The date entered must be a current or future date. Prior dates are not valid for entry.
Any costs being allocated to the work order are stopped.
When this date has expired, or has been removed, costs can then be allocated to the work order.
A date in the closed to commitments field will not allow any new commitments such as requisitions,
labour costing transactions, contracts, store sales or purchase orders to be created against the work
order.
The work order TO or FROM cannot be changed after it is closed to commitments.
Removing an existing closed to commitments date from this field makes the work order eligible for
transactions again. This field can only be maintained if the logged-on user has a profile greater than
three.
Project Number
The project number to which the work order belongs. The project description displays in the adjacent
field.
Entry in this field is mandatory if the Capital Work Order option is selected.
Parent Work Order
Right-click to search for the number of the parent work order. This is one way to build a parent-child
relationship between a work order and a parent work order. When assigned a parent, the hierarchical
relationship is seen in the parent work order application, MSQ625.
The parent work order description displays on the adjacent field.
UNITS
Units Complete
The number of units of work completed to date. Values for the Units Complete and the Percent
Complete fields are recorded in the Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress.
For calculations to be recorded from the information provided in this dialog box, ensure you have
entries in the Units of Work and No of Units Required fields on the Planning tab.
Units Invoiced
This field displays the number of units of work invoiced to date.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
405
Percent Complete
This field displays the percentage of work completed to date. Refer to the Units Complete field for
details on how to record an entry in this field.
Finalise Work Order Costing
Indicates that costing has been finalised for the work order. Subsequent accounting transactions
quoting this work order number will be flagged as errors.
To finalise costing for this work order, select Work Order Finalise. For more information, see
Finalise a Work Order.
Billing Details Button
Note: Click Billing Details to redirect costs accumulated against a work order to different account
codes within the General Ledger, using several methods and at different intervals of frequency.
Address tab
This tab allows you to select the location for the work order activities. If constraints apply at the
location specified for the work order, a notice location is required.
Locations are reviewed, modified, and created in the location manager application.
Notice locations are reviewed, modified, and created in the notice location application.
LOCATION DETAILS
Location From
The location where the work originates.

Location To
The location where the work finishes.

If this work order was generated as a result of a work request, the Location To defaults from the work
request location.
Notice Location
Enter a notice location if constraints apply for the location.

Right-click to search for notice locations associated with the location for the work order, if required.
FORMATTED ADDRESS
The standard address details. The formatted address for the Location To field in MSQ011 defaults in
the formatted address group fields.
Street Number
This field displays the street number of the location.
2009 Mincom
406
Work Orders - 3620
Street Type
This field displays the street type of the location.

Street Name
The street name of the location.

Suburb
The suburb of the location.

Street Position
The position of the street. For example, North Area. A drop-down list is available.
Entry is validated against the Table File SLOC - Street Location.
City
The city of the location.

County
The county of the location.

GIS Ref No
(Geographical Information System Reference Number)

The Geographical Information System (GIS) reference number of the location.
State
The state of the location. Entry is validated against the Table File - SY - State Table.
Post/Zip Code
The postcode or ZIP code of the location.

Completion tab
The Completion tab enables you to review completion details for the work order.
EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Location
This field displays the new location. This updates the equipment register record when the work order
is saved.
This entry is validated against the Table File EL - Equipment Location.
Status
This field displays the status code of the equipment's current status. This updates the equipment
register record when the work order is saved.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
407
This entry is validated against the Table File ES - Equipment Status.

Enter the identity of the part causing failure.

Assoc. Equip. Item
This field displays the associated equipment item number if entered in the equipment Reference field
on the Definition tab after the work order has been saved.
The associated equipment item (equipment) number automatically defaults to this field of it has been
entered as an equipment reference on the work order.
Enter an associated equipment item number if required. The equipment number entered in the
equipment reference field must be a parent to the associated equipment item.
Completion Code
This field displays the completion code depending on whether the work order was closed, cancelled or
deferred.
Completed By
This field displays the ID of the employee who performed the work or closed the work order.
Completed Date
This field displays the date when all work related to this work order was completed.
Completed Time
This field displays the time when all work related to this work order was completed.
Actual Start Date/Time
Enter the actual start date and time the work commenced.
Actual Finish Date/Time
Enter the actual finish date and time the work was completed.
Service on Date/Time
Enter the date and time when all work related to this work order was back in service.
Service Off Date/Time
Enter the date and time when all work related to this work order was out of service.
2009 Mincom
408
Work Orders - 3620
Out of Service Date
The date when the equipment relating to this work order was taken out of service.
Job Codes tab
The Job Codes tab allows you to record, modify or review job code details for the work order. Up to
10 job codes are used to classify a work order.
These codes are held on the Table Files W0 - W9 - Work Order Job Codes.
The descriptions of these codes are defined by the customer during implementation.
The following two groups of codes are available:
W0 W2 Codes
If the MSSS status indicator option is selected on the Definition tab, the selection buttons for
these codes are available. Click the buttons to select W0 - Failure Mode Code, W1 - Failure Code,
and W2 - Function Code respectively.
W3 W9 Codes
Select a code from the drop-down list. Each field displays a description of the code.
History tab
The History tab displays read-only fields containing details that provide a history of the development
of the work order.
HISTORY
Creation Date
The date the work order was first created.

Creation Time
The time the work order was first created.

Raised Date
The date the work order was first raised.

Raised Time
The time the work order was first raised.

Last Mod Date
(Last Modified Date)

The date the work order was last modified.
Last Mod Time
(Last Modified Time)

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
409
The time the work order was last modified.

Closed Date
This field displays the date the work order was closed.
Closed Time
This field displays the time the work order was closed.
AUTHORISATION
The following fields are populated if the work order has been authorised. If automatic authorisation is
in use, the date and time fields will match the creation date and time.
Authorised Date
Authorised Time
This field displays the time the work order was authorised.
Authorised By
Authorised Position
This field displays the position of the person who authorised the work order.
Reference Codes tab
The Reference Codes tab allows you to review reference code information for a work
order. Reference codes are used to define additional information about a work order and are powerful
search criteria.
Ref No
(Reference Number)
This field displays the reference number of the work order.
Reference Code
The reference codes for work orders as agreed during implementation. A list of valid codes for work
orders displays.
The value of the reference code for the work order.

Description
This field displays the description of the reference code value.
2009 Mincom
410
Work Orders - 3620
Text
Click on the icon to display the Dialog Box - Standard Text, if the text icon is present. Use this dialog
box to review, add, or modify standard text, as required.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
411
MSQ620 - Work Order Task

The Work Order Task screen enables you to record detailed information for each work order task that
defines the overall work order.
Work Order No

or Prefix
This field displays the prefix of the work order.

The prefix is created as part of the configuration on the district control file.
Task No
This field displays the task number of the work order.

District Code

Work Order Desc

WO
(Work Order)
Select this option if you want to display work orders. The Work Order screen displays.
Task
(Search view Task option)

This option is selected for work order tasks. The Work Order Task screen displays.
Tabs
Job Information
Planning
Scheduling
Costs
2009 Mincom
412
Work Orders - 3620
Completion
APL
Task Assignment
Job Information tab
The Job Information tab enables you to review or modify information for each work order task. This
tab provides basic safety information and more detailed records of job instructions in standard text
format.
Task Description
The description of the work order task.

Work Group
Enter a work group or right-click to search for the work group responsible for the task. If a work group
selected is different from the work group on the work order header, this is called a foreign task. During
the scheduling process for the work order header, the task is committed and scheduled for the foreign
task work group.
Safety Instruction
Enter a safety instruction code describing the safety procedure to be performed in completing the job.
The safety instruction is validated against the Table File SI - Safety Instructions and can be selected
from the drop-down list.
Each task is assigned its own safety instruction/completion instruction code combination.
Job Description
Enter a description for the task. The description displays on the standard work order task job card and
should be clear enough to briefly describe the work to be done.
Location From
Enter a location or right-click to search for the location where the task originates.
Location To
Enter a location or right-click to search for the location where the task finishes.
Highest Task
The number of tasks allocated to the work order.

Select this option if an application for a permit to work is created for this task.
Note: Click Job Instructions to enter free text information about the job.
Planning tab
The Planning tab enables you to review or modify planning details for a work order task. This tab
controls the relationship between tasks and defines the expected workload required to complete the
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
413
job. This tab also records who the job task has been assigned to if an individual or a crew has been
designated as the responsible party.
This field displays a work group or individual to whom the task is assigned for further workload
planning.
You can update this field by clicking
Crew
This field displays a work group or a specific crew to whom the task is assigned within the work group
for further workload planning.
You can update this field by clicking
Crew Type
Enter or select a crew type from the drop-down list. Entry is validated against the Table File - CWT.
Unit of Work
Enter the unit of work for each task.

Entry is validated against the Table File UW - Unit of Work.
Units Required
Enter either the units of work required to complete tasks requiring fabrication or processing, or the
number of work items required to complete the task.
The units of work completed and the % complete display for information.
If the number of units required is modified, the % complete is recalculated.
Linked
Select this option if the planned start date of this task is linked to the previous task.
Scheduled Units/Days
Enter the rate of processing in units of work per day.

User Status
Enter the user status attached to the work order task to restrict the review to work orders with that
status. Entry is validated against the Table File WS.
The description of the user status displays in the adjacent field.
This field is optional and can be left blank.
2009 Mincom
414
Work Orders - 3620
Priority
Enter or a select a priority code from the drop-down list to indicate the priority of the task. Entry is
validated against the Table File - PY,
Creation Date
This field displays the date the task was created.

Creation Time
This field displays the time the task was created.

Scheduling tab
The Scheduling tab displays information used during the scheduling process. This tab displays the
tasks start and finish date details.
PLAN DATES
Plan Start Date
The date when this task is scheduled to start. This date is used as the operation date in scheduling the
work for the work group.
When creating a requisition from a work order task the plan start date when entered or modified is
validated against table file MWDO - Manage Work District Options to determine if the Date
Required By on the requisition is also updated. The date required by defaults to the day prior to the
plan start date. If no district code is entered the Date Required By is not maintained with this date.
Plan Start Time
The time when the task is scheduled to start.

Plan Finish Date

Plan Finish Time
The time when the task is expected to be completed.

Offset Days
This field displays the number of days when the planned date of this task should lag behind the work
order header planned start date.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
415
DURATIONS
This field displays the estimated duration of the task in hours.

This field is review only and can be updated using the Schedule button in the task screen.
Effort
(Manual Effort)
The total effort allocated to a work order task to increase/decrease the estimated duration hours.
When the manual effort value is modified the Estimated Duration Hours field is recalculated based on
the new manual effort value. The new estimated duration hours is calculated from the original
EARLIEST DATES
Work orders can be subject to critical path scheduling to determine the earliest start date and earliest
finish date of the job and the number of days for which the job can remain unactioned, without
impacting related tasks.
Earliest Start Date
The earliest date when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling.
Earliest Start Time
The earliest time when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling.
Earliest Finish Date
The earliest date when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling.
Earliest Finish Time
The earliest time when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling.
Float Days
The number of days for which the job can remain un-actioned, without impacting related tasks.
This field relates to the Earliest Start Date and Earliest Finish Date fields.
Costs tab
The Cost tab displays the estimated material, equipment, resource and other costs for the
task. Requirements and their associated costs are recorded in the requirements screen.
ESTIMATED
2009 Mincom
416
Work Orders - 3620
Resource Hours
This field displays the estimated number of resources in hours required to complete the job.
Resource Cost
This field displays the estimated resource costs required to complete the job.
Material Cost
This field displays the estimated material costs required to complete the job.
Equipment Cost
This field displays the estimated equipment costs required to complete the job.
Other Cost
This field displays other cost estimates required to complete the job.
Total Cost
This field displays the total estimated costs based on adding the estimated costs or entering a fixed
estimate required to complete the job.
Contractor Costs
Select this option if you want contractor costs to be recorded against the work order task.
Contractor costs are available if a compatible unit and job estimate is used to create the work order and
its tasks.
MACHINE HOURS
Estimated
Enter the estimated number of hours taken to complete the job if this task was assigned to a machine
centre.
Actual
This field displays the actual number of hours accrued during this job if this task is assigned to a
machine centre.
Completion tab
The Completion tab enables you to record completion requirements and review completion details for
a work order task.
Completed By
This field displays the person who completed the task.

Completed Date
This field displays the date the task was completed.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
417

Completed Time
This field displays the time the task was completed.

Completed Code
This field displays the code describing the circumstances when this task was completed or cancelled.
Completion codes are held on the Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status.
Units Complete
Percent Complete

Actual Start Date/Time
Actual Finish/Time
COMPLETION
Instruction
Select the completion instruction from the drop-down list. The completion instruction indicates the
procedure to be performed at the end of a job. These instructions are the reverse of the safety
instructions. Completion instruction codes are held on the Table File CI - Completion Instructions.
Text Code
Select the completion text code from the drop-down list. The completion text code is used to define
the text that prints on the right-hand side of the maintenance schedule. This provides a prompt for
maintenance personnel to complete the information about the job, that is relevant.
New Completion Comments Button
Note: Click New Completion Comments to enter new completion comments against a job.
APL tab
The APL tab enables you to review or modify Application Parts Listing (APL) information for the
task. APLs can be recorded if a standard bill of materials is available that suits the needs of this task.
2009 Mincom
418
Work Orders - 3620
Select this option and enter the APL equipment reference if the APL is to be held against an individual
piece of equipment.
Equipment Group ID
Select this option and enter the equipment group ID if the APL is to be held against an EGI.
Material Requirements Exist
If this option is selected, then material requirements have been set on this task. This prevents the
creation of an APL requirement. If an APL is required instead of individual material requirements, the
material requirements are deleted from the task before the APL is set up.
Component Code
Enter a component code or right-click to search for a component code if the APL is held against a
specific equipment sub-assembly.
Modifier Code
Enter a modifier code or right-click to search for a modifier code to designate a particular component
code.
Entry is validated against the Table File MO - Modifier Code.
Sequence Number
Enter the sequence number to designate individual APLs.

APL Lookup Button
Note: Click APL Lookup to open MSQ130 and search for an APL.
Task Assignment tab
The task assignment tab allows you to review open task assignment details for the task.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
419
MSQ625 - Parent Work Order

The Parent Work Order application allows for the grouping of Work Orders in cases where it is
convenient to manage the Work Orders as a single entity without the overhead of a formal
management project.
Search for Parent Work Order
The search window provides facilities for searching for a Parent Work Order based on a specific
search method and criteria.
All
Displays every Parent Work Order matching the selection criteria entered.
Exact Match
Displays the exact Parent Work Order based upon the entries made in the search
fields.
Starts From
Displays the Parent Work Orders which start from the specified characters and
Starts With
Displays the Parent Work Orders which start with the specified characters and
Parent Work Order - MSQ625

Parent Work Order
In create mode, enter a Parent Work Order number or allow the system to generate a number. If using
a Prefix, entry is not allowed.
In maintain mode, you can review the system-generated or user-defined Parent Work Order number,
including prefix, if applicable.
or Prefix
The prefix of the Parent Work Order. Prefixes must be created as part of configuration on the District
Control file.
District Code
The District to which the Parent Work Order belongs.

The description of the Parent Work Order.

Tabs
General
2009 Mincom
420
Work Orders - 3620
Costs
Resources
General tab
The General tab provides for recording and displaying general details for a Parent Work Order.
Originator Id
Enter or right-click, search and select the Employee ID code and name of the person who originated
this Parent Work Order.
When creating a new Parent Work Order, an entry in this field is mandatory.
Authorised By
The Employee ID code and name of the person who authorised this Parent Work Order.
Request ID
Enter or right-click, search and select the Work Request ID linked to the Parent Work Order. If this
Parent Work Order creation was initiated by the Work Request application, the Work Request ID will
default.
Equipment Reference
Enter or right-click, search and select the reference and description of the equipment for which this
Parent Work Order was raised. An entry in this field is optional.
Parent Standard Job / Plan
When a Parent Work Order is created by copying a Parent Standard Job/Plan, the identification
number for the copied Parent Standard Job/Plan appears in this field.
This field is review-only.
No. of Subordinate WOs
The number of subordinate Work Orders for this parent.

On a Work Order you can specify the identification number of a Parent Work Order. The Work Order
then becomes a subordinate of the Parent Work Order. The system totals the number of subordinates
for the Parent Work Order and displays the number in this field.
DATES
Plan Start
The date on which work on this Parent Work Order is scheduled to start.
Plan Finish
The date on which this Parent Work Order is scheduled to be completed.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
421
Raised
The date on which this Parent Work Order was raised.

This field defaults to display the date on which the Parent Work Order was first saved.
Required By
The date by which this Parent Work Order must be completed.

Authorised
The date on which this Parent Work Order was authorised.
Costs tab
Costs from each Work Order subordinate are combined and displayed on this tab. Costs shown include
actual and estimated costs, the variances between these costs, and total costs.
ESTIMATED COSTS
Estimated costs are rolled up from the total estimated costs specified for each subordinate Work Order
for this parent.
Labour
The estimated costs for labour recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
Materials
The estimated costs for materials recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
Equipment
The estimated costs for equipment recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
Other

Total
The total estimated costs.

ACTUAL COSTS
Labour
The actual costs for labour recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
Materials
The actual costs for materials recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
2009 Mincom
422
Work Orders - 3620
Equipment
The actual costs for equipment recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
Other
The actual other costs accrued recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.
Total
The total actual costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders.

VARIANCE COSTS
Labour
The difference between actual and estimated costs for labour.

Materials
The difference between actual and estimated costs for materials.

Equipment
The difference between actual and estimated costs for equipment.

Other
The difference between actual and estimated other costs.

Total
The total difference between actual and estimated costs.

RESOURCE HOURS
Estimated
Actual

Resources tab
The Resources tab displays all the resource types specified on each subordinate Work Order.
Class
The resource class code.

Description
A description of the resource class.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
423
Res Type
(Resource Type)
The resource type code.
Description
A description of the resource type.

Crew Sz
(Crew Size)
The number of people in the work crew allocated to this task.
Est Hrs
(Estimated Hours)
The estimated hours of completing this Work Order.
Act Hrs
(Actual Hours)
The actual hours of completing this Work Order.
Extended Description tab
Use the Extended Description tab to create and modify an extended text description for a Parent Work
Order.
Extended Description (Primary Field)
The top field on this tab stores header text information. Enter or modify this information as required.
Extended Description (Secondary Field)
The bottom field on this tab stores the body text of the extended description. Enter or modify this
information as required.
2009 Mincom
424
Work Orders - 3620
MSQ629 - Notice
This MSQ629 application is used to record the information required for communicating with an
authority who needs to be notified when work is to be performed at a location. A notice is initiated
from a work order and the Work Notice application provides a means for:
Maintaining and processing notices
Recording the history of notifications to an authority
Details of locations that require a notice are stored as notice location records. They are created and
maintained in the Notice Location application (MSQ62B). A notice location can be linked to a work
order. If the work order initiates the creation of a notice, details contained within the linked notice
location (such as interested parties and protected periods) are included in the notice.
For further information about the Work Notice application, refer to the Notifications module
overview.
Search for Notice (MSQ629)
Search Criteria
The search window provides facilities for searching for a Notice based on a specific search method
and criteria. There are a number of search fields available. Enter search criteria into these fields to
narrow the search.
All
Displays every Notice matching the selection criteria entered.
Work Notices
Displays only the Work Notices matching the selection criteria entered.
Daily Whereabouts
Displays only the Daily Whereabouts Notices matching the selection criteria
entered.
Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice

Notice for Work Order
The work order number and the description of the work order.
Notice Status
Notice status refers to the current status of the notice. Possible values are:
Original - The first communication with the recipient(s).
Follow-up - Planned subsequent communication(s) with recipient(s).
Aborted - Notice never sent and no longer required.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
425
Cancelled - A Cancelled status indicates that previous communications are to be ignored. A copy
of the previous communication endorsed as cancelled is issued.
Amended - An Amended status indicates that changes have been made to the previous
communication.
Completed - A Completed status indicates that there will be no more communication.
Send Status
Send status refers to the send status of the notice. Possible values are:
Pending - This status is assigned to a notice that was initiated from a work order that does not as
yet have a planned start date recorded on it.
Queued - Notice available for sending. Notices are queued at a set time before their due date.
Aborted - Never sent and no longer required.
Sent - Notice has been sent to the specified recipient(s).
Tabs
Notice
Reinstatement
Protected Period
History
Notice tab
This tab provides for recording and viewing details of the notice. Notice details are recorded using two
sources:
Generated from the work order
Manually entered.

DUE
The due date is determined from the associated work orders planned start date. If there is a planned
start date, the due date is assigned and the notice is given a send status of QUEUED. If a planned start
date is not available on the work order, a due date is not recorded and the notice is assigned a send
status of PENDING.
A calculated due date must not earlier than todays date. If it is earlier than todays date, a warning
appears.
Date
The due date of notice.

The due date is calculated by subtracting the value in the Notice Send Period associated value of the
Table File NPER - Notice Period, from the Work Planned Start Date of the notice.
This field entry is system-generated and cannot be modified.
2009 Mincom
426
Work Orders - 3620
Time
The due time of notice.

This field entry is system-generated and cannot be modified.
NOTICE DETAILS
Originator Cross Reference
The required ID for the originator, if required.

Estimated Inspection Unit
The estimated inspection unit, if required.

Works Status
The work status. It defaults to A - Work About to Start.

Comments Line 1
Comments required for the notice. This is a free text area.

Comments Line 2
Additional comments required for the notice. This is a free text area.
Category of Work
The category of work code which is assigned by the system from the Work Order maintenance type
associated value.
Category of work codes are defined in the Table File CATW - Category of Work and are defined
against the maintenance types. The associated values for the table codes of this table type contain the
type of notice and the notice period for both the traffic sensitive and non-traffic sensitive work.
Notice Period
The notice period code which is assigned by the system from the link between the Work Order
maintenance type associated values and the CATW Table File.
This period is derived from the work orders category of work and the sensitivity of the notice
location.
Location
The location code which is assigned by the system from the location code entered on the associated
work order.
Location Description
The description of the location which defaults from the location code.
Reinstatement tab
Details for a reinstatement notice are recorded on the reinstatement tab. The details recorded on this
tab are included in reinstatement notice reports for the notice and associated work order.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
427
Hint: A shortcut menu is available by right-clicking in the Reinstatement grid.

Reinstat Not ID
(Reinstatement Notice ID)

The identifying number for the reinstatement notice.
Creation Date
The date when the reinstatement notice was created.

This information is system-generated.
Creation Time
The time when the reinstatement notice was created.

This information is system-generated.
Excav Posn
(Excavation Position)
The position of the required excavation for example, footpath or carriageway.
Either type or select an entry. An entry is not mandatory.
Act Inspct Unit
(Actual Inspection Units)

The value as specified by the authority.
Surf Class
(Surface Classification)
A classification for the type of surface found at the excavation position.
Either type or select an entry. An entry for this field is not mandatory.
Snd Stat
(Send Statement)
This field is used to record options for sending or resending a reinstatement notice. The following
options are available:
To authority - Select this option to send or resend to the authority specified for the associated
notice.
To Interested Parties - Select this option to send or resend to the interested parties specified
for the associated notice.
2009 Mincom
428
Work Orders - 3620
To All - Select this option to send or resend to both the authority and the interested parties
specified for the associated notice.
Note: You can use one of the following buttons to execute the required action:
Button
Purpose
Availability
New
This button allows you to create a new

reinstatement notice.
This button exists at all times.
Modify
This button allows you to modify an existing

reinstatement notice.
This button is only available if

a reinstatement notice exists.
Delete
This button allows you to delete a reinstatement

notice.
This button is only available if

Send
This button allows you to send the reinstatement This button is only available if
notice to the relevant authorities or interested
parties.
Protected Period tab
A notice is initiated by the selection of specific notice locations and maintenance types when work
orders are created. A notice location contains details of authorities that need to be contacted when
work is conducted in a specific location where constraints apply. When a constraint usually prevents
work being conducted for a specific period, the period is referred to as a protected period.
Information for protected periods for a location is recorded on the notice location. That is, a notice
location contains the to and from dates and a description for each protected period associated with
the notice location.
When you are creating a work order in the work order application and you select a notice location, a
notice can be initiated. If a notice is initiated, the protected period information contained in the notice
location appears on the Protected Periods tab.
When a notice is initiated from a work order or reviewed in the Work Notice/ Daily Whereabouts
detail screen, the system checks the planned start date for work. If the start date falls within a
protected period you are informed that approval is required. If the start date does not fall within a
protected period, approval is not required.
From Date
The date the protected period starts.

To Date
The date the protected period ends.

Description
A description of the protected period associated with the notice location.

NOTICE LOCATION DETAILS
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
429
Notice Location
The ID of the notice location specified in the work order associated with the notice.
Description
A description of the notice location.

Sensitivity
The sensitivity code for the notice location. The constraint that applies to the location is determined
from the sensitivity.
WORK PLANNED START
Date
The date field for the start of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order
associated with the notice.
Time
The time field for the start of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order
WORK PLANNED FINISH
Date
The date field for the finish of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order
Time
The time field for the finish of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order
WORK APPROVED
Approval for work in the location for a protected period must be gained from the authority specified in
the notice location.
If the planned start date for work falls within a protected period, the system informs you that work
approval is required and the fields in the Work Approved group are activated.
By
The person who granted the approval.

Date
The date approval was received.

Time
The time approval was received.
2009 Mincom
430
Work Orders - 3620
History tab
The history for the notice includes a date and time for:
Creation
Last modification
Last sent
All fields on this tab are system-generated and cannot be modified. Field values are automatically
updated as the notice is modified.
CREATED
By
The ID and description of the person who created the notice.

Date
The date the notice was created.

Time
The time the notice was created.

LAST MODIFIED
By
The ID and description of the person who last modified the notice.
Date
The date the notice was last modified.

Time
The time the notice was last modified.

LAST SENT
Date
The date the most recent send action was performed.

Time
The time the most recent send action was performed.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
431
MSQ62C - Search for Task Assignments

The MSQ62C Task Assignment screen is used to either:
search for task assignments
create multiple task assignments
Work order tasks are assigned to an indefinite number of crews and or individuals (employees). When
a work order task is assigned to a crew or individual a record is created on the task assignment file
(MSF52C).
MSQ62C can be run as a standalone application or from the work order or work order task
applications. The following functions are available:
assign multiple crew and/or individuals
search for task assignments including finished task assignments
detail planned start and finish information
detail actual start and finish information
quick start and finish options
reschedule task assignments
set task assignment status
delete task assignments

Search for Task Assignments
The search screen provides the facility to search for a task assignment based on a specific search
method and criteria.
All
Displays every task assignment matching the selection criteria entered.
Exact Match
Displays the exact task assignment based upon the entries made in the search
fields.
Starts From
Displays the task assignment which starts from the specified characters and
Starts With
Displays the task assignment which starts with the specified characters and
2009 Mincom
432
Work Orders - 3620
Task Assignments
MSQ62C provides a search facility where the results display in a grid and various options are selected
from the menu bar to maintain, modify, reschedule and delete task assignments.
Work Order
Enter the work order number to search by work order. This field displays the work order number if
entered on the MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen.
WO Task No
(Work Order Task Number)

The work order task number.
Allocated Type
Enter the allocated type of either crew or individual (employee).

Allocated Entity
Enter the Employee ID or Crew assigned to the task. You can not enter both an allocated crew or
allocated employee.
District Code
The district code the crew or employee is assigned to.

Include Closed Assignments
Select this option to include closed task assignments in the search results.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
433
MSQ62C - Create Task Assignments

This screen is used to create multiple task assignments for a single work order task.
A work order number and task number must be entered before you can create a new task assignment.
The work order and task number defaults if entered on MSQ620 - Search for Work Order Task search
screen.
Work Order
Enter the work order number to search by work order. This field displays the work order number if
entered on the MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen.
WO Task No
(Work Order Task Number)

Enter the work order task number.
Allocated Crew
Enter the crew assigned to the work order task. This field is mandatory.
Allocated Employee
Enter the employee ID assigned to the task. You can not enter both an allocated crew or allocated
employee.
Assigned Start Date
The start date assigned to the crew or employee. This field is optional.
Assigned Start Time
The starting time the crew or employee is assigned to the task. This field is optional.
The finish date assigned to the crew or employee of the task. This field is optional.
The finishing time assigned to the crew or employee of the task. This field is optional.
Status
Status.
2009 Mincom
434
Work Orders - 3620
MSQ650 - Equipment Tracing

In Mincom Ellipse, equipment tracing provides for tracing nominated items of equipment through
their lifecycle of purchase, fitment, defitment, rebuild and repair.
The Equipment Tracing application is used to maintain the tracing actions recorded and updated as
part of the transaction, actioning an equipment, for example, a fitment work order or a stores issue.
The Equipment Tracing application provides for:
Adding an equipment tracing record for an action already recorded but has no tracing information
against it.
Amending the sequence of tracing actions where more than one action is performed on a tracing,
the same day, but were updated on file in an incorrect chronological sequence.
Deleting a previously recorded tracing record fitment.

Equipment Reference
Enter an equipment reference number for the installation position of the fitted equipment you want to
trace. An installation position includes the equipment reference number, component code and modifier
code. The entry in this field is validated against the Equipment Register to determine that it exists and
it is traceable.
If you open the Equipment Tracing detail screen from the Work Order detail screen, an equipment
reference number for the equipment specified in the work order displays.
Comp Code
(Component Code)
Enter the component code for the equipment, if required. Entry is required in this field if the
equipment specified for the tracing action is a component of the installation equipment. For example,
the engine fitted in a CAT111 (the installation equipment) has a component code of 1000.
Mod Code
(Modifier Code)
Enter the modifier code in this field (if one is required). Where more than one of a fitted equipment is
part of an equipment number, the modifier code indicates the location of each of the fitted equipment.
Equipment Descriptions
This field displays the description of the equipment as recorded in the Equipment Reference field.
Pref Equip/EGI
(Preferred Equipment/Equipment Group Identifier)

This field displays the classification of the equipment by group or equipment number. The type of
entry displayed depends on the installation position selected in the hierarchy.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
435
Fit Equipment Reference
Enter the equipment number that uniquely identifies the equipment fitted.
Fitted equipment refers to the item of equipment that is fitted in the specified installation position and
required the tracing action.
Descriptions
This field displays the description of the fitted equipment.

Fitment Date
The date the current fitment was completed.

Reference Number
The number of the document specifying the tracing action, for example, a work order. The source of
the number displayed is indicated by the reference type code. For example, if reference number
MAH02 displays with a reference type WO, the entry is referring to a work order (WO) with the
identifying number MAH02.
Cumulative Statistic
The cumulative statistic value since new for the fitted equipment. This is derived by adding the
statistics value achieved since the previous fitment or rebuild in situ to the cumulative value of the last
record of this statistic type. The value for this entry reflects the selection in the Statistic Type field.
Position Statistic
The statistic value achieved in this installation position since the previous fitment or rebuild in situ.
The value for this entry reflects the selection in the Statistic Type field.
Expected Between Rebuilds
The statistic value expected between rebuilds for the selected equipment. The statistic value in this
field is the corresponding value recorded against the EGI profile.
Life Since Rebuild/New
The statistic value for the fitted equipment accumulated since new or last rebuild. If a meter reset
record is located before finding a rebuild record, the total cumulative value is returned.
Remaining Life
The statistic value of the fitted equipment's remaining life.

Expected Overhaul/Replacement Date
The date the fitted equipment is due for replacement or overhaul.
2009 Mincom
436
Work Orders - 3620
MSQ655 - Job Estimating

The Job Estimating application is used to estimate the labour, equipment and material requirements,
and associated costs required to complete a job. The job could be anything from a capital works
construction project to a maintenance job.
Search for Job Estimates
Search Criteria
The search window provides facilities for searching for a Job Estimate based on a specific search
method and criteria. There may be a number of search fields available on a number of tabs on this
screen. Primary search keys display in bold. Enter search criteria into these fields to narrow the
search.
All
Displays every Job Estimate matching the selection criteria entered.
Exact Match
Displays the exact Job Estimate based upon the entries made in the search fields.
Starts From
Displays the Job Estimates which start from the specified characters and match the
Starts With
Displays the Job Estimates which start with the specified characters and match the
Job Estimating

Estimate Number
The unique identifying number for the Job Estimate.

Version No
The version number of the Job Estimate.

Description
A description of the Job Estimate.

Standard Estimate
Use this check box to create the estimate as a Standard Estimate. A Standard Estimate can be used as a
template for creating new Job Estimates but cannot be selected for work and packaging.
Tabs
Estimate Details
Estimate History
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
Estimate Planning
Estimate Costs
Estimate Items
Details
Costs
Planning
Location
CPR Installation
Unitisation
Quote Details
Estimate Location
Reference Codes
437
Estimate Details tab
The Estimate Details tab provides for capturing and displaying general information specific to the Job
Estimate being created, or reviewed in the detail screen.
User Status
This field displays the user status of the Job Estimate.

The User Status of a Job Estimate can be changed at any time by selecting JobEstimating Change
User status.
Entry is validated on the Table File JES User Status.
Owner District
This field displays the district in which the Job Estimate was created. This entry is defaulted from the
login district at the time of creation.
Originator ID
This field displays the employee ID of the person who originated the Job Estimate.
Job Type
The entry in this field is normally generated from the Work Request. The job type specifies the type of
job being estimated. For example, if your company is involved in preparing estimates for work on
equipment, installation and repair can be included in the selection list for the Job Type field.
An entry in this field is mandatory. If no entry defaults from the Work Request or you want to change
the job type, select a job type from the drop-down list. You will be asked to confirm an Adjustments
Factors message.
Entry is validated on the Table File WO - Work Order Types.
2009 Mincom
438
Work Orders - 3620
Business Type
A code defining the type of business or business sector the job estimate relates to. Entry is validated
against the Table File BUS - Business Type.
Operation Details
Operation type is one of the factors that determine requirements and associated costs for a Job
Estimate. An operation type is a user-defined code. For example, for requirements to be recorded for
both 'cold' (not energised) and 'hot' (energised) activities, cold and hot would be defined as operation
types.
Select an operation type from the drop-down list.
Entry is validated on the Table File OTYP Operation Type.
Request No
If a Work Request initiated the creation of a Job Estimate, the identifying number/code for the work
request is specified in this field.
Enter a Work Request number or right-click to search and select.
Owner Position
The position number, or user ID, of the person responsible for the construction and maintenance of the
estimate.
Enter an owner position or right-click to search and select.
Equipment Reference
If the Job Estimate is for a piece of equipment, the equipment number for the equipment is recorded in
this field.
Enter an equipment number or right-click to search and select.
Ownership
If ownership of the Job Estimate is shared, this field specifies the percentage ownership for your
organisation.
Vintage Year
Vintage year can be used for Mass Assets to record a bulk of assets installed in a particular year and to
track annual depreciation based on the year installed. For example, all of the poles installed in 1990
may be identified under a common Asset Account for that year. So all of the estimate may relate to
asset creation in a particular year. Alternatively, there may be a requirement to remove certain assets
as part of the job. By identifying the Vintage Year of those assets, the value of the removed assets can
be determined by assessing the depreciation of the assets value from the original value.
Entry in this field is optional.
Estimate History tab
A large amount of the information on the Estimate History tab is system-generated and displays in
read-only fields. The information displayed includes details of the changes to the status of the Job
Estimate.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
439
STATUS HISTORY
Authorized By
This field displays the person who changed the INPROGRESS status to AUTHORISED.
This entry is system-generated.
On
This field displays the date on which the job estimate was authorised.
This entry is system generated.
At
This field displays the time when the job estimate was authorised.
Rejected By
This field displays the person who changed the status to REJECTED.
On
This field displays the date on which the status was changed to REJECTED.
At
This field displays the time at which the status was changed to REJECTED.
Superseded By
This field displays the person who changed the status to SUPERSEDED.
On
This field displays the date on which the status was changed to SUPERSEDED.
At
This field displays the time at which the status was changed to SUPERSEDED.
Packaged Date
This field displays the date the Job Estimate was packaged.
2009 Mincom
440
Work Orders - 3620
Packaged Time
This field displays the time when the Job Estimate was packaged.
Selected Date
This field displays the date the Job Estimate was selected.
Selected Time
This field displays the time when the Job Estimate was selected.
ESTIMATE TIMES/DATES
Creation Date
The date on which the Job Estimate was first created.

Creation Time
This field displays the time at which the Job Estimate was first created.
Reqd Start Date
(Required Start Date)

Record the required start date for the job.
Reqd Start Time
(Required Start Time)

Record the required start time for the job.
Reqd Finish Date
(Required Finish Date)

Record the required finish date for the job.
Reqd Finish Time
(Required Finish Time)

Record the required finish time for the job.
Expiry Date
Record the expiry date for the job.

Expiry Time
Record the expiry time for the job.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
441
Late Mat Date
(Late Materials Date)

This field displays the latest availability date for the material requirements.
Estimate Planning tab
The Estimate Planning tab is used to record information to assist with planning and scheduling
programmed work based on standard estimates. This information will be copied across to Ellipse
entities such as work orders that are created from this estimate.
Equipment Ref
The identification of the equipment on which work is to be performed.

Segments Button
in MSO600.
Comp Code
(Component Code)
The code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the equipment. Entry is validated against the Table
File CO - Component Code.
Comp Mod Code

Note: Click the EGI Profile Search icon to display the Dialog Box - EGI Profile Search to search for
Account Code
The cost centre or account number where the work is to be charged.

Work Group
The work group to be assigned to complete this work.

Plan Start Date

The date scheduled for starting the work. This must be less than the Plan Finish Time.
This field is mandatory if a Plan Start Time is entered.
2009 Mincom
442
Work Orders - 3620
Plan Start Time
(Planned Start Time)

The time scheduled for starting the work.
If the Plan Start Date is today this field will default to the current time. Otherwise, this field will
default to either the Work Group start time, or midnight.
Plan Finish Date

The date scheduled for finishing the work. This must be equal to or later than the Plan Start Date.
This field is mandatory if a Plan Finish Time is entered.
Plan Finish Time
(Planned Finish Time)

The time scheduled for finishing the work.
If the Plan Finish Date is today this field will default to the current time. Otherwise, this field will
Est Dur Hours
(Estimate Duration Hours)

The estimated duration in hours to complete this work. This is used in conjunction with the Plan Start
Date and Work Group to calculate the Plan Finish Date if one is not entered, according to the
following rules:
If a Work Group is specified, use the default working hour for the work group to calculate the Plan
Finish Date from the Plan Start Date and Duration.
If no Work Group is specified, assume a 24 hour working day to calculate the Plan Finish Date.
Estimate Costs tab
The Estimate Costs tab displays the cost details for the Job Estimate which have been recorded in the
Dialog Box - Job Estimate Costs.
Costs that have been calculated are displayed with a
Costs that have been manually recorded as displayed with a

COSTS
Material Costs
This field displays the total cost of material requirements.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
443
Resource Costs
This field displays the total cost of resource requirements.

Equipment Costs
This field displays the total cost of equipment requirements.

Other Costs
This field displays the total of other costs.

Contract Costs
This field displays the total of contractor costs.

Total Cost
This field displays the total of requirements, other and contractor costs.
ADJUSTMENT
Material Costs Adjustment
This field displays the adjustments associated with material requirements.

Resource Costs Adjustment
This field displays the adjustments associated with resource requirements.

Equipment Costs Adjustment
This field displays the adjustments associated with equipment requirements.

Total Costs Adjustment
This field displays the total adjustments for all requirements.

COSTS AFTER ADJUSTMENT
Material Costs After Adjustment
This field displays the total cost of material requirements including adjustments associated with
material requirements.
Resource Costs after Adjustment
This field displays the total cost of resource requirements including adjustments associated with
resource requirements.
Equipment Costs after Adjustment
This field displays the total cost of equipment requirements including adjustments associated with
equipment requirements.
2009 Mincom
444
Work Orders - 3620
Other Costs after Adjustment
This field displays the total cost after accounting for risks for costs other than requirement costs and
contract costs.
Total Costs after Adjustment
This field displays the total of requirements, other and contractor costs including all adjustments.
Calc Res Hours
(Calculated Resource Hours)

This field displays the total resource hours required. The total cost, after accounting for adjustments, is
calculated for the hours specified in this field.
Estimate Items tab
The Estimate Items tab provides for constructing, modifying and reviewing the hierarchy for a Job
Estimate. This tab is divided into two sections:
Hierarchy Panel - The hierarchy for the job estimate is developed in the hierarchy panel. The tools
required for developing a hierarchy are available on the toolbar immediately above the panel.
Detail Panel - This panel contains the following tabs:
Details
Costs
Planning
Location
CPR Installation
Unitisation
Details tab (Estimate Items tab)
The Details tab provides for recording and displaying details for an item that is selected in the
hierarchy.
Item No
The Job Estimate item number.

Description
The description recorded in this first Description field is the label displayed for the item in the
hierarchy. The second Description field is available for additional descriptive information.
Qty Reqd
(Quantity Required)
The quantity of the item required for the estimate. The default value is 1.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
445
Avail Qty
(Available Quantity)
The available quantity is automatically generated from the Qty Reqd field. Default value is 1. This
entry is the same as the Qty Reqd field entry until quantities have been included in a job package.
Ownership %
If more than one party is responsible for the resulting assets, the figure in this field specifies the
percentage ownership by your organisation.
Description
The description recorded in the first Description field is the label displayed for the item in the
hierarchy. This second Description field is available for additional descriptive information.
Contestable Item
Select this check box if the item is contestable. This may be by Government Regulation, requiring
competitive prices to be sought. Multiple prices can be sought and compared. Normally, the lowest
priced option is selected at the time of estimation.
Auto Consolidate
(Auto Consolidation for Bulk Packaging)

Indicates that the item with all its sub-items should be consolidated automatically during the
packaging process.
Job Type
The job type is defaulted from the Estimate Details tab. If necessary, use the arrow button displayed in
this field to select a different entry.
Bus Type
(Business Type)
The business type is defaulted from the Estimate Details tab. If necessary, use the arrow button
displayed in this field to select a different entry.
Op Type
(Operation Type)
The operation type is defaulted from the Estimate Details tab. If necessary, use the arrow button
displayed in this field to select a different entry.
Contractor
This field is available if the item is a Compatible Unit (CU).

Orig Priority
2009 Mincom
446
Work Orders - 3620
Costs tab (Estimate Items tab)
The Costs tab provides for recording, reviewing and maintaining requirement and contract costs, at an
item level in the hierarchy.
The Estimate Costs tab displays the cost details for the Job Estimate requirements which have been
recorded in the Requirements dialog box. For more information, refer to the following activities:
Record Material Requirements for a Job Estimate Item
Record Equipment Requirements for a Job Estimate Item
Record Resource Requirements for a Job Estimate Item
Costs which have been calculated are displayed with a
Costs which have been manually recorded as displayed with a

Material Costs
This field displays the material requirements costs for the item.
Resource Costs
This field displays the resource requirements costs for the item.
Resource Hrs
(Resource Hours)
This field displays the resource hours for the item.
Equipment Costs
This field displays the equipment requirements costs for the item.
Other Costs
This field displays the other costs for the item.

Contract Costs
This field displays the roll-up contractor costs for everything in the hierarchy below the selected item
(including the selected item).
Contract Costs
(for this item only)

This field displays the contractor costs for the selected item only.
Total Cost
This field displays the total requirements, contractor and other costs for the item.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
447
Planning tab (Estimate Items tab)
The Planning tab records information to assist with planning and scheduling programmed work at an
item level in the hierarchy. This information will be copied across to Ellipse entities such as work
orders that are created from this estimate.
Equipment Ref
The identification of the equipment on which work is to be performed.
Segments Button
in MSO600.
Comp Code
(Component Code)
The code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the equipment. Entry is validated against the Table
File CO - Component Code.
Comp Mod Code

Note: Click the EGI Profile Search icon to display the Dialog Box - EGI Profile Search to search for
Account Code
The cost centre or account number where the work is to be charged.

Work Group
The work group to be assigned to complete this work.

Plan Start Date

The date scheduled for starting the work. This must be less than the Plan Finish Time.
This field is mandatory if a Plan Start Time is entered.
Plan Start Time
(Planned Start Time)

The time scheduled for starting the work.
2009 Mincom
448
Work Orders - 3620
If the Plan Start Date is today this field will default to the current time. Otherwise, this field will
Plan Finish Date

The date scheduled for finishing the work. This must be equal to or later than the Plan Start Date.
This field is mandatory if a Plan Finish Time is entered.
Plan Finish Time
(Planned Finish Time)

The time scheduled for finishing the work.
If the Plan Finish Date is today this field will default to the current time. Otherwise, this field will
Est Dur Hours
(Estimate Duration Hours)

The estimated duration in hours to complete this work. This is used in conjunction with the Plan Start
Date and Work Group to calculate the Plan Finish Date if one is not entered, according to the
following rules:
If a Work Group is specified, use the default working hour for the work group to calculate the Plan
Finish Date from the Plan Start Date and Duration.
If no Work Group is specified, assume a 24 hour working day to calculate the Plan Finish Date.
Man Effort
(Manual Effort)
The total effort allocated to this item to increase/decrease the estimated duration hours. This field
defaults to 1.
When the manual effort value is modified the Estimated Duration Hours field is recalculated based
on the new manual effort value. The new estimated duration hours is calculated from the original
Location tab (Estimate Items tab)
In the Location tab you can select a location for the item selected in the hierarchy. The location
details will display in the associated fields.
Location
Enter a location or right-click to search and select.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
449
STREET NO
The details of the location selected including street number, street name, city and post code will
display in these fields.
ADDRESS
The free-from address details of the located selected will display in these fields.
CPR Installation tab (Estimate Items tab)
The CPR Installation tab is used to record information required for the unitisation process. For more
information, refer to the Utilities Asset Accounting module.
Property Unit
Property Unit is the term used to refer to the level at which a company chooses to capitalise its assets.
Enter the property unit code required for the selected item in the hierarchy.
Asset Number
The selected item will be capitalised against a plant account.

Enter the number of the plant account.
CPR Location Category
Select a CPR location category from the drop-down list.

The CPR location category codes are associated with the Table File LG.
CPR Location
Select a CPR location from the drop-down list.

Vintage Year
This entry is recorded for removal work.

Enter the year in which the material is to be retired.
Installation Identifier
This entry is recorded for removal work. When a specific asset is to be retired, the installation
identifier is used to identify the asset.
Enter the installation identifier.
Unitisation tab (Estimate Items tab)
The Unitisation tab allows input of information required for the unitisation process. It is only
available if the Utilities Asset Accounting module (3930) is installed.
2009 Mincom
450
Work Orders - 3620
Business Category
Enter the business category for the work that is to be conducted, for example, transmission or
distribution.
Tax Class
Select a tax class for reporting purposes from the drop-down list.
Account Code
Enter the account code to which costs for the selected item are to be charged.
Quantity Check
Select this check box if you want the unitisation process to report discrepancies between estimated and
actual quantities.
Quote Details tab
The Quote Details tab displays details of a quote issued for the Job Estimate. This information is
generated when the status of the estimate is changed to QUOTE and details of the status change are
recorded during the Record Quote Details for a Job Estimate activity.
Quoted By
This field displays the employee code of the person providing the quote.
Quoted Value
The amount specified for the quote.

Quote Status
This field indicates the status of the quote. The value is system-generated.
Quoted Date
The date the quote was recorded.

Quoted Time
The time the quote was recorded.

Issue Date
This field displays the date the quote was issued.

Accepted Date
This field displays the date the customer accepted the quotation.
Estimate Location tab
The Estimate Location tab is used to select and display the location details for the Job Estimate.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
451
Location
Enter or right-click to search and select a location code.

ADDRESS
Street Number
The street number of the location.

Street Type
This field displays the street type of the location.

Street Name
The street name of the location.

Suburb
The suburb of the location.

Street Position
This field displays the street position of the location.

City
The city of the location.

County
The county of the location.

Post/Zip Code
The postcode or ZIP code of the location.

GIS Reference
This field displays the GIS (Graphical Information System) reference of the location.
State
This field displays the state the location is in.

Free Form Address
This field displays the free form address information about the location.
Reference Codes tab
Use the Reference Code tab to record reference code details for a Job Estimate.
The reference codes tab enables you to view reference code information for a Job Estimate. Reference
codes are used to define additional information about a Job Estimate and are powerful search criteria.
A reference code can be used:
2009 Mincom
452
Work Orders - 3620
To provide a link to another entity
As a search criterion when searching for Job Estimates

Reference Code
The Reference Codes for Job Estimates are agreed during implementation. A list of valid codes for Job
Estimates displays.
Enter the value of the reference code for the Job Estimate.
Description
This field displays the description of the reference code value.

Text
If the text icon is present, click on it to display the Dialog Box - Standard Text. Use this dialog box to
review, add or modify standard text as required.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
453
MSQ695 - Job Package

The MSQ695 - Job Package screen displays the current hierarchy and details for a Job Package. The
information displays in two sections:
The left section has a panel in which you can view and modify a hierarchy for a Job Package.
To the right of the hierarchy panel is a detail section. The information in this section refers directly
to the 'node' selected in the hierarchy and contains details of this item.
Node refers to a specific item in a Job Package hierarchy. A node can be a Project, sub-Project, Parent
Work Order, Work Order, or Work Order task.
In the hierarchy panel you can create, modify, delete and review Job Packages and nodes on specific
Job Package hierarchies. You can also package job estimates from the Include Job Estimates screen.
Hint: MSQ695 does not contain a search screen. Existing Job Packages are accessed using the Dialog
Box - Open Existing, which enables Job Packages related to either a Project, Work Order or Parent
Work Order to be opened. For more information, refer to the Open a Job Package activity.
Node Count
This number determines the number of Nodes to be added when creating a Job Package Hierarchy. A
number can be entered directly or the up and down arrows can be used to select the number of nodes
to be added. For further information on using Node Counts - see Add an Item to a Hierarchy.
Tabs
Project Details
Project Codes
Parent WO Details
Work Order Details
Job Codes
WO Task Details
Project Details tab
The Project fields appear when you:
Add a Project to the hierarchy
Select a Project item in the hierarchy
The
icon against an item, indicates that it is a Project. When the item is selected, it is highlighted.
2009 Mincom
454
Work Orders - 3620
Project No
This field displays the number of the Project selected in the hierarchy. If the selected Project is a new
item, enter the Project number.
You cannot enter both a Project Number and a Project Prefix. If a Project prefix number is entered, a
Project number is automatically assigned when the Job Package is saved.
Prefix
If a default value was entered for Project prefix, it will display when a new Project is added to the
hierarchy. If no default Project Prefix was set, enter a Project prefix code from the Table File PX Project (AFE) Code Type.
When you save the details entered on the Project tab the system allocates the next available Project
Number with that prefix. You cannot enter both a Project Number and a Project Prefix.
Project Description
This field displays the Project description, if the Project was previously saved.
If it has not yet been created and saved, enter a Project description.
Originator Id
This field displays the ID of the person who created the Project, if it has already been created.
If the Default values on the Project creation have been set to 'Use Logged in User' then the logged
in user ID will display.
If the Default Values have been set with an alternative Originator ID, that ID will display.
If no default values have been set, search for and select an employee number.
The name of the person associated with the ID number displays in the adjacent field.
Account Code
This field displays the account code or cost centre to which this Project is allocated. This field is
mandatory if you are adding a new Project.
If no default value has been set for the Account Code, then search for and select an account code.
A description of the account code appears in the adjacent field.
Equipment Reference
This field displays the equipment number that costs with this Project are charged against. If the Project
involves rebuilding or constructing a major piece of equipment, the costs are charged against the
equipment.
If no default value has been set for the Equipment Number, then search for and select an equipment
number.
A description of the equipment appears in the adjacent field.
Raised Date
This field displays the date on which the Project record was created.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
455
If the default value is set to record today's date as the Raised Date, then today's date will display. If an
alternate date is set as the default date, then that date will display.
If no date is set as the default Raised Date, then select a date.
Job Type
The type of job defaults from the Project if an existing Project has been included.
If the Job Type can be altered, the Job Type Enabled check box will be selected.
Associated BPU
Select this check box if an Install Bill of Property (IBPU) or a Remove Bill of Property (RBPU) is to
be generated at the currently highlighted point in the hierarchy.
Parent Project
The identification number of the parent Project for the Project selected in the hierarchy. This entry is
automatically generated from details recorded against the Project.
Units Required
Contains the number of units needed to complete the Project as defined on the MSQ660 - Project
screen.
Project Codes tab
As Project codes are stored against Projects, this tab only displays when a Project node is selected in
the hierarchy.
On the Project Codes tab you can select specific job codes. Ellipse provides for 10 classification tables
for job codes.
Code
Enter the job code or select it from the table file. Job codes are validated on the Table File J1 - J5 Project Codes and are client-defined. Therefore, the codes available will depend on which table files
have been setup.
Description
The description of the job code displays from the Table File J1 - J5 - Project Codes.
Parent WO Details tab
The Parent WO Details tab displays when you add a Parent Work Order item to a Job Package.
The
icon against an item in the hierarchy indicates that the item is a Parent Work Order. When
the item is selected, it is highlighted.
Parent WO
(Parent Work Order)

2009 Mincom
456
Work Orders - 3620
If this is a new Parent Work Order, and a default was set on Dialog Box - Job Package Default Values,
the defaulted value will display in this field.
If no default displays, enter a Parent Work Order number or let the system generate one.
Prefix
If no default displays, enter a Parent Work Order number or let the system generate one.
(Parent Work Order Description)

This field displays a description of the Parent Work Order being added.
Originator ID
If no default displays, search for and select an employee number.
Originator Description
This field displays the name of the person who created the Parent Work Order.
The Work Order fields display when you:
Add a Work Order item to a Job Package
Select a Work Order item in the hierarchy
icon against an item in the hierarchy indicates that the item is a Work Order. When the item
The
is selected, it is highlighted.
Work Order
If this is a new Work Order, and a default was set on Dialog Box - Job Package Default Values, the
defaulted value will display in this field.
If no default displays, enter a Work Order number or let the system generate one.
Prefix
If no default displays, enter a Work Order prefix.
defaulted value will display in this field. Modifications can be made as required.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
457
If no default displays, enter a Work Order description.

Originator ID
defaulted value will display in this field. The adjacent field contains the name of the person who
created the Work Order.
If no default displays, search for and select an employee number.
Originator Description
This field displays the name of the person who created the Parent Work Order added or selected.
Account Code
This field displays the account code or cost centre to which the Work Order is allocated. This field is
mandatory if you are adding a new Work Order.
Search for and select an account code, if required.
The adjacent field contains a description of the account code or cost centre to which this Work Order
is allocated.
Equipment Reference
This field displays the equipment number that costs are charged against. If the Work Order involves
rebuilding or constructing a major piece of equipment, the costs are charged against the equipment.
defaulted value will display in this field. The adjacent field shows a description of the equipment.
If no default displays, search for and select an equipment number, if required.
Work Group
This field defaults from the Work Order added or selected. This field displays the ID of the work
group to which this Work Order is assigned.
defaulted value will display in this field. The adjacent field shows a description of the work group.
If no default displays, search for and select a work group, if required.
Project No
This field displays the identification number for the Project referenced by the Work Order.
Work Order Type
defaulted value will display in this field. The adjacent field shows a description of the Work Order
type.
If no default displays, select a Work Order type from the Table File WO - Work Order Types.
2009 Mincom
458
Work Orders - 3620
Parent WO
This field displays the identification number of the Parent Work Order added or selected.
Maintenance Type
defaulted value will display in this field. The adjacent field shows a description of the maintenance
type.
If no default displays, select a maintenance type.
Units Required
This field displays the quantity of work that needs to be done before this Work Order is completed.
Location
If no default displays, select a location.
Associated BPU
Select this check box if an IBPU or a RBPU is to be generated at the currently highlighted point in the
hierarchy.
Job Codes tab
As job codes are stored against Work Orders, this tab only appears when a Work Order node is
selected in the hierarchy.
On the Job Codes tab you can classify Work Orders based on the client-defined Table Files W0-W9 Work Order Job Codes.
Classification
This field displays the descriptions of the classifications that exist.

Code
Enter the job code or select it from the table file. Job codes are validated on the Table File J1 - J5 Project Codes and are client-defined. Therefore, the codes available will depend on which table files
have been setup.
Description
This field displays the description of the job code.

WO Task Details tab
The Work Order Task fields appear when you:
Add a Work Order task item to a Job Package
Select a Work Order item in the hierarchy
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
459
The
icon against an item in the hierarchy indicates that the item is a Work Order task. When the
item is selected, it is highlighted.
WO Task No.
If this is a new Work Order task, and a default was set on Dialog Box - Job Package Default Values,
the defaulted value will display in this field. The adjacent field shows a description of the Work Order
task number.
If no default displays, enter a Work Order task number or allow the system to generate one.
WO Task Description
the defaulted value will display in this field. Modifications can be made as required.
If no default displays, enter a Work Order task description.
Work Group
the defaulted value will display in this field. The adjacent field shows a description of the Work
Group.
Work Order
This field displays the Work Order number to which the Work Order Task belongs.
Units Required
This field displays the quantity of work that needs to be done before the Work Order is completed.
2009 Mincom
460
Work Orders - 3620
MSQ901 - Accounting Entry

The Journal Holding file is a file where all accounting transactions generated by the many modules in
Ellipse are located. The MSQ901 - Search for Accounting Entry is the tool used to access the Journal
Holding File to view accounting transactions generated within Ellipse.
The search screen provides the functionality to locate and open an accounting entry. When an
accounting entry opens, transaction details are displayed in the Accounting Entry detail screen.
The search tabs can be used in conjunction with each other to refine search criteria and retrieve
specific data.
Hint: Another screen that is available for Transaction Retrieval and Review is MSO901 - Transaction
Selection for Review. This contains the same selection criteria and displays the same output as
MSQ901 - Search for an Accounting Entry. However, the display format of the search criteria and
output differs.
Search for Accounting Entry

District Code
The District Code to retrieve transactions. Entry can be for any valid district you have access to. It
does not have to be the district that you are currently logged into.
Sequence
The sequence in which the transactions are displayed once retrieved. Use the popup table to select the
view or leave blank for it to default to Transaction Creation Sequence.
Pre Search tabs
Identifier
Transaction
Costing
Timing
Subledger
Object
Invoice
Voucher
Miscellaneous
Identifier tab
This tab provides the ability to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the
transaction number and transaction group.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
461
TRANSACTION NUMBER
From
The transaction number this search is to commence from.

To
The transaction number for this search is to end at.

GROUP
From
The transaction group number this search is to commence from.

To
The transaction group number this search is to end at.

Transaction tab
This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the
transaction type, category and status.
TRANSACTION TYPE
From
The transaction type this search is to commence from.

To
The transaction type this search is to end at.

CATEGORY
From
The transaction category this search is to commence from.

To
The transaction category this search is to end at.

STATUS
From
Enter one of the following to start the search from:
2009 Mincom
462
Work Orders - 3620
Only review transactions not posted due to an error in the transaction
Only review non-posted and non-approved transactions
Only review posted transactions
Only review posted transactions with errors
Only review unapproved transactions
To
Enter the transaction status this search is to end at. If a To value is not entered, the From value is the
starting point of the search.
Costing tab
account, journal, expense element and cost centre.
ACCOUNT
From
The costing account number this search is to commence from.

To
The costing account number this search is to end at.

JOURNAL
From
The journal number this search is to commence from.

To
The journal number this search is to end at.

EXPENSE ELEMENT
From
The expense element this search is to commence from.

To
The expense element this search is to end at.

COST CENTRE
From
The cost centre this search is to commence from.

2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
463
To
The cost centre this search is to end at.

Timing tab
transaction date, creation date and accounting period.
TRANSACTION DATE
From
The transaction date this search is to commence from.

To
The transaction date this search is to end at. If Transaction Date is selected, then at least one additional
field must be selected in combination. The access method will be determined from the additional field
selected, for example, Transaction Type, Category or Posted.
CREATION DATE
From
The creation date this search is to commence from.

To
The creation date this search is to end at.

ACCOUNTING PERIOD
From
The accounting period this search is to commence from.

To
The accounting period this search is to end at.

Subledger tab
system account, account type and sub-ledger account.
SYSTEM ACCOUNT
From
The system account this search is to commence from.

To
The system account this search is to end at.

2009 Mincom
464
Work Orders - 3620
TYPE
From
The subledger account type this search is to commence from.

To
The subledger account type this search is to commence from.

SUBLEDGER ACCOUNT
From
The sub-ledger account this search is to commence from.

To
The sub-ledger account this search is to end at.

Object tab
stock code, work order, equipment and project.
STOCK CODE
From
The stock code this search is to commence from.

To
The stock code this search is to end at.

WORK ORDER
From
The work order this search is to commence from.

To
The work order this search is to end at.

EQUIPMENT
From
The equipment number this search is to commence from.

To
The equipment number this search is to end at.

PROJECT
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
465
From
The project number this search is to commence from.

To
The project number this search is to end at.

Asset
Sub Asset Ref
The sub asset reference code to search on.

This field is made up of:
Asset Type - A or E (Asset or Equipment)
Asset or Equipment Reference
Sub Asset Number
Invoice tab
accounts payable supplier/invoice or accounts receivable invoice. Where you provide an accounts
payable invoice, you must also provide a supplier identifier. You can, however, provide a supplier
identifier without the accounts payable invoice values.
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE SUPPLIER
From
The supplier number this search is to commence from.

To
The supplier number this search is to end at.

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE INVOICE
From
The accounts payable invoice number this search is to commence from.

To
The accounts payable invoice number this search is to end at.

ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE INVOICE
From
The accounts receivable invoice number this search is to commence from.

To
The accounts receivable invoice number this search is to end at.

2009 Mincom
466
Work Orders - 3620
Voucher tab
This tab displays if voucher numbering is turned on.

Voucher No From
Enter the first (From) and last voucher number (To) in the range to be issued. If only the Voucher No
From field is entered, transactions for that voucher number only display.
The voucher number consists of a district code, full accounting period and voucher sequence number.
Miscellaneous tab
This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using
miscellaneous information such as requestor, district cross-reference, category code or value.
REQUESTED BY
From
The employee ID this search is to commence from.

To
The employee id this search is to end at.

XREF DISTRICT
From
The cross reference code this search is to commence from.

To
The cross reference code this search is to end at.

CATEGORY CODE
From
The category code this search is to commence from.

To
The category code this search is to end at.

VALUE
From
The accounting entry value this search is to commence from.

To
The accounting entry value this search is to end at.
2009 Mincom
Work Orders - 3620
467
Tabs
General
Details
Additional
General tab
This tab provides the ability to review information common to all accounting entries.
Created On
This field displays the date the transaction was created.

Created At
This field displays the time the transaction was created.

Created By
This field displays the user ID the transaction was created.

Period
This field displays the year/month the transaction was created.

Transaction Date
This field displays the date the transaction was created.

Process Date
This field displays the date the transaction was processed.

Transaction Amount
This field displays the value of the transaction in local currency and the currency type code.
Secondary Amount
This field displays the value of the transaction in secondary currency and the currency type code.
Foreign Amount
This field displays the value of the transaction in foreign currency and the currency type code.
Account
This field displays the account number code.

Account Description
This field displays the description of the account selected.

Transaction Type
This field displays the transaction code and description.

2009 Mincom
468
Work Orders - 3620
Details tab
Information specific to the accounting entry selected is displayed on this tab.

The information displayed in this tab varies depending on the module used to create the original
transaction.
For example, a transaction created in the Fixed Asset module displays different information to a
transaction created in the Materials module. Consequently the combination of fields displayed is
constantly changing.
Additional tab
This tab provides the facility to view additional information common to all accounting entries.
Status Report
This field displays the report status code and description.

Status Posted
This field displays the posting status code and description.

Transaction Group
This field displays the transaction group name.

Xref District
(Cross-Reference District)
This field displays the cross-reference district code.
Voucher No
Voucher number displays if voucher numbering is turned on.
2009 Mincom

Todo Sobre WORK Order Ellipse

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Todo Sobre WORK Order Ellipse

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Work Orders - 3620

Ellipse Version 6.3.3

Document ID: 228604

Copyright 2009 by Mincom. All rights reserved.

Further Information - Module Overview..........................................................................................8

Create a Requisition ..........................................................................................................65

Work Orders - Screens

Dialog Box - Bulk Closure Work Orders .....................................................................................145

MSM627A - Maintain Incident Logsheets ..................................................................................277

Work Orders - 3620

Requirements of the activity

Schedule for the activity

Progress of the activity

Estimated and actual costs of the activity

Preventative Maintenance - The ideal situation for maintenance organisations is to be able to

Breakdown Maintenance - Although Preventative Maintenance is a goal of many asset intensive

Work Orders - 3620

Parent Standard Job

Parent Work Order

Standard Job Plan

Work Orders - 3620

Work Orders - 3620

Further Information - Module Overview

Maintenance Scheduling task, defining recurring tasks which can:

be performed in its own right without a work order

The following information pertaining to work orders is available:

Job description code

History file code

Part number causing failure

Equipment serial number taken off

Equipment serial number installed on

Work Orders - 3620

Work Orders - 3620

Operators log sheets

Inter-work group requests to perform work

Paperwork to get the job done

Inter-shift log sheet

Computer input documents.

Work Orders - 3620

Work Orders - Diagram

Configuring Work Orders

Work Orders - 3620

Work Orders - 3620

Configuring Work Orders - Diagram

Configure System Control File

Work Orders - 3620

Configure District Control File

Work Order Prefixes

Work Orders - 3620

Parent Work Order

Work Order (subordinate)

Maintain Work Order

System Control File

Create Work Order Prefixes

Work Orders - 3620

Maintain Table Files

CC - Completion Text Code

Work Orders - 3620

MJC - Mandatory Job Codes

MWDO - Manage Work District Options

PSDW - Plan Start Date Warning Messages

PY - Work Order Priority Code

SD - Plant Shutdown Type

US - User Defined WO Task Status